ML012990212

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
Exam Final Jpms. September 17-21, 2001
ML012990212
Person / Time
Site: Browns Ferry  Tennessee Valley Authority icon.png
Issue date: 10/18/2001
From: Ernstes M
Division of Reactor Safety II
To: Scalice J
Tennessee Valley Authority
References
-RFPFR, 50-259/01301, 50-260/01301, 50-296/01301
Download: ML012990212 (491)


Text

FINAL SUBMITTAL BROWNS FERRY EXAM 50-259, 260, 296/2001-301 SEPTEMBER 17-21, 2001 FINAL AS-GIVEN JPMs FOR EACH WALK-THROUGH TEST

FINAL SUBMITTAL FINAL AS-GIVEN JPMs FOR EACH WALK-THROUGH TEST

ES-301 Administrative Topics Outline Form ES-301-1 (R8, S)

Facility: Browns Ferry Date of Examination: 9/17-9/19-2001 Examination Level (circle one): RO / SRO Operating Test Number: 1 Administrative Describe method of evaluation:

Topic/Subject 1. ONE Administrative JPM, OR Description 2. TWO Administrative Questions A.1 Conduct Of RO-JPM NRC Operations A.1.a DETERMINE REACTOR VESSEL WATER LEVEL.

(K/A 2.1.28)

Shift Staffing RO - NRC-JPM-02 (NEW),

Requirements EVALUATE OVERTIME ELIGIBILITY (K/A 2.1.3, 3.0/3.4)

A.2 Equipment RO - JPM A.2 Operability DETERMINE COMPONENT POSITIONS FOR VALVE LINE Requirements UPS AND TAG ORDER PERFORMANCE. (K/A 2.2.1, 3.6/3.8)

A.3 Control of DETERMINE BUILDING VENTILATION NOBLE GAS RELEASE Radiation RATE. JPM #131, KA 271000A4.05, 3.2/3.9 Releases A.4 Emergency 1. RO QUESTION: KNOWLEDGE OF ABNORMAL CONDITION Plan PROCEDURES.( K/A: G2.4.11)

2. RO QUESTION: KNOWLEDGE OF THE RO'S RESPONSIBILITIES IN EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTATION. (K/A G2.4.39)

ES-301 Administrative Topics Outline Form ES-301-1 (R8, Si)

Facility: Browns Ferry Date of Examination: 9/17-9/19 2001 Examination Level (circle one): RO / SRO Operating Test Number: 1 Administrative Describe method of evaluation:

Topic/Subject 1. ONE Administrative JPM, OR Description 2. TWO Administrative Questions A.1 Conduct of QUESTION ON FITNESS FOR DUTY. (K/A 2.1.6,4.3)

Operations DETERMINE THE CONDITION CLASSIFICATION FOR RCIC INOPERABLE. (K/A 2.1.33, 3.4/4.0)

Shift Staffing SRO - NRC-JPM-02 (NEW), EVALUATE OVERTIME ELIGIBILITY Requirements (K/A 2.1.3, 3.0/3.4)

A.2 Equipment SRO - JPM A.2 DETERMINE COMPONENT POSITIONS FOR VALVE Operability LINE-UPS AND TAG ORDER PERFORMANCE. (K/A 2.2.1, 3.6/3.8)

Requirements A.3 Control of DETERMINE BUILDING VENTILATION NOBLE GAS RELEASE Radiation RATE. JPM #131, (KA 271 000A4.05, 3.2/3.9)

Releases A.4 Emergency JPM -181 CLASSIFY THE EVENT PER THE REP (GASEOUS Plan RELEASE RATE-0SI-4.8.B.I.A.1) (K/A 2.4.38, 4.0)

Handout to Applicant A handout of SR-2 readings and an attachment is given. The following is an explanation of the conditions, followed by two question.

During the past 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> the Unit 2 has cooled down from 212 degrees F to 100 degrees F bulk moderator temperature.

2-SR -2 recorded the indicated water level on FRIDAY while at 212 deg F. Readings were again recorded on SATURDAY with moderator temperature at 100 degrees F. The readings for Narrow Range Compensted and Uncompensted columns and are provided (provide marked up copy of page 24 and 46 of the SR, and Attachment 4).

1. The Unit Supervisor has requested that you utilize the reading and Attachment 4 of 2-SR-2 to determine corrected water level , and determine the actual net change in reactor water level over the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> period starting when the reactor was a 212 degrees F and ending when the reactor was at 100 degrees F.
2. Assume the rate of change is the same over the next 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> period, determine the actual water level exoected on SUNDAY.

Examiner Noter: Give applicant the conditions handout and the marked up copy of SR-2 (Instrument Checks and Observations) and Attachment 4 A handout of SR-2 readings and an attachment is given. The following is an explanation of the conditions, followed by two question.

During the past 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> the Unit 2 has cooled down from 212 degrees F to 100 degrees F bulk moderator temperature.

2-SR -2 recorded the indicated water level on FRIDAY while at 212 deg F. Readings were again recorded on SATURDAY with moderator temperature at 100 degrees F. The readings for Narrow Range Compensted and Uncompensted columns and are provided (provide marked up copy of page 24 and 46 of the SR, and Attachment 4).

1. The Unit Supervisor has requested that you utilize the reading and Attachment 4 of 2-SR-2 to determine corrected water level , and determine the actual net change in reactor water level over the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> period starting when the reactor was a 212 degrees F and ending when the reactor was at 100 degrees F.
2. Assume the rate of change is the same over the next 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> period, determine the actual water level expected on SUNDAY.

Solution - Corrected Water Level for both sets of readings is 35 inches on both Friday and Saturday, should be the same for Sunday, so Net Change is Zero.

KA 2.1.28 (3.2/3.3) Knowledge of major system components and controls.

INFORMATION FOR THE SR-2 READINGS At beginning of cooldown:

Narrow Range Compensated 2-LIS-3-53, 60, 206, and 253 indicated 41 inches (listed as Friday Readings)

Narrow Range Uncompensated 2-LIS-3-184, 185, 203(A-D), and 208 (A-D) indicated 48 inches (listed as Friday Readings)

Following the cooldown Narrow Range Compensated 2-LIS-3-53, 60, 206, and 253 indicated 44 inches (listed as Saturday Readings)

Narrow Range Uncompensated 2-LIS-3-184, 185, 203(A-D), and 208 (A-D) indicated 51 inches (Listed as Saturday Readings) on following page.

ATTACHMENT 4 (Page 1 of 1)

Reactor Water Level Indication Correction The Reactor Water Level Instrumentation tables in Attachment 2 are arranged such that only instruments in the same compensation group are compared. However, determination of corrected level indication may be required during operation at off-normal conditions or if desired to compare instruments from different compensation groups.

Corrected level indication may be used for satisfying MAX DEV criteria provided the following are observed:

  • The parameter correction is appropriately applied to all instruments being compared.
  • Both the indicated and corrected level indications are recorded and annotated in Attachment 2 along with the bases for the corrected level indication.

Corrected level indication can be determined from the following table which provides commonly needed corrections or from Technical Instruction 2-TI-149. The following table presents Reactor Water Level as: indicated, corrected for Reactor Vessel Temperature 100lF, and corrected for Reactor Vessel Temperature 212'F for various water level instruments. Enter the indicated Rx water level and find the correct instrument column and use the closest Rx vessel temperature. (Matching corrected levels between instruments and subtracting the associated indicated levels will yield an approximate deviation value in inches between those instruments. i.e. If the Narrow Range Compensated Instrument is reading 38", the corrected level would be 34.5". Also, using a corrected value of 35.5" in the Narrow Range Uncompensated column shows the instrument should be reading 46". Therefore, a deviation of approximately 8" would be expected between the Narrow Range Compensated instrument and the Narrow Range Uncompensated instrument.)

INDICATED CORRECTED LEVEL LEVEL Indicated Narrow Range Narrow Range Wide Range Post Accident Floodup Wide Ran Reactor Compensated Uncompensated 2-LI-3-58A 2-LR-3-62 2-LI-3-55 2-LI-3-46 Water Level 2-LIS-3-53(60)( 2-LIS-3-184, (B), 2-LIULIS-3-52 Level (B) 206) 185,203(A-D), 2-LIS-3-56A 2-LULIS-3-62A Level (253) Level 208(A-D) (D) Level Level Level 1000 2120 1000 2120 1000 2120 1000 2120 100' 2120 50 39 42 34.5 37 49 50.5 48 38 40 33 35 47 48.5 46 36.5 39 31.5 34 45 46.5 44 35 37 30 32.5 43 44 42 33.5 36 29 31 No 41 42 No 40 32 34 27.5 29.5 Note Note Calculated 39 40 Calculatc 38 31 33 26 28 1 2 Correction 37 38 Correctic 36 29.5 31.5 24.5 26.5 Value 35 36 Value 34 28 30 23 25 33 34 32 26.5 28.5 22 23.5 31 32 30 25 27 20.5 22 29 30 28 24 25.5 19 20.5 27 28

Notes:

(I) Indicates >60" if actual Water Level is >14".

(2) Indicates >60" if actual Water Level is >8".

BFN INSTRUMENT CHECKS AND OBSERVATIONS 2-SR-2 UNIT 2 Rev 0026 SURVEILLANCE PROCEDURE DATA PACKAGE MODES 1, 2, & 3 - DAY SHIFT Page 24 of 129 WEEK: -/i/ to 9/7/0/ ATTACHMENT 2 (Page 10 of 77)

TABLE 1.9 REACTOR WATER LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION NARROW RANGE (COMPENSATED)

APPLICABILITY: Readings are required at all times.

(REFER TO P&L step 3.2)

(Note 2)

Criteria Source: FSAR 7.10.4 LOCATION: Panel 2-9-5 Review Initials Reference Leg A B C D MAX DEV All Data is Unit 2-LI-3-53 (in.) 2-LI-3-60 (in.) 2-LI-3-206(in.) 2-LI-3-253(in.) Note 1 SAT/UNSAT UO Supvr Friday 41 _ _

Saturday - SL Sunday Monday 3.0 inches Tuesday ________ ________ ________ _______________________

W ednesday ________________ ________ ________ _________ _____ ____

Thursday Note:

1) REFER TO Attachment 4 during off-normal operating conditions.
2) Reactor vessel water level indications from the four water level channels can be compared during operation (and are compared automatically by the RFWCS) to detect instrument malfunctions.

(

BFN INSTRUMENT CHECKS AND OBSERVATIONS 2-SR-2 Rev 0026 UNIT 2 SURVEILLANCE PROCEDURE DATA PACKAGE MODES 1, 2, & 3 - DAY SHIFT Page 46 of 129 WEEK: 9/q /o/ to q//?lD i ATTACHMENT2 (Page 32of 77)

TABLE 1.32 REACTOR WATER LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION NARROW RANGE (UNCOMPENSATED)

Part 1 - APPLICABILITY: Modes 1, 2 & 3(REFER TO P&L step 3.2) Mode 3 (REFERTO P&L step 3.2)

Readings are required at all times Readings are required at all times. Review Surveillance Requirements: 3.3.1.1.1(f4), 3.3.6.1.1(f2a,5h 3.3.6.2.1(fl), 3.3.7.1.1(fl) 3.3.6.1.1(f6b) Initials Reference Leg C/D Instruments Leg A/B Instruments MAX Leg D C B A DEV LOCATION 2-9-86 2-9-85 2-9-84 2-9-83 (AC) All Data Unit 2-LIS-3-203D in.) 2-LIS-3-203C (in.) 2-LIS-3-203B in. 2-LIS-3-203A in.) Note 3 SAT/UNSAT UO supvr Friday gly 4 ________

Saturday 51/ 5 / '5.0 inch Sunday Deviation Monday ,Between Tuesday All Instruments W ednesday AND Thursday AND Part 2- APPLICABILITY: Mode l and Modes 2 & 3 when Reactor steam dome pressure >150 psig (REFER TO P&L step 3 2) Readings are required at all times 3.5 inch Surveillance Requirements: 2-LIS-3-208A-D = 3.3.2.2.1, 3.3.5.1.1(f3c), 3.3.5.2.1(f2) Deviation 2-LIS-3-184 & 185 = 3.3.5.1.1(f4d,5d) Between Reference Leg C/D Instruments Lec A/B Instruments All Instrumjents Leg C D C B B A on the A/B Leg LOCATION 2-9-82 2-9-81 2-9-82 2-9-81 All Data Unit 2-LIS-3-185 2-LIS-3-208D 2-LIS-3-208C 2-LIS-3-208B 2-LIS-3-184 2-LIS-3-208A AND SAT/UNSAT UO Supvr

_in.) (in.) n. _in.)

Friday 21,17K47 . -_r , 3.5 inch Saturday 5/ / / Z

,/- Deviation Sunday Between Monday All Instruments Tuesday on the C/D Leg Wednesday Thursday Notes:

1) REFER TO Attachment 4 during off-normal operating conditions.
2) IM's may obtain voltage readings, corrected for level indication, to assist in operability determination.
3) Ail instruments on the AB(C/D) Leg should read wilhin 3.5 inches of each other AND within 5.0 inches of C/D(A/B) Leg instruments.

BFN INSTRUMENT CHECKS AND OBSERVATIONS 2-SR-2 UNIT 2 Rev 0026 Page 125 of 129 ATTACHMENT 4 (Page 1 of 1)

Reactor Water Level Indication Correction The Reactor Water Level Instrumentation tables in Attachment 2 are arranged such that orily instruments in the same compensation group are compared. However, determination of corrected level indication may be required during operation at off-normal conditions or if desired to compare instruments from different compensation groups.

Corrected level indication may be used for satisfying MAX DEV criteria provided the following are observed:

"* The parameter correction is appropriately applied to all instruments being compared.

"* Both the indicated and corrected level indications are recorded and annotated in Attachment 2 along with the bases for the corrected level indication.

Corrected level indication can be determined from the following table which provides commonly needed corrections or from Technical Instruction 2-TI-149. The following table presents Reactor Water Level as: indicated, corrected for Reactor Vessel Temperature 100F, and corrected for Reactor Vessel Temperature 212°F for various water level instruments. Enter the indicated Rx water level and find the correct instrument column and use the closest Rx vessel temperature. (Matching corrected levels between instruments and subtracting the associated indicated levels will yield an approximate deviation value in inches between those instruments. i.e. If the Narrow Range Compensated Instrument is reading 38", the corrected level would be 34.5". Also, using a corrected value of 35.5" in the Narrow Range Uncompensated column shows the instrument should be reading 46". Therefore, a deviation of approximately 8" would be expected between the Narrow Range Compensated instrument and the Narrow Range Uncompensated instrument.)

INDICATED CORRECTED LEVEL LEVEL Indicated Narrow Range Narrow Range Wide Range Post Accident Floodup Wide Range Reactor Compensated Uncompensated 2-LI-3-58A 2-LR-3-62 2-LI-3-55 2-LI-3-46A Water Level 2-LIS-3-53(60) 2-LIS-3-184, (B), 2-LI/LIS-3-52 Level (B)

(206) 185,203(A-D), 2-LIS-3-56A 2-LI/LIS-3-62A Level (253) Level 208(A-D) (D) Level Level Level 1000 2120 1000 2120 1000 212- 100- 1 212- 100- 2120 50 39 42 34.5 37 49 50.5 48 38 40 33 35 47 48.5 46 36.5 39 31.5 34 45 46.5 44 35 37 30 32.5 43 44 42 33.5 36 29 31 No 41 42 No 40 32 34 27.5 29.5 Note Note Calculated 39 40 Calculated 38 31 33 26 28 1 2 Correction 37 38 Correction 36 29.5 31.5 24.5 26.5 Value 35 36 Value 34 28 30 23 25 33 34 32 26.5 28.5 22 23.5 31 32 30 25 27 20.5 22 29 30 28 24 25.5 19 20.5 27 28 Notes:

(1) Indicates >60" if actual Water Level is >14".

(2) Indicates >60" if actual Water Level is >8".

Handout to Applicant A startup is planned for the following shift. One Reactor Operator must be held over two hours for startup. The following is the work history (excluding shift turnover time) of the available reactor operators on shift(hours reflect those worked PRIOR to the 2 hour2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> holdover). A break of at least 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> occurreed between all work periods.

DAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (Today)

Operator

  1. 1 0 0 13 11 14 10 14 10 Operator
  1. 2 0 3 10 12 12 12 8 14 Operator
  1. 3 0 0 12 12 12 8 8 15 Operator
  1. 4 0 8 12 10 10 8 10 12 Operator
  1. 5 0 4 12 10 10 14 10 12 Evaluate the work histor for all 5 operators. Determine which ooerator(s). if any. can be held over for two hours without prior overtime approval, and determine which operators CANNOT be held over for two hours without prior overtime approval.

A1.2 TASK CONDITIONS:

A startup is planned for the following shift. One Reactor Operator must be held over two hours for startup. The following is the work history (excluding shift turnover time) of the available reactor operators on shift (hours reflect those worked PRIOR to the 2 hour2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> holdover). A break of at least 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> occurred between all work periods.

DAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (Today)

Operator

  1. 1 0 0 13 11 14 10 14 10 Operator
  1. 2 0 3 10 12 12 12 8 14 Operator
  1. 3 0 0 12 12 12 8 8 15 Operator
  1. 4 0 8 12 10 10 8 10 12 Operator
  1. 5 0 4 12 10 10 14 10 12 Evaluate the work history for all 5 operators Determine which operator(s), if any, can be held over for two hours without prior overtime approval, and determine which operators CANNOT be held over for two hours without prior overtime approval.

Task Standard:

GEN 2.1.3 (3.0/3.4) Knowledge of shift turnover practices CFR 41.10 RO and SRO SOLUTION:

Step Description Standard SATIUNSAT 1 Reference SPP-1.5 Current Revision SPP-1.5 2 Evaluate Operator 1 Determine Operator #1 would exceed Critical 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> in a 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> period and and would exceed 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> in a 7 day period and would require overtime PROOT:_ a uthorization PROMPT:

If asked, inform applicant that operator I received authorization for exceeding 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> in a 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> period between days 4 and 5.

3 Evaluate Operator 1 Determine Operator exceeded 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> in a 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> period between dlays 5 and 6 4 Evaluate Operator 2 Determine Operator #2 would exceed Critical 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> in a 7 day period and would "requireovertime authorization 5 Evaluate Operator 3 Determine Operator #3 would exceed Critical 16 hours1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br /> in a 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> period and 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> in a 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> period and would "require overtime authorization 6 Evaluate Operator 4 Determine that Operator #4 would not exceed any overtime guidelines 7 Evaluate Operator 5 Determine Operator #2 would exceed Critical 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> in a 7 day period and would require overtime authorization

Tennessee TITLE SPP-1.5 Valley Authority Rev. 2 Page 1 of 10 TVAN STANDARD OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS Quality Related ED Yes C] No PROGRAMS AND (REGULATORY) PORC Required Z Yes [I No PROCESSES 10CFR50.59 Review Z Yes C1 No Effective Date 11/15/99 RESPONSIBLE PEER TEAM: Plant Managers Organization APPROVALS Dennis L. Koehl 10/29/99 Primary Sponsor Date For Nuclear Assurance Sponsored SPPs N/A N/A General Manager,NA Date Karl W. Singer 11/9/99

  • Senior Vice President,Nuclear Operations Date Site-specific changes are approved by Site Sponsor and Site Vice President (see PCF)

Page 1 of 1 SPP 2 1-1 [12-01-971 TVA 40480 [12-97]

TVAN STANDARD SPP-11.5 OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS (REGULATORY) Rev. 2 PROGRAMS AND Page 2 of 10 PROCESSES REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 0 10/8/97 All Replaces STD-1.7, SSP-11.7 at SON and BFN; and SSP-1.07 at WBN.

1 5/20/99 2, 4-10 Revised to allow Plant Manager or Site Vice President to delegate approval of exception to overtime during outages, and modified requirements for review of the monthly overtime exception report.

2 11/15/99 2,5,8,9 Added exception to paragraph 3.B.3 and adjusted Forms SPP-1.5-1 and SPP-1.5-2 accordingly (minor/editorial change).

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.5 PROGRAMS AND OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS (REGULATORY) Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 3 of 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page R e v is ion Lo g ............................................................................. I......................................................... 2 Ta b le of C o nte nts ................................................................................................................................ 3 1.0 P UR P O S E .............................................................................................................................. 4 2 .0 S C O P E ................................................................................................................................... 4 3 .0 INST R UC T IO NS ..................................................................................................................... 4 4 .0 R E C O R D S .............................................................................................................................. 6 4 .1 QA R e c o rd s ...................................................................................... ........................... ....... 6 4 .2 No n-Q A R eco rd s ..................................... .............................................................................. 6 5 .0 DE F INIT IO NS ................................................................... ..................................... .......... 6 APPENDIXES Overtime Limitation Exception Report Processing Flowchart ................ 7 Appendix A FORMS SPP 1.5-1 Overtime Limitation Exception Report ................................ 8 SPP 1.5-2 Overtime Limitation Exception Report for Extended Shutdown Periods ......... 9

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.5 PROGRAMS AND OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS (REGULATORY) Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 4 of 10 1.0 PURPOSE This SPP establishes TVAN's regulatory overtime program to meet regulatory requirements and as specified in individual plant Technical Specifications.

The intent of these controls are to prevent situations where fatigue could reduce the ability of operating personnel to keep the reactor in a safe condition, and to assure that critical plant operating personnel are not assigned to shift duties while in a fatigued condition which could significantly reduce their mental alertness or decision making ability.

2.0 SCOPE A. The following personnel are required to meet the limitations specified in this SPP:

Senior Reactor Operators (SRO), Reactor Operators (RO), Nuclear Assistant Unit Operators (NAUO), Onshift RADCON Personnel, Operations Shift Managers, Shift Technical Advisors, Onshift Fire Operations Personnel, Unit Operators, Unit Supervisors, and key maintenance personnel (see 5.0 Definitions), including craft and contractors performing safety-related activities in the capacity of the TVA positions listed.

B. Although not specifically restricted by Technical Specifications, the limitations specified in this SPP should be used as a guide for all personnel performing work.

3.0 INSTRUCTIONS A. Expectations are that critical personnel work a nominal 40-hour week with minimal overtime. When overtime is required, it shall be assessed and monitored to ensure the below-listed restrictions are met. Assignment of overtime is made after consideration of such factors as on going activities, expected duration, and personnel involved, with the intent to minimize potential impact on safety-related activities.

B. For plant conditions which require substantial amounts of overtime to be used, or during temporary periods of work such as refueling outages, major maintenance projects or plant modifications, the following restrictions apply:

1. An employee may work no more than 16 hours1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br /> straight, excluding shift turnover time (for exceptions, see 3.0-C below).

As an example an employee has worked on shift 16 continuous hours. At the end of the shift it takes one hour for shift turnover which means the employee has worked 17 continuous hours. Since the one hour over 16 was for shift turnover, an authorization for deviation from the overtime limitation is not required.

2. An employee may work no more than 16 hours1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br /> in any 24-hour period, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> in a 48-hour period, or 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> in any 7-day period, excluding shift turnover time (for exceptions, see 3.0-C below).

For example a 7-day period is any combination of 7 consecutive days or rolling days (such as Monday through Sunday or Tuesday through Monday). Hours worked over 72 require authorization for exception to the limitation, excluding shift turnover (for exceptions, see 3.0-C below).

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1i.5 PROGRAMS AND OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS (REGULATORY) Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 5 of 10

3. Employees are to receive at least an 8-hour break between work periods, including shift turnover time (for exceptions, see 3.0-C below).
4. During normal plant operations, the use of overtime is not for an entire staff working on a shift. It is considered on an individual basis. In the case of an extended shutdown for refueling, major maintenance, or major plant modification, approval may be made on a group basis.
5. When a control board operator must work in excess of the overtime guidelines, every effort must be made to remove the operator from the responsibility of operating the control room board.

C. The Plant Manager or Site Vice President may authorize deviations from the overtime restrictions on the Overtime Limitation Exception Report (Form 1.5-1). Their designees may approve deviations other than exceeding 16 hours1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br /> straight. During outages, the Site Vice President or the Plant Manager may delegate the authority to exceed 16 hours1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br /> to the Outage Manager or the Assistant Plant Manager. Form 1.5-2 will be used during periods of extended shutdown for refueling major maintenance, or major plant modification as determined by Plant Manager. The deviation will be based on the following criteria:

1. Unusual circumstances exist.
2. Significant reduction in personnel effectiveness would be highly unlikely.

D. The exact work to be performed is specified in the Overtime Limitation Exception Report in sufficient detail for the authorizing manager to review and conclude that significant reduction in personnel effectiveness would be highly unlikely.

E. The form must be filled out and approved before the individual(s) exceeds the overtime limit. If approval is received by telecon, the preparer shall document that approval was via telecon, initial, date, and given by whom.

F. Each month the Plant Manager or designee compiles the Overtime Limitation Exception Report forms approved for that month. Plant Manager or designee reviews the approved Overtime Limitation Exception Report forms for:

1. Excessive number of approvals/exemptions
2. Excessive exemptions for the same individuals and
3. Excessive group approvals (i.e., blanket approvals for whole groups or organization entities)

G. The Plant Manager documents that the review has taken place. The Overtime Limitation Exception Report forms and review documentation are sent to RIMS/EDM as non-QA records.

H. Business and Work Performance (B&WP) periodically checks the ATR report against the forms generated to ensure that no key personnel covered by the overtime procedure have worked hours exceeding limits without prior approval.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-11.5 PROGRAMS AND OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS (REGULATORY) Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 6 of 10 4.0 RECORDS 4.1 QA Records None.

4.2 Non-QA Records Overtime Limitation Exception Report Overtime Limitation Exception Report for Extended Shutdown Periods 5.0 DEFINITIONS Key Maintenance Personnel - The term applies to all TVAN and contractor personnel who are subject to performing maintenance, repair, calibration or testing of safety-related structures, systems or components or personnel who are directly supervising such activities.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.5 PROGRAMS AND OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS (REGULATORY) Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 7 of 10 APPENDIX A Page I of I OVERTIME LIMITATION EXCEPTION REPORT PROCESSING FLOWCHART Need Identified To Exceed SPP 1.5 Overtime Limitations Supervisor Provides Justification and Signs Form I

Site Vice President, Plant Mgr Site Vice President Or Plant Manager, or Their Designee Approves for extended shutdowns Form SPP 1.5-2 J

I Plant Manager or designee compiles the approved forms for Plant Manager monthly review

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.5 PROGRAMS AND OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS (REGULATORY) Date 11-15-99 PROCESSES Page 8 of 10 OVERTIME LIMITATION EXCEPTION REPORT Page 1 of I The following employees (three or less) are authorized to work overtime in excess of the overtime limits specified in paragraphs 3.8.1 and 3.8.2 of SPP-1.5. This report must be maintained and available for NRC review.

Name SSN Organization Hours Exceeding Requirements Date # Hours Time Limit Will Be Exceeded

a. Time:
b. Time:
c. Time:
1. Specify specific reason for cause of overtime (i.e., another employee on S/L, unexpected job, etc.).
2. Specify requirement to be exceeded: E] 16 hours1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br /> continuous (*NOTE 1) [5 8-hour work break E5 16 hrs. in 24 [] 24 hrs. in 48 E] 72 hrs. in 7-day period
3. Specify exact work to be performed and brief description (include procedure number, workplan number, work request number, or support of other specific activity):
4. State justification for exceeding the overtime limits. Justification should address considerations and actions taken to minimize potential impacts on safety-related activities (i.e., rescheduling of task, assignment of alternate employee to task, etc.) and reasoning for the determination that a significant reduction in effectiveness of the personnel involved will not result. This analysis should include considerations such as the total amount of time worked/anticipated, break periods taken/planned, type of activity to be performed, etc. for personnel to ensure that fatigue is not/will not be a factor Prepared by Print Name Date Time Ext..

Prepared by Signature THE ABOVE ACTIVITY IS CONSIDERED AN UNUSUAL CIRCUMSTANCE AND WARRANTS EXCEEDING THE OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS.

Approved by Print Name/Position Date Approved by Site Vice President/Plant Manager/Authorized Designee Signature FOR ADDITIONAL SPACE, USE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS FORM.

Distrib'uted to: Plant Manager's Office Originator (Employees Section Manager)

  • NOTE 1 Requires Site Vice President/Plant Manager approval, cannot be delegated.

TVA 40551 [11-1999] Page 1 of 1 SPP 1 5-1 [11-15-19991

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.5 PROGRAMS AND OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS (REGULATORY) Date 11-15-99 PROCESSES Page of 10 9

OVERTIME LIMITATION EXCEPTION REPORT FOR EXTENDED SHUTDOWN PERIODS Page 1 of 2 The following attached list of employees are authorized to work overtime in excess of the overtime limits specified in paragraphs 3.B.1 and 3.1.2 of SPP-1.5. This report must be maintained and available for NRC review.

1. Specify specific reason for cause of overtime (i.e., another employee on S/L, unexpected job, etc.).
2. Specify requirement to be exceeded: El 16 hours1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br /> continuous (*NOTE 1) [] 8-hour work break

[] 16 hrs. in 24 E] 24 hrs. in 48 El 72 hrs. in 7-day period

3. Specify exact work to be performed and brief description (include procedure number, workplan number, work request number, or support of other specific activity):
4. State justification for exceeding the overtime limits. Justification should address considerations and actions taken to minimize potential impacts on safety-related activities (ie., rescheduling of task, assignment of alternate employee to task, etc.) and reasoning for the determination that a significant reduction in effectiveness of the personnel involved will not result. This analysis should include considerations such as the total amount of time worked/anticipated, break periods taken/planned, type of activity to be performed, etc. for personnel to ensure that fatigue is not/will not be a factor.

Prepared by Print Name Prepared by Date Time Ext.

Signature THE ABOVE ACTIVITY IS CONSIDERED AN UNUSUAL CIRCUMSTANCE AND WARRANTS EXCEEDING THE OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS.

Approved by Print Name/Position Approved by Date Site Vice President/Plant Manager/Authorized Designee Signature FOR ADDITIONAL SPACE, USE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS FORM.

Distributed to: Plant Manager's Office Originator (Employees Section Manager)

  • NOTE 1 Requires Site Vice President/Plant Manager approval (can be delegated to Outage Manager or Assistant Plant Manager during outages).

SPP 1 5-2 (11-15-1999]

TVA 40552 [11-19991 Page 1 of 2

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.5 PROGRAMS AND OVERTIME RESTRICTIONS (REGULATORY) Date 11-15-99 PROCESSES Page 10 of 10 OVERTIME LIMITATION EXCEPTION REPORT FOR EXTENDED SHUTDOWN PERIODS Page 2 of 2 Name SSN Organization Hours Exceeding Requirements Date # Hours Time Limit Will Be Exceeded

a. Time:
b. Time:
c. Time:
d. Time:
e. Time:
f. Time:
g. Time:
h. Time:
i. Time:
j. Time:
k. Time:

I. Time:

m. Time:
n. Time:
0. Time:
p. Time:
q. Time:
r. Time:
s. Time:
t. Time:
u. Time:
v. Time:
w. Time:
x. Time:

Page 2 of 2 SPP 1.5-2 [11-15-1999]

TVA 40552 [11-1999]

Handout to Applicant It is 3:00am on January 1. Following a declaration of an unusual event, several people are responding to the event. You are the shift manager, security has informed you that they have a reasonable belief that an NRC resident inspector, may have recently used alcohol and may be unfit for duty. In addition a deputy sherif, TVA pipe fitter and a contract pipe fitter that are responding onsite to the NOUE have stated that they consumed alcohol at midnight although the three of them appeared to be unimpaired. All the above individual have unescorted access (badged) with the exception of the deputy sheriff.

In reference to allowing these individual onsite, what action are required?

NRC Resident Inspector Deputy Sherrif "TVA Pipe Fitter Contract Pipe Fitter

Al.la SRO ONLY It is 3:00am on January 1. Following a declaration of an unusual event, several people are responding to the event. You are the shift manager, security has informed you that they have a reasonable belief that an NRC resident inspector, may have recently used alcohol and may be unfit for duty. In addition a deputy sherif, TVA pipe fitter and a contract pipe fitter that are responding onsite to the NOUE have stated that they con sumed alcohol at midnight although the three of them appeared to be unimpaired. All the above individual have unescorted access (badged) with the exception of the deputy sheriff.

In reference to allowing these individual onsite, what action are required?

Solution:

K/A 2.1.6 CFR43.5 (2.1/4.3) Ability to supervise and assume a management role during plant transients and upset conditions. SRO ONLY Reference allowed.

NRC employee must be granted escorted access, the regional administrator must be called and the NRC Operations Center must be notified. (2.0 B. TVA may not deny access but shall escort the individual. In any instance of this occurrence, the NRC Region IIAdministrator must be notified immediately by telephone. During other than normal working hours, the NRC Operations Center must be notified)

Deputy Sherif (This SPP does not apply to NRC employees, law enforcement personnel, or non-TVA offsite emergency response personnel while responding onsite.) Law enforcement while not covered by this SPP, should not be allowed to enter the protected area. There are no statutory requirements to allow local law enforcement onsite. It would be permissible to escort these individuals if their presence were actually necessary.

TVA employee - must have saliva test administered. (*SPP-1.2, Fitness for Duty, section 3.14, Call-in for Unscheduled Work, 3.14.1 .A.4, if the answer to the alcohol consumption question -is "yes" then Nuclear Security on site should be notified and be requested to administer a saliva test to the -employee. This test must be administered as soon as the person arrives on site.)

Contract Employee - must have saliva test administered or access denied. Typically, these contractors, if badged, will participate in the TVA FFD program, and the requirements are the same as for a TVA employee.

Tennessee TITLE SPP-1.2 Valley Authority Rev. 4 Page 1 of 30 TVAN STANDARD FITNESS FOR DUTY Quality Related [I Yes S No PROGRAMS AND PORC Required C] Yes Z No.

PROCESSES 100FRS0.59 Review C3 Yes Z No Effective Date 11/30/99 RESPONSIBLE PEER TEAM: B&WP Organization APPROVALS Chris Kelly 11/19/99 Primary Sponsor Date For Nuclear Assurance Sponsored SPPs N/A General Manager,NA Date Karl W. Singer 11/24/99 Senior Vice President,Nuclear Operations Date

  • Site-specific changes are approved by Site Sponsor and Site Vice President (see PCF)

SPP-2 1-1 [12-01-971 TVA 40480 (12-97] Page I of 1

TVAN STANDARD SPP-11.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 2 of 30 REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 0 2-18-97 All Replacing STD-1.6.

1 10-24-97 All General revision to update and clarify FFD policy and requirements. Changed the definition of Emergency Response Center to incorporate wording found in 10CFR26.2.

2 8-5-98 2, 3, 5, 6, Deleted references to Health Services due to organization 10-13, changes. Shifted and clarified FFD Program responsibilities 15-18,19 *r3, due to organization changes. Minor editorial changes and FFD 20, 21, 23 Program clarifications. Added 10CFR26.27(d) information 24-27 regarding NRC employees. Added information regarding TVA's contract Employee Assistance Program. Shifted and clarified responsibilities for non-QA FFD Program records due to organization changes.

02-12-99 All General revision.

4 11/30/99 2,3, 11, 12, Added Form SPP-1.2-1, "Call-InForm for Unscheduled Work" 14, 16,17, that may be utilized to document unscheduled call-ins as 19, 21-24, corrective action for SQN PER 99-007109-000. Deleted 26, 27, 30 reference to hand held breathalyzers. Clarified requirements for alcohol and drug testing. For emphasis, added information contained in Section 3.7 "Penalties for Violation(s) of the FFD Program" table, regarding refusal to fully cooperate in the testing process, to Section 3.8 "Resulting Actions for Other Violations of this Procedure (or SPP)".Clarified appeals.

Minor/editorial changes.

"TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 3 of 30 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page Revision Log......................................................................................................................... .. ............... 2 Table of Contents ............................................................. 3 1.0 PURPOSE 4 2.0 SCO PE 4.....................

4 3.0 INSTRUCTIO NS 5......................

5 3.1 Responsibilities 5.....................

5 3.2 Standards of Conduct 6 3.3 Alcohol and Drug Testing 1.................................

1.1 ....

3 .4 A p p e a ls ...............................

................................. 1.7 ......

3 .5 T ra in in g ................................................................................................................... 18 ......

3.6 Em ployee Assistance Program ................................................................................ 19..

3.7 Penalties for Violation(s) of the FFD Program ........................................................ 20.

3.8 Resulting Actions for other Violations of this Procedure (or SPP) ............................. 21.

3.9 Fitness for Duty Requirem ents for Unescorted Access ............................................. 21 3.10 Transfer of Fitness for Duty Certification ............................... .............................. 21..

3.11 Em ergency Response Center ........................... .............................................. 21...

2..

3.12 Fitness for Duty Program Integrity .......................... ....... .................................... 22..

3.13 Contractor/Vendor Program s ........ 2.................................

23...

3.14 Call-in for Unscheduled W ork .................................................................................. 23...

3.15 Contracts and Purchasing ........................................................................................ 24...

3 .1 6 A u d its ..................................................................................................................... 2 4 ......

3 .1 7 R e p o rtin g ................................................................................................................ 2 4 .....

4.0 RECORDS ............................................................................................................ 25 .....

4.1 QA Records ............................................................................................................ 25 .....

42 Non-QA Records ..................................................................................................... 25 ....

5.0 DEFINITIO NS ................................................................................................... 27 ...

APPENDIXES Appendix A: Contracts/Purchasing FFD Requirem ents ........................................... 29 FORMS SPP-1.2-1 Call-In Form for Unscheduled W ork .................... .................................. 3Q

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 4 of 30 1.0 PURPOSE The Fitness For Duty (FFD) Program was established to ensure that each employee has a safe, drug-free workplace and to provide reasonable assurance that personnel supporting the TVA Nuclear (TVAN) program will perform their tasks in a reliable and trustworthy manner. In addition, the FFD Program provides assurance that employees are not under the influence of any legal or illegal substance or mentally or physically impaired frorn any cause which in any way could adversely affect their ability to safely and competently perform their duties. The program is administered in accordance with Regulation 10 CFR Part 26 issued by the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC).

2.0 SCOPE The requirements of this SPP apply to:

A. All TVAN employees B. TVA employees located at TVAN sites or projects C. Contractor and vendor employees located at TVAN work locations D. All persons who have unescorted access at TVA nuclear plants E. Persons required to report to the emergency response centers F. Those who by the nature of their jobs, as determined by the Chief Nuclear Officer and Executive Vice President, TVAN, could affect the safe operation of TVA's nuclear plants G. NRC contractor employees Exemptions:

A. This SPP does not apply to NRC employees, law enforcement personnel, or non-TVA offsite emergency response personnel while responding onsite.

B. If TVA has a reasonable belief that a NRC employee may be under the influence of any substance, or otherwise unfit for duty, TVA may not deny access but shall escort the individual. In any instance of this occurrence, the NRC Region II Administrator must be notified immediately by telephone. During other than normal working hours, the NRC Operations Center must be notified.

C. Short-term contractors who do not require entry to the protected area are exempt from Subsections 3.3.1(A), 3.3.1(C), and 3.5.

D. Bellefonte Nuclear Plant (BLN) is exempt from Subsections 3.3.1(C.2.b.) and 3.5. Only those BLN employees who are required to report to the Emergency Response Center, BLN employees maintaining unescorted access at another TVAN site, or BLN supervisors/managers responsible for performing continual behavioral observation are required to meet the requirements of Section 3.5.

E. Additional exemptions which do not affect regulatory requirements and commitments may be granted on a case-by-case basis by the Manager, Nuclear Security.

WVAN STANDARD SPP-11.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 5 of 30 3.0 INSTRUCTIONS 3.1 Responsibilities 3.1.1 The Corporate Nuclear Security organization is responsible for:

A. Regulatory interpretations and decisions B. Policy Development C. Overall direction of the program administration D. Organizational interfaces E. Management of the random testing program F. Procedures coordination G. Reporting requirements H. Monitoring of FFD training

1. Disposition of positive test results J. Consistent implementation K. Consulting with experts concerning drugs of abuse in the Tennessee Valley L. Maintaining contracts with primary and backup Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA) certified laboratories.

3.1.2 The Site Medical Office/Corporate Nuclear Security FFD Staff is responsible for:

A. Notifying supervisors/designees regarding employees selected for random testing B. Specimen collection/chain of custody C. Training of collectors D. Records from breath analysis equipment (maintenance/calibration/repair)

E. Review of test results 3.1.3 The Health & Safety Organization is responsible for maintaining Employee Assistance Program (EAP) contract(s)

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 6 of 30 3.2 Standards of Conduct 3.2.1 General All persons under the scope of this SPP shall ensure that they are fit to perform their duties in a reliable and trustworthy manner. It is their duty to keep alcohol and illegal drugs off TVAN property and immediately report persons on TVAN property who may not be fit for duty to the appropriate management/supervisor or Nuclear Security.

A. All persons under the scope of this SPP are responsible for reporting to the Site Medical Office/Corporate Nuclear Security FFD Staff and to their immediate supervisor any health problems which may impair their ability to safely and competently perform work or impair fitness for duty. Examples include:

1. Medications (prescriptions and over-the-counter)
2. Mental or emotional problems
3. Personal problems
4. Fatigue or stress
5. Physical illness or condition B. If there are indications of drug or alcohol abuse or indications that an individual is unable to safely and competently perform his/her duties, the individual's management supervisor is responsible for:
1. Informing the employee of the assistance available through the EAP, and
2. Referring the person to the Site Medical Office/Corporate Nuclear Security FFD Staff for a fitness for duty evaluation in accordance with Subsection 3.3.1.E.
3. When applicable, requesting a for-cause alcohol and drug test which must be approved by the Vice President, General Manager or his/her designee in accordance with Subsection 3.3.1 .D.

3.2.2 Illegal Druas and Alcohol All employees and workers under the scope of this procedure shall not possess, use, or sell illegal drugs on or off of TVA property.

All employees and workers under the scope of this procedure shall not possess, use, or sell alcohol on any TVA property.

WVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 7 of 30 All employees and workers are prohibited from reporting to a TVAN work location under the influence of illegal drugs or alcohol at or above the cutoff levels established in 10 CFR 26, Appendix A, or more stringent TVAN cutoff levels as described in Subsection 3.3.2.C.

3.2.3 Offsite Alcohol Consumption A. Off-site consumption of alcohol is prohibited under the following conditions;

1. If a person leaves the work location with the intent of returning that day or shift.
2. If the person is attending an off-site business meeting.
3. If a person is scheduled to report for work within five hours.

NOTE Excessive consumption of alcohol before the five hour abstinence period can cause a positive breath test.

4. If a TVA vehicle will be driven following consumption of the alcohol.

B. The consumption of alcohol is not prohibited after completing official business, if done in accordance with applicable local laws and the guidelines above.

3.2.4 Handling of Drugs and Illegal Substances Found at Nuclear Plants All employees, employee vehicles, personal belongings, offices, lockers and company property are subject to search. Refusal to submit to a search will subject the employee to immediate disciplinary action. To provide a means to detect or deter drug activity on-site, each TVAN station may use canines to facilitate searches.

A. Discovery of Suspected Controlled Substance or Illegal Drugs - OUTSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA (PA)

1. Security Supervisor will:
  • Immediately take positive possession and control of the substance using caution not to spill or contaminate the substance.
  • Take appropriate actions to secure the general area.
  • Notify the Site Security Manager (SSM)/Shift Coordinator
  • Evaluate the overall situation and take whatever action is required to contain the situation and minimize its impact.
  • Initiate a Chain of Custody (COC) form. (Ask the Site Medical Office/Collection Facility for assistance with COC)
2. Site Medical Office/Collection Facility will:

0 Package the substance for shipment to laboratory.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 8 of 30

  • Lock the packaged substance in the Medical Office/Collection Facility refrigerator until forwarding to laboratory for analysis.
  • Separately package excess or remaining amounts of the substance with another COC form.

NOTE Excess amounts of the substance may be maintained in the Medical Office/Collection Facility refrigerator or by Security in an evidence safe until laboratory analysis is complete. If results are positive, the remaining substance may be turned over to OIG, LLEA, other authorities, as appropriate. If results are negative, the remaining substance may be returned to owner, if known, or discarded.

3. SSM or Designee will:
  • Upon receiving information that a suspected substance has been found and confirming it was outside the PA, make the following contacts, explaining that this is not a reportable event.

Site Management (Site VP, Plant Manager, Site Human Resource Manager)

Manager, Nuclear Security OIG (determine if OIG will initiate investigation)

Informally brief Resident Inspectors and Region II Inspectors of investigation, explaining that this is not a reportable event--awaiting lab results.

  • Inform contacts that the substance will immediately be sent to the contract laboratory for analysis or to the lab of OIG's choice, as appropriate.
  • Inform contacts of laboratory analysis results immediately upon receipt.
4. Manager, Nuclear Security, or Designee will:
  • Make corresponding contacts to Nuclear Corporate Management.
  • Notify the SSM of contract laboratory analysis results immediately upon receipt.

If the results are negative, notify management and the NRC of the results and refer to OIG for determining if a follow-up investigation is necessary.

If the results are positive, notify management and the NRC of the results, this is not a reportable event, and refer to OIG for a follow-up investigation. Keep management and the NRC informed of the status of the investigation.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 9 of 30 B. Discovery of Suspected Controlled Substance or Illegal Drugs - INSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA (PA)

1. Security Supervisor will:
  • Immediately take positive possession and control of the substance using caution not to spill or contaminate the substance.
  • Take appropriate actions to secure the general area.
  • Notify the SSM/Shift Coordinator.
  • Evaluate the overall situation and take whatever action is required to contain the situation and minimize its impact.
  • Initiate a Chain of Custody (COC) form. (Ask the Site Medical Office/Collection Facility for assistance with COC)
2. Site Medical Office/Collection Facility will:
  • Package the substance for shipment to laboratory.
  • Lock the packaged substance in the Medical Office/Collection Facility refrigerator until forwarding to laboratory for analysis.
  • Separately package excess or remaining amounts of the substance with another COC form.

NOTE Excess amounts of the substance may be maintained in the Medical Office/Collection Facility refrigerator or by Security in an evidence safe until laboratory analysis is complete. If results are positive, the remaining substance may be turned over to OIG, LLEA, other authorities, as appropriate. If results are negative, the remaining substance may be returned to owner, if known, or discarded.

3. SSM or Designee will:
  • Upon receiving information that a suspected substance has been found and confirming that it was inside the PA, make the following contacts;

- Site Management (Site VP, Plant Manager, Site Human Resource Manager)

- Manager, Nuclear Security

- OIG (determine if OIG will initiate investigation)

. Resident Inspectors and Region II Inspectors "courtesy call"

  • Inform all contacts that the substance will immediately be sent to the contract laboratory for analysis or to the laboratory of OIG's choice, as appropriate.

NOTE The substance cannot be confirmed as an illegal drug without laboratory analysis.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 10 of 30 Inform all contacts that if the laboratory confirms the substance, this will be classified as a significant FFD event under requirements of 10CFR26.73(a) and will be reported to the NRC Operations Center by telephone within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> of the confirmation.

Inform all contacts of laboratory analysis results immediately upon receipt.

4. Manager, Nuclear Security, or Designee will:
  • Make corresponding contacts to Nuclear Corporate Management. Advising that the event is under investigation and will be reportable to the NRC if the laboratory confirms that the suspected substance is an illegal drug.
  • Assist in investigation of incident as appropriate.

Upon receipt of the laboratory test results, the Manager, Nuclear Security will make the following contacts if negative:

Inform the SSM of contract laboratory analysis results immediately upon receipt. The SSM or designee will brief Site Management and the NRC that the laboratory test was negative and that the event is not reportable. The SSM will notify the OIG if necessary and request investigative assistance if appropriate.

  • Inform Nuclear Corporate Management that the event is not reportable.
  • Assist in investigation of incident if requested.

Upon receipt of the laboratory test results, the Manager, Nuclear Security will make the following contacts if positive:

Inform the SSM of contract laboratory analysis results immediately upon receipt. The SSM or designee will brief Site Management and the NRC that the laboratory test was positive and that the event is reportable. The SSM will notify the OIG and request investigative assistance.

  • Inform Nuclear Corporate Management that the event is reportable.
  • Contact Corporate Licensing and arrange to complete 24-hour notification to the NRC operations center within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> of receipt of the laboratory results.

Assist in investigation of incident if requested.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 11 of 30 3.3 Alcohol and Drua Testing 3.3.1 General Alcohol and Drug testing shall be conducted in accordance with I OCFR26 and the TVAN FF0 Procedure Manual.

A. EmploymentJTransfer Alcohol and Drug Testing This type of initial testing applies to:

1. Outside applicants for a WAN position.
2. TVA employees transferring to a TVAN position.
3. Contractors and vendors applying for WVAN work.

Employment/transfer testing is not required under the following conditions:

1. When a person has been tested within the previous 60 days by TVAN, another nuclear licensee, or a WVAN-approved FFD testing program.
2. When a person has been subject to random alcohol and drug testing in TVAN's, another nuclear licensee's, or TVAN-approved FFD testing program within the last 30 days. The person must have completed an initial alcohol and drug test.

Individuals who have had a confirmed positive alcohol or drug test or have refused to be tested under a federal or state regulated FFD/alcohol and drug testing program within the past three (3) years will not be considered for employment.

B. Pre-access Alcohol and Drug Testing (Testing Prior to Granting of Unescorted Access)

Testing must be completed by TVAN prior to granting of unescorted access except in the following situations:

1. When a person has been tested within the previous 60 days by TVAN, another nuclear licensee, or a TVAN-approved FFD testing program.
2. When a person has been subject to random testing in TVAN's, another nuclear licensee's, or a TVAN-approved FFD testing program within the past 30 days. The person must have completed an initial alcohol and drug test.

C. Random Alcohol and Drug Testing

1. Random alcohol and drug testing is applicable to:
a. Those with unescorted access.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 12 of 30

b. Employees who report for emergency response centers.
c. Those with an official station of a nuclear plant or project.
d. TVAN employees and contractors (TVAN employees or contractors with clerical-related salary administration plans may be excluded unless other criteria in this section apply).
e. Those who remain in the random program in order to maintain eligibility for an unescorted access badge.
f. Those responsible for administering the FFD program (Program Integrity).
g. NRC contractor employees.
2. Random testing is conducted at an annual rate equal to at least 50 percent of the population. Each person has an equal chance of being selected for testing every day that testing is conducted, from all shifts. Random testing is conducted:
a. Various times of the day
b. Several days of the week
c. On weekends and holidays
3. Notification will be made by the Site Medical Office/Corporate Nuclear Security FFD Staff through the individual's supervisor or designee. The person selected is responsible for reporting promptly (without delay) to the medical/collection facility.

Supervisors/designees are responsible for:

a. Notifying individuals of their selection. Some flexibility exists regarding notifying the individual of his/her selection if the selected individual is involved in critical activities (e.g., inside containment or involved in Technical Specification testing/action, etc.). Delayed notification must be coordinated with and approved by the appropriate Site Medical Office/Corporate Nuclear Security FFD Staff; NOTE No advance notification/warning will be given. Notification to report shall not be left on answering machines, voice mail, notes on desks, etc.
b. Ensuring that the selected individual reports promptly (without delay) to the medical/collection facility;

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 13 of 30

c. Ensuring that knowledge of the individual's selection is kept private and restricted to the absolute minimum number of appropriate persons necessary to facilitate prompt testing.

D. For-Cause Alcohol and Drug Testing All for-cause testing must be approved by the Vice President, General Manager or his/her designee: Rationale for for-cause testing must be verified to be in compliance with this procedure's requirements and must be thoroughly documented by the appropriate supervisor/manager. In addition, all for-cause testing should be reported to the FFD Manager within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> (Monday - Friday) of test completion.

1. For-cause testing shall be conducted when there is reasonable suspicion that the worker's behavior involved a failure of performance that contributed to:
a. Radiation releases or exposure of radioactivity in excess of regulatory limits.
b. Actual or potential substantial degradations of the level of safety of the plant.
c. An accident involving serious injury or death or significant damage to property or equipment.
d. A 'near miss" which could have resulted in serious injury, death, or significant damage to property or equipment.
2. For-cause testing may also be conducted under the following conditions:
a. When aberrant behavior is exhibited.
b. When a person is reasonably suspected of:

(1) Recent use of controlled substance(s) or alcohol.

(2) Engaged in illegal drug activities.

(3) Possession of illegal drugs or alcohol.

c. After receiving credible information or credible allegations of drug/alcohol abuse against:

(1) An individual (2) A work unit determined to be a critical nuclear employment area when:

The number or proportion of positive results is found to be significant, and

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 14 of 30 When activities are confirmed by testing or otherwise (for example, Inspector General's investigations) for a number of employees.

d. As part of an investigation involving an accident (vehicle or personal) in which safety precautions were violated or unusually careless acts were performed.
e. When an employee's work record indicates a history of accidents or "near misses" or accidents which are the fault of the employee.
f. When an excessively high accident rate is observed in a particular location.

E. Follow-up Alcohol and Drug Testing Follow-up testing is required for TVA employees for whom unescorted access has been reinstated and who have been returned to work following a confirmed positive test result.

Employees in the follow-up testing are subject to the following:

1. Follow-up testing on a random basis of at least once every month for the first four months; and at least once every 3 months for the next 2 years and eight months.
2. Random testing program.

F. Witnessed Collections Witnesses must be of the same gender as the individual providing the specimen and must be trained as a urine drug screen collector or witness.

Program Integrity Clearance is required for witnesses.

Specimen collections may be witnessed if:

1. The individual has presented a urine specimen that falls outside the normal temperature range, or
2. The collector observes an attempt to substitute or adulterate the urine sample, or
3. The individual has previously been determined to have used a substance inappropriately or without medical approval and the particular test is being conducted as a part of a rehabilitation program or on return to service after evaluation and/or treatment for a confirmed positive test result.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 15 of 30 G. FFD Evaluations FFD Evaluations will be conducted in accordance with the specific working principles and procedures as contained in the TVAN Cormorate Nuclear Security Psychological Screening Manual and the Medical Examiner's Guide.

FFD evaluations are performed when changes in behavior (on or off the job - based upon circumstances) or performance are indicated. These evaluations are also performed on return to work following a positive alcohol or drug test. A FFD Evaluation is requested by the employee's management supervisor or Corporate Nuclear Security. The evaluation consists of medical and psychological evaluations for purposes of establishing eligibility for special nuclear security clearances.

Evaluations for return to work following a positive alcohol or drug test will include an alcohol and drug test. When applicable and when approved by the Vice President, General Manager, or his/her designee, a drug and alcohol test may also be conducted in accordance with Subsection 3.3.1 .D.

3.3.2 Processes and Cut-Off Levels Chemical and alcohol testing will be conducted in accordance with 10CFR26 and the TVAN FFD Procedure Manual.

A. Chemical Testing Process

1. The chemical testing process shall screen for the following drugs of concern:
  • marijuana
  • cocaine
  • opiates
  • phencyclidine
  • amphetamines
2. TVAN will utilize a "split" specimen/sample process.
3. TVAN will utilize strict chain-of-custody procedures to ensure the integrity of specimens.
4. TVAN will utilize a Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) certified laboratory to confirm all positive drug test analyses.
5. TVAN will submit blind performance test specimens which contain known negative and positive quantities of drugs to ensure continued quality control is maintained by the laboratory.
6. An initial screening test will be performed on ALL urine samples for testing, utilizing an immunoassay procedure. The immunoassay screen tests for drugs or drug metabolites, indicating a 'preliminary positive" or negative result.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 16 of 30

7. Negative specimens will be eliminated from further testing.
8. A "confirmatory test" using gas chromatography/mass spectrometry (GC/MS) will be performed when an initial screening test indicates drugs in a person's urine. GC/MS is a sophisticated analytical technique that accurately identifies substances and amounts.
9. In for-cause, follow-up, witnessed, or return to work tests, the following drugs will also screened for:
  • methaqualone
  • methadone
  • benzodiazepines
  • barbiturates
  • propoxyphene
10. A physician designated as the Medical Review Officer (MRO) will interpret and evaluate "analytical" confirmed positive test results from the laboratory together with the individual's medical history and other relevant biomedical information. It is important to note the following:

Hemp food products, such as "Seedy Sweeties" or "Hemp Liquid Gold," may cause a positive test for marijuana:

however, consumption of these products is not a legitimate medical explanation for a positive drug test result.

Coca leaf teas, such as "Health Inca Tea," can cause a positive cocaine drug test result. This type of tea is now illegal and will not be considered a valid explanation for a positive drug test result.

Although some states allow for the medicinal use of marijuana based on a physician recommendation, a physician recommendation is not considered a legitimate explanation for a positive marijuana test result under federal drug testing programs.

11. If there is no information to suggest a legitimate reason for the presence of the drug in the individual's urine, the MRO shall declare the result confirmed positive.
12. For MRO-confirmed positives, at the tested individual's request, the original testing laboratory will forward the split specimen to another TVAN approved DHHS certified laboratory for analysis. A MRO will review the results of split specimen analyses to facilitate appropriate disposition.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 17 of 30 B. Alcohol Analysis Process

1. Breath samples will be provided for alcohol analysis.
2. Individuals being tested will provide a minimum of two samples.

Breath-alcohol test results will not be considered accurate unless each breath measurement is within plus or minus 10% of the average of all the measurements.

3. In accordance with 10CFR26, a breath alcohol content indicating a blood alcohol concentration of 0.04% or greater shall be considered a positive test result.
4. If the individual being tested disputes the results of the breath alcohol analysis, he/she may request the test to be confirmed by using gas chromatography analysis of his/her blood.

NOTE Failure of the individual to request the blood test within 15 minutes of the confirmed positive breath alcohol test will constitute acceptance of the breath alcohol results. The individual will remain in the medical/collection facility between breath alcohol and blood testing.

C. Cut-off Levels TVAN will use preliminary initial cut-off levels and confirmatory test cut-off levels for the above substances as described in 10CFR26, Appendix A, Section 2.7, with the following exceptions, which are more stringent:

1. The initial test cut-off level for marijuana metabolites is 50 ng/ml and the confirmatory test cut-off level is 15 ng/ml. In addition, if the creatinine level for a specimen is below 20 mg/dl and the marijuana is negative at a cut-off level of 50 ng/mi, the contract laboratory will test the specimen for marijuana using a 20 ng/ml cut-off. If the specimen is positive on the initial screen at or above 20 ng/ml and up to 50 nglml, the confirmation test will be at the limit of quantitation - which the GC/MS technology supports.
2. Alcohol test results between 0.02 and 0.039 BAC will be reviewed for appropriate action - see Subsection 3.7 (Table)

- Penalties for Violation(s) of the FFD Program.

3.4 Appeals An opportunity to appeal the confirmed positive test result, subversion or refusal to fully cooperate in the testing process is provided to any current TVA employee or contractor/vendor.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 18 of 30 3.5 Training 3.5.1 General FFD Program information as required by 10CFR26 and Behaviorar Observation Program information and techniques as required by 10CFR26 and 10CFR73.56 "Personnel Access Authorization Requirements for Nuclear Power Plants," will be included in FFD Training.

All persons under the scope of this procedure shall be subject to the training requirements of this section. This is regardless of whether or not the person is subject to the random alcohol and drug testing portions of the program.

Training shall be administered under the policy and procedures established by TVAN Training.

Medical Review Officers and psychologists are normally not required to take Fitness for Duty Training because of the nature of their training, education, and experience.

A. Completion of Training FFD training MUST be completed prior to the granting of unescorted access, prior to assignment to an Emergency Response Center or within 90 days of assignment to supervisory duties.

For all other employees, it must be taken within four months of assignment to TVAN.

B. Expiration of Training Training expires annually at the end of the quarter in which it comes due.

If training expires one or more of the following actions will normally occur:

1. Unescorted access is promptly suspended;
2. The person will be restricted from Emergency Response Center participation.
3. Denial of access to a site or TVAN work location and placement in a TVAN non-work status until the training has been completed.

NOTE Actions 1 and 2 above occur automatically within applicable computer programs.

Employees who do not have unescorted access and are not tasked with emergency center response who have valid reasons for failing to complete required FFD training within the specified quarter may preclude Action 3.

placement in a TVAN non-work status, if:

- The responsible supervisor documents the valid reason(s) for the employee's failure to complete the required training. This documentation should be placed in the employee's personnel file with copies forwarded

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 19 of 30 to the applicable Human Resources Office and to the Nuclear Security FFD Program Manager.

- The responsible supervisor ensures the employee completes the required training immediately upon return to work.

Valid reasons for failure to complete required training within the-specified quarter include extended medical/sick leaveextended A/L due to hardship; temporary assignment to Institute of Nuclear Power (INPO) or to another utility.

Supervisors should encourage employees not to schedule required training near quarter ending. Taking scheduled annual leave the last week of the quarter is not a valid reason for failing to complete required training.

Upon successful completion of the course as determined by WVAN training policy, the person may be returned to work, and activities in actions (1) and (2) above may be reinstated.

3.6 Employee Assistance Proqram 3.6.1 General TVA has a contract Employee Assistance Program (EAP) which provides assistance to TVA employees experiencing substance abuse, financial, marital, or other similar problems. Confidential assistance to employees is provided consistent with applicable laws and requirements.

A. The EAP offers the following for TVA employees and their families with problems that could adversely affect performance of job duties:

1. Assessment
2. Short-term counseling
3. Referral services
4. Treatment monitoring B. The EAP provides TVA employees with confidential access to trained counselors. Confidentiality is assured except in cases where a person's condition constitutes a hazard to himself/herself or others, or could adversely affect the safe operation of TVAN's facilities. In these cases, the EAP shall contact TVA's Manager, Clinical Services, Health & Safety, who in turn will inform TVAN Personnel Security, without identifying the person as an alcohol or drug treatment patient.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-11.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 20 of 30 3.7 Penalties for Violation(s) of the FFD Proaram TABLE OF PENALTIES ISSUE TVAN EMPLOYEE OTHER TVA EMPLOYEE CONTRACTOR WORKER Positive Alcohol & Druo Test Applicant/Badging Employment Denied Badging-Return to TVA organization Restricted from TVAN work Pre-Access (Restricted for 3 years minimum) (Restricted for 3 years minimum) (Restricted 3 years minimum)

A&D Test Random 1st Positive-Minimum Return to TVA organization for Restricted from TVAN work A&D Test 14-day suspension & EAP action (3-year minimum restriction (3-year minimum restriction (Return subject to conditions) from TVAN) from TVAN)

Follow-up; For-Cause; Termination Restricted from TVAN work Permanent restriction from 2nd Random (Permanent TVAN (Permanent TVAN restriction) TVAN work activities A&D Test; restriction)

Subversion Use, Sell, Possession (TVAN will support criminal prosecution by law enforcement agencies for all USP violations) of Illegal Drugs &

Alcohol Onsite Termination Return to TViA organization Immediate removal from TVAN (Permanent TVAN (Permanent TVAN restriction; (Permanent TVAN restriction; Restriction; 5 year restriction nuclear 5 year restriction 5 year restriction industry) nuclear industry) nuclear industry)

Offsite Disciplinary action Return to TV A organization Restriction from TVAN work (Alcohol Excluded) up to and including (Minimum 5 rear restriction) (Minimum 5 year restriction) termination Repeat violations will result in a permanent work restriction in the nuclear industry.

0 02-0.039% BAC Referral to EAP Referral to EAP Referral to Contractor for Random Alcohol Test (Subject to disciplinary (Subject to be returned to TVA action (Subject to restriction actions & FFD Evaluation) Removed organization) Removed from work for to TVAN) Removed from work from work for remainder of shift. remainder of shift. for remainder of shift 0 02-0,039% BAC Employment Denied Pre-employment/ (Restricted for 3 years minimum) Badging-Return to TVA organization Restricted from TVAN work Badging Alcohol Test minimum) (Restricted for 3 years minimum) (Restricted 3 years minimum.)

"Refusal to fully cooperate in the testing process including refusal to provide a specimen or deliberately attempting to evade the detection of substance abuse (subversion) will result in for-cause termination and permanent restriction from TVAN work.

Any positive alcohol and drug test will result in immediate denial of Unescorted Nuclear Plant access or other security clearances and participati in the Emergency Response Program, Employees testing random positive for the first time must complete EAP assessment and initiate any rehabilitation program deemed appropriate prior to being considered for reinstatement. Restoration of Unescorted Nuclear Plant Access or othe security clearances and Emergency Response will be determined by Personnel Security following reapproval of medical and psychological eligibility for special security clearances.

Excludes temporary employees - temporary employees will be terminated.

"-In instances where entire work units/groups are tested for-cause due to circumstances outlined in Subsection 3.3.1 D those testing positive v as a minimum, receive a 14-day suspension and EAP with return subject to conditions.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 21 of 30 3.8 Resulting Actions for other Violations of this Procedure (or SPP)

Management actions for any violation of this procedure other than confirmed positive tests shall be based on all the circumstances of the particular violation and shall be consistent with the purpose of this procedure. Resignations prior to removal for violation of WVAN FFD policy concerning drugs must be recorded as removal for-cause. Refusal td fully cooperate in the testing process, including refusal to provide a specimen or deliberately attempting to evade the detection of substance abuse (e.g., subversion by substituting or adulterating a urine specimen) will result in for-cause termination and permanent restriction from TVAN work.

3.9 Fitness for Duty Requirements for Unescorted Access For an individual to obtain and maintain authorization for unescorted access:

A. Complete a suitable inquiry into fitness for duty history prior to or within 180 days following the granting of unescorted access.

B. Successfully meet alcohol and drug test requirements.

C. Psychological approval for unescorted access to nuclear plants must be obtained.

D. Fitness-for-Duty training must be completed.

3.10 Transfer of Fitness for Duty Certification An employee of any contractor, vendor, or industry group whose FFD Program has been approved by WVAN to Subsection 3.13 of this SPP, or any employee of any nuclear utility licensee currently subject to the 10 CFR Part 26 FFD of that licensee, may be approved for unescorted access or emergency response duties without additional drug testing, training, or suitable inquiry being performed.

This Subsection shall not apply in cases of transfer of employment to TVA or to a person in a follow-up testing program.

These persons shall be subject to the TVAN FFD program, including random testing.

3.11 Emeraency Response Center All persons designated by name or position to respond to an Emergency Response Center are subject to a suitable inquiry and alcohol and drug test prior to being assigned.Should adverse information be developed prior to or during the assignment, the person's approval to participate in emergency center operations may be denied.

A. The Manager of Radiological Emergency Preparedness shall identify to Personnel Security those persons required to respond to emergency centers.

B. Personnel Security shall conduct the appropriate reviews for those individuals requested and approve or deny an individual's participation based on FFD criteria.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 22 of 30 3.12 Fitness for Duty Program Integrity 3.12.1 Obtaining Proaram Integrity Clearance All persons responsible for administration of drug and alcohol testing program must obtain Program Integrity (PI) Clea'ance prior to assignment. Initial PI will entail successful completion of:

A background investigation; fingerprinting and criminal history check through the Federal Bureau of Investigation; psychological testing and interview (as appropriate); alcohol and drug test with subsequent enrollment in the random drug test population; FFD Training (annually). PI updates will be performed every subsequent three years. Individuals in PI will also be subject to a behavioral observation program designed to assure that they continue to meet the highest standards for honesty and integrity.

Health & Safety, Information Services, Human Resources, and other applicable organizations shall identify to Corporate Nuclear Security those persons within their organizations responsible for administering the testing program. At a minimum, these persons will include:

A. Personnel selecting and notifying individuals to be tested.

a. Personnel collecting specimens and/or conducting the alcohol and drug testing.

C. Personnel with access to the automated drug screening program.

D. Personnel with authorization to modify the automated drug screening program.

E. Personnel trained to witness urine drug screens.

NOTE Normally, couriers contracted for specimen transport will not be required to obtain PI Clearance. Examples include couriers who work for the Postal Service, Federal Express, Airborne Express, United Parcel Service, and pilots and crews of aircraft.

3.12.2 The Manager, Personnel Security, is responsible for the following:

A. Conducting background investigations of personnel responsible for administering the testing program, including those listed above, upon initial assignment and updated every three years thereafter.

B. Requesting a psychological evaluation to be completed upon initial assignment and updated every three years thereafter.

C. Issuing or withdrawing clearance approval to participate in program activities based on investigative, psychological and FFD information.

"TVAN STANDARD SPP-11.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 23 of 30 3.13 Contractor/Vendor Programs All contractors, vendors, or industry groups having personnel who will require unescorted access to protected areas, will be designated by name or position to staff an emergency center, or will be located at TVAN work locations must be subject to a FFD' program which meets the requirements of 10 CFR Part 26.

TVAN may, at its discretion, accept, either whole or in part, FFD programs administered by contractor, vendors, or industry groups. All such programs must meet the minimum requirements of 10 CFR 26.

Corporate Nuclear Security shall be responsible for review and approval of any such programs.

3.14 Call-in for Unscheduled Work 3.14.1 General An employee is expected to not consume alcohol 5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> prior to reporting for SCHEDULED work and to report fit and within FFD guidelines. If called for unscheduled work the employee's suitability for work must be determined.

A. The following must be done whenever a worker is being called in for unscheduled work.

1. The caller will ask and will document (on Form SPP-1.2-1 or similar type form) the worker's response to the following two questions.
a. Are you fit to report to work?
b. Have you consumed alcohol within the past 5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br />?

If the answer to the last question is yes, and the individual is called in, document how much alcohol was consumed and when.

NOTE Contractor employees will not report if alcohol has been consumed within the past five hours except in rare emergency situations.

2. The worker must advise the caller and the supervisor if he or she believes that he/she is unfit to report for work.
3. The caller will then decide whether or not to have the person report to work.
4. If the answer to the alcohol consumption question is "yes" then Nuclear Security on site should be notified and be requested to administer a saliva test to the employee. This test must be administered as soon as the person arrives on site. The test shall be administered outside the Protected Area.

"WVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 24 of 30

5. If the test results are 0.039 or below, the employee's responsible supervisor shall determine if the employee can be permitted to work. The employee will not be subject to disciplinary action.
6. If the results are 0.040,or above the employee will not be permitted to work. The employee can be paid callout pay. This will NOT be considered a positive test for FFD purposes.

B. Emergency Response Center Personnel Emergency Response Center Personnel who are called by an automated electronic system are responsible for:

1. Advising the center if he/she believes that they are unfit to report for duty.
2. Advising the center on reporting if alcohol has been consumed within the past five hours.

3.15 Contracts and Purchasing The requirements of Appendix A apply to companies which provide services to TVA under Personal Services Contracts, Code III; Consultant Agreements, Code Ill; Loan Agreements, Code Ill; and Cooperative Agreements, Code II and to contracts for purchase of personal property and services other than personal. This Subsection does not apply to state and local contract emergency response personnel responding to an emergency at a TVA nuclear plant site.

3.16 Audits The General Manager of Nuclear Assurance (NA) conducts an annual audit of the TVAN FFD Program as required by 10 CFR Part 26, and in accordance with the TVAN Quality Assurance Plan and NADP-2, "Audits." At the request of Nuclear Security, NA will audit the FFD programs of contractors and vendors.

The audit will use professional support as necessary to ensure the technical aspects of the program are thoroughly reviewed.

TVAN may accept audits of contractors and vendors conducted by other licensees or industry groups. TVAN shall maintain a copy of the audit report to include findings, recommendations and corrective actions.

3.17 Reporting 3.17.1 Semiannual Report Corporate Nuclear Security shall prepare a semiannual report for submittal to the NRC. The report shall include the following:

A. A statistical summary of the testing during the period submitted on the standard form.

B. A summary of the significant FFD events.

WVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 25 of 30 3.17.2 Twenty-Four Hour Reoort A telephonic report will be made by Corporate Nuclear Security to' the NRC Operations Center within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> of discovery of any of the following events:

A. Sale, use, or possession of illegal drugs within the protected area.

B. Any of the following acts by persons licensed under 10 CFR Part 55 to operate a power reactor, or by any supervisory personnel with unescorted access to a TVAN nuclear power plant, or supervisory personnel required to report to a TVAN Emergency Response Center in accordance with TVAN emergency plans and procedure.

1. The use, sale or possession of illegal drugs within the protected area.
2. Confirmed positive test results.
3. Use of alcohol within the protected area.
4. A determination of unfitness for scheduled work due to the consumption of alcohol.
5. Any other significant FFD event as determined by Corporate Nuclear Security.

Twenty-four hour reporting is done in accordance with 10 CFR 26.73 rather than 10 CFR 73.71, one hour reporting.

4.0 RECORDS TVA personnel and medical records, including associated FFD Program information, are maintained and protected in accordance with the Privacy Act of 1974, as amended, and 10 CFR Part 26.

4.1 QA Records None.

4.2 Non-QA Records All records pertaining to this program shall be maintained in a secure and confidential area.

A. The Site Nuclear Training Manager is responsible for official records of training attendance and examination results, retained for five years and maintained by Document Control and Records Management.

B. The Manager, Nuclear Security, is responsible for the following records:

1. Reports of Medical Review Officer confirmed positive drug and alcohol tests and management actions retained for at least five years.
2. Disciplinary records in connection with violations of the FFD Program retained for at least five years.

"WVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 26 of 30

3. FFD Program performance data and analyses retained for four years.
4. Background investigation reports including evidence of suitable inquiry retained for five years following termination of the person's access authorization.
5. Employee Release of Information forms
6. Records of persons ineligible for three years or longer for unescorted access or reporting to any TVA emergency response center, retained until termination of the Nuclear Regulatory Commission license for which access or reporting was denied.
7. Audit reports of TVAN-approved contractor, vendor, and industry group FFD Programs when industry group audits are endorsed, or when TVAN performs the audit - retained for three years after the audit.
8. The results of psychological assessments generated after February 28, 1998. These records are retained for at least five years following termination of an individual.
9. Drug and alcohol test results and MRO documentation related to those results generated after March 31, 1998. These records are retained for at least five years.

C. The Manager of Health & Safety is responsible for the following records:

1. Medical examination and evaluation results.
2. The results of psychological assessments generated before March 1, 1998.
3. Drug and alcohol test results and MRO documentation related to those results generated before April 1, 1998. These records are retained for at least five years.
4. Alcohol and drug test information in accordance with 10 CFR Part 26 generated before April 1, 1998.
5. Employee Assistance Program records in accordance with USC Title 42, Section 290dd.

D. The Contract Administration Manager is responsible for the following records:

Written agreements between TVAN and contractors or industry groups which require the contractor or industry group to adhere to TVAN's FFD Program or require contractors or industry groups to implement their own FFD Programs which have been reviewed and approved by TVAN-retained for the life of the contracts.

E. The Site Vice President is responsible for records of unscheduled call-in forms, retained for one year, maintained at the department level.

"WVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 27 of 30 F. The Site Security Manager is responsible for saliva testing results for persons called in for unscheduled work. These records are maintained for one year.

5.0 DEFINITIONS Aberrant Behavior - Behavior deviating from the established norm for an individual.

Blood Alcohol Concentration - (BAC), which can be measured directly from blood or derived from a measure of the concentration of alcohol in a breath specimen, is a measure of the mass of alcohol in a volume of blood such that an individual with 100 mg of alcohol per 100 ml of blood has a BAC of 0.10 percent.

Chain-of-Custody - Procedures to account for the integrity of each specimen by tracking its handling and storage from the point of specimen collection to final disposition of the specimen.

Collection Site - A place designated by TVAN where individuals present themselves for the purpose of providing a specimen of their urine, breath, and/or blood to be analyzed for the presence of drugs or alcohol.

Collection Site Person - A person who instructs and assists individuals at a collection site and who receives and makes an initial examination of the specimen(s) provided by those individuals. A collection site person shall have successfully completed training to carry out this function or shall be a licensed medical professional or technician who is provided instructions for collection under 10CFR26 and certifies completion as required. In any case where: (a) a collection is observed or (b) collection is monitored by non-medical personnel, the collection site person must be a person of the same gender as the donor.

Confirmatory Test - A second analytical procedure to identify the presence of a specific drug or drug metabolite which is independent of the initial screening test and which uses a different technique and chemical principle from that of the initial screening test in order to ensure reliability and accuracy. For determining blood alcohol levels, a "confirmatory test" means a second test using another breath alcohol analysis device. Further confirmation upon demand will be by gas chromatography analysis of blood.

Confirmed Positive Test Result - The result of a confirmatory test that has established the presence of drugs, drug metabolites, or alcohol in a specimen at or above the cut-off level, and that has been deemed positive by the Medical Review Officer after evaluation. A "confirmed positive test" for alcohol may also be obtained as a result of a confirmation of blood alcohol levels with a second breath-analysis without Medical Review Officer evaluation.

Contractor - For the purpose of this procedure (or SPP), any company or individual with which TVA has contracted for work or service to be performed on TVAN property.

Cut-Off Level - The value set for designating a test result as positive.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-11.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 28 of 30 Emergency Response Center - The Technical Support Center (TSC), Operations Support Center (OSC), or Central Emergency Control Center (CECC) at which TVA employees, contractors, or vendors are required to physically report in accordance with the Radiological Emergency Plan and procedures.

Follow-Up Testing - Chemical testing at unannounced intervals to ensure that an employee is maintaining abstinence from the abuse of drugs or alcohol.

HHS - Certified Laboratory - A urine and blood testing laboratory that maintains certification to perform drug testing under the Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) "Mandatory Guidelines for Federal Workplace Drug Testing Program" (53 FR 11970).

Illegal Drugs - Those drugs included in Schedules I through V of the Controlled Substances Act (CSA), but not when used pursuant to a valid prescription or when used as otherwise authorized by law.

Initial or Screening Test - An immunoassay screen for drugs or drug metabolites to eliminate "negative" urine specimens from further consideration or the first breathalyzer test for alcohol.

Medical Review Officer - A licensed physician responsible for determining fitness for duty and receiving laboratory results generated by TVA's drug testing program. The Medical Review Officer has knowledge of substance abuse disorders and has appropriate medical training to interpret and evaluate a person's positive test result together with his or her medical history and any other relevant biomedical information.

Random Test - A system of unannounced drug testing administered in a statistically random manner to a group so that all persons within that group have an equal probability of selection.

Reasonable Suspicion - A suspicion based on specific facts and reasonable inferences from those facts in light of experience or training which indicates that an individual may be using or has recently used alcohol or drugs, or may be in the possession of alcohol or drugs, or may have engaged in illegal drug activities. Reasonable suspicion may be based on reliable statements made by other employees or tips from informants. Actual observation of impaired behavior on the job is not necessary.

Split Sample - A portion of a urine specimen that may be stored by the licensee to be tested in the event of the appeal.

Suitable Inquiry - Best-effort verification of employment history for the past five years, but in no case less than three years, obtained from contacts with previous employers to determine if a person was, in the past, tested positive for illegal drugs, subject to a plan for treating substance abuse, removed from or made ineligible for activities within the scope of 10 CFR Part 26, or denied unescorted access at any other nuclear power plant or other employment in accordance with a fitness for duty policy.

TVAN Work Location - Any TVA nuclear plant site/project and any WVAN work location or facility.

Vendor - For the purpose of this procedure (or SPP), any company or individual not under contract to TVA providing services in the protected area of TVA nuclear plant sites.

"WVAN STANDARD SPP-1i.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Rev. 4 PROCESSES Page 29 of 30 APPENDIX A Page 1 of I CONTRACTS/PURCHASING FFD REQUIREMENTS 1.0 The Contracts Administration Manager shall ensure that all contracts that supply personnel to work at TVAN work locations require the contractor to:

A. Comply with this FFD SPP.

B. Notify Personnel Security of any contractor employee working on TVA assignments who has violated a fitness for duty policy.

C. Allow authorized representatives of the NRC to inspect, copy, or take away copies of any contractor's records, documents, or reports related to the implementation of TVAN's or the contractor's TVAN approved FFD Program.

2.0 The contract officer shall notify the site plant access whenever a contractor employee becomes a supervisor. He shall also notify Corporate Nuclear Security of any contractor employee working on a TVA assignment who has violated a FFD policy.

3.0 The Contracts Administration Manager shall obtain written approval from Corporate Nuclear Security before allowing any contractor employee who has previously been denied access to or removed from work at any nuclear plant as a result of violations of any FFD program to perform work at TVAN work locations or report to an Emergency Response Center.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-1.2 PROGRAMS AND FITNESS FOR DUTY Date 11-30-1999 PROCESSES Page 30 of 30 CALL-IN FORM FOR UNSCHEDULED WORK Page 1 of I Date:

Duty Person Calling:

Department/Section:

TIME ALCOHOL FIT TIME NEEDED 5 HOURS FOR NAME OF PERSON CALLED TO PRIOR TO DUTY DUTY OFFICIAL COMMENTS CALLED REPORT REPORT (Y/N)

(YIN)

  • SSPP-1.2, Fitness for Dutysection 3.14, Call-in for Unscheduled Work, 3.14.1 .A.4, if the answer to the alcohol consumption question is "yes" then Nuclear Security on site should be notified and be requested to administer a saliva test to theemployee. This test must be administered as soon as the person arrives on site.

TVA 40774 11-1999] Page I of 1 SPP-1 2-1([11-30-19991

Handout to Applicant Unit 2 is in Mode 1 During a board walkdown, it is discovered that the RCIC flow controller indicates downscale.

Subsequent investigation reveals that the automatic function of the flow controller is failed, Determine the PER Level that should be manual function is still working. Using SPP 3.1, assigned.

Al.lb SRO ONLY In accordance with SPP 3.1 Determine the Condition Classification (PER Level) for the following condition. Procedure reference is allowed.

Unit 2 is in Mode 1 During a board walkdown, it is discovered that the RCIC flow controller indicates downscale.

Subsequent investigation reveals that the automatic function of the flow controller is failed, manual function is still working. Determine the PER Level that should be assigned.

Solution Classification is C since LCO is involved.

KA Generic 2.1.33 SRO-4.0

WVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 23 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 1 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA NOTE Appendix D provides guidelines for management consideration when assigning PER condition levels to aid in achieving consistency and ensuring appropriate actions and levels of review are assigned. Typical examples are provided for each classification level, but this list is not intended to be all inclusive. PERs may be classified at the discretion of management upon MRC review; PERs may be assigned classification as Level C or D based upon management judgment in allocating resources.

1.0 LEVEL A - SIGNIFICANT (USUALLY SAFETY RELATED) CONDITIONS - RCA Required A. A major safety-related or QA program condition that has occurred with a frequency as to indicate that past recurrence control has been lacking or ineffective.

B. Confirmed adverse trends in quality activities identified by trend analysis. These adverse trends would normally be associated with the administrative control programs and would represent a major breakdown.

C. A programmatic breakdown which negates quality controls or places doubt on the integrity of the affected program.

D. Repetitive or deliberate occurrences of procedural violations that have a direct and detrimental effect on safety or quality.

E. Conditions which impact the plant's ability to mitigate design basis accidents.

F. An adverse condition which merits increased upper management attention:

G. Falsification or unauthorized changes to quality assurance records (completed or in process).

H. Unplanned reactor/turbine trips as required by management.

1. A fatality or serious accident/incident.

J. NRC Performance Indicators (PI) associated with the revised "Reactor Oversight Process" that falls within the white, yellow or red band.

NOTE RCA is required.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 24 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 2 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA LEVEL A PER CONDITION EXAMPLES Nuclear Safety Personnel Safety Environmental Impact Economic/Operational Impact Emergency Plan declaration of Death Immediately reportable spills with Extensive equipment damage alert or higher. potential to harm environment. (e.g., required replacement or Major disability injury significant repairs to major equipment Fuel damage due to misoperation NPDES releases resulting in such as the turbine generator, reactor or mishandling. Serious near miss incident with significant threat to human health coolant pump, MFW pump).

potential for death or environment, PCB fire or Reactor trip explosion. Conditions resulting in significant power reductions, outage delays or Turbine trip PCB release - 1 lb. or more to extensions.

environment.

Event requiring use of safety Lengthy unplanned outage or operation systems. Atmospheric asbestos at significantly reduced power.

contamination.

Unusual plant transients Repeat failures of surveillance or post

- operator actions inhibited ACM removal without notification modification tests to detect non

- extraordinary actions required 260 linear ft. 160 sq ft. 35 cubic ft. conforming equipment or systems.

- inappropriate actions Leaking underground diesel fuel Repeat NRC notices of violations.

Significant operating/design tank or ancillary piping.

violations of Tech/Specs/FSAR, Repeat INPO findings.

e.g. Operate system with prohibited

- reactivity mismanagement refrigerant [>30 days & >35% leak Repeat Nuclear Assurance findings.

- inaccurate accident analyses rate (process equip) or >15% (pers comfort)]. Repeat occurrences of organizational Loss of entire safety function or programmatic breakdowns excluding momentary entry per Intentional dumping of hazwaste.

L.C.O,3.0.3 of low safety Repeat missed Tech Spec significance Surveillance requirements (unless missed surveillance requirement is a Unplanned radioactive release or result of a conditional Tech Spec action).

exposure to radioactive material greater than regulatory limits.

Numerous repetitive failures to Common cause failures that implement or maintain commitments to could affect multiple safety regulatory agencies.

systems/components.

Major safety-related or OA program No barriers remaining (only luck condition that has occurred with a frequency that indicates past averted an accident).

recurrence control has been lacking or Notices of Level 1,11,and Ill ineffective.

violations NRC PI and findings in the yellow or red band

__________________ I _________________ .1

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 25 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 3 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA 2.0 LEVEL B - ISSUES (SIGNIFICANT. IF RCA IS REQUIRED)

A. Identified conditions which do not meet the criteria of Level A but which require further evaluation.

B. Quality-related deficiencies which require identification of apparent cause and action to correct the condition in accordance with the Nuclear Quality Assurance Plan.

C. Human errors (inappropriate actions) which could have, under different circumstances, caused a significant plant event or serious personnel injury.

D. Responses to regulatory identified issues which did not result from a Level A event.

E. Recurring events not classified as significant which retain the potential for causing a plant event or personnel injury. That is, a negative trend which does not meet the above criteria of Level A, Section 1.0 (A), (B), and (D).

F. Events or conditions which require recurrence control or for NRC reportable issues requiring a formal written response. These include Licensee Event Reports, NRC cited violations, and audit findings. Other examples include adverse trends from plant process equipment history and failure trending on recurring plant process equipment problems.

NOTE Apparent cause is required and may require Root Cause Analysis as determined by Senior Management.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 26 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 4 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA LEVEL B PER CONDITION EXAMPLES Nuclear Safety Personnel Safety Environmental Impact EconomiclOperational Impact Emergency Plan declaration of Lost time accident. Repeated major failures such as Major equipment damage to pumps, spills of chems or oil, improper valves, or piping.

unusual event.

Serious near miss incident storage, failed secondary Fuel handling incidents with no (RCA required) containments, etc.. Conditions resulting in power reductions, forced outages or outage fuel damage. delays/extensions or Ž_one day.

Individual exceeds regulatory NPDES permit noncompliance.

Reactivity mismanagement that dose limits.

Stormwater permit exceeded. Unusual conditions such as damage by does not violate Tech Spec. High radiation areas not lightning, physical impact from other properly controlled. PCB spill/leak less than reportable. equipment, corrosion, flood, or other Inadvertent actuation of environmental conditions, safeguards equipment.

Violation of a stop work order. Exceed annual ACM permitted limit. Repeat events indicative of an Plant transients resulting in organizational or programmatic

Ž_10% power change due to BOP Multiple or other significant personnel contamination Improper storage or disposal of breakdown (e.g., design change control, failures. warehousing, adherence to procedures, instances. chems, solid waste or hazwaaste, etc.).

Events that exceed administrative guidelines concerning plant Significant violations of Other events resulting in state radiological control procedures. NOVs. Adverse safety trends (i.e., near misses, operations, reactivity minor injuries, etc.).

management, and radioactivity Venting Refrigerant Intentional is releases. Notices of violation requiring formal prohibited.

response.

Excessive quantities of Work by uncertified personnel on radioactive material found outside Significant INPO findings.

equipment containing prohibited the Radiation Controlled Area.

refrigerant.

Conditions detected by independent Loss or theft of Source or assessors that represent a significant Special Nuclear Material. Uncontrolled or unidentified hazwaste satellite storage area. organization or programmatic barrier breakdown.

Events or conditions requiring a formal response to the NRC with Failure of multiple administrative and/or the exception of special reports equipment protection barriers such that required by Tech Spec, FSAR, few or as little as one barrier remains.

etc.

Failed detection by surveillance or post Placement of maintenance testing or failed systems/components in administrative barriers with 2nd paragraph (a)(1) of the verification.

Maintenance Rule due to functional failures. A missed Tech Spec Surveillance requirement.

Placement of systems/components in paragraph (a)(1) of the Maintenance Rule due to exceeding Performance Criteria.

NRC PI and findings in the white band. I

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 27 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 5 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA 3.0 LEVEL C - ISSUES (Routine problems warranting additional corrective evaluation and action.)

A. Conditions which do not meet the criteria in Levels A or B but do identify a problem which warrants tracking to closure.

B. Conditions where structures, systems and components are degraded or nonconforming.

C. Conditions which identify a problem that requires issuance of a special report.

D. Human performance problem trends with little consequence and little potential to cause a plant event but require improvement.

E. An incident resulting in a recordable injury or which under different circumstances could have resulted in an injury.

F. Minor violations, non-cited violations, or NRC findings in the green band or has no color

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 28 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 6 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA LEVEL C PER CONDITION EXAMPLES Nuclear Safety Personnel Safety Environmental Impact Economic/Operational Impact A Balance of Plant (BOP) Radiation areas not properly Failure of tank containing oil or Minor equipment damage < $1OK.

transient that did not result in a posted. chemical to secondary

>10% perturbation to plant power containment but not the Small fires.

or did not challenge any Individual exceeds environment.

engineered safety features. administrative dose limits. Unavailable fire protection equipment.

NPDES permit criteria threatened Equipment failures/malfunctions Minor spills or spread of by a discharge. Maintenance rework items.

resulting in Tech Spec LCO radioactive material.

entry (with no loss of Stormwater best management Condition identified by management.

system/train safety function). Valve/system leaks resulting in practices not in use or maintained release of radioactivity/spread in good repair. Conditions detected by independent Component failure which does of contamination, assessors that do not represent a not result inthe loss of a train of Failure to maintain secondary significant organizational or a maintenance rule system. Uncontrolled water or containment for chemical/oil, programmatic barrier breakdown.

condensation inside the RCA.

Other conditions: Repeat cases of missing labels Failed administrative barrier or Radiation exposure in excess on drums issued or chemical significant equipment protection

- design qualification issues of that projected by the RWP. containers. (additional administrative or other

- procedure deficiencies protective barriers remain).

- personnel errors Personnel contamination Release of radioactive or

- violation of requirements events occurring from hazardous materials in excess of Violation of Administrative

- failure to follow procedure procedural violations or poor administrative limits. Requirements, e.g. Incorrect

- valves, switches, breakers radworker practice. procedures, drawings, etc. Adverse found in wrong positions trends in equipment, programmatic or

- radioactive material found Recordable injury/near miss human performance that do not directly outside the RCA incident challenge safety, regulatory compliance or reliability.

Minor violations, non-cited violations, or NRC or PI findings in the green band or has no color

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 29 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 7 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA 4.0 LEVEL D - ISSUES (RESOLVED/CLOSED AND TRENDED. Routine Problems which are adequately addressed by immediate actions or the work control Process. Used for documentation and trending)

A. Conditions which do not meet the criteria in Levels A, B, or C and immediate actions taken were sufficient to resolve the condition.

B. Conditions which do not affect operability, are not reportable, and are not potentially generic.

C. Conditions which do not involve ASME Section III hardware or processes (construction plants only).

D. Human performance problems of low importance but require documenting and trending.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 30 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 8 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA LEVEL D PER CONDITION EXAMPLES Nuclear Safety Personnel Safety Environmental Impact Economic/Operational Impact Minor conditions that can be Problems that are corrected Isolated spills of less than Immediately correctable minor equipment resolved by immediate action immediately: reportable quantities damage Examples include:

Minor personnel hazards Missing labels from drums or Small easily extinguished fires

- personnel errors that do not chem containers impact plant equipment Minor personnel contamination Immediately correctable inoperable incidents resulting from Stormwater best management equipment

- failure to follow minor procedural violations or poor practices failed but were administrative procedural radworker practices. promptly repaired. Minor condition identified by any employee requirements Missing/Inadequate Secondary

- fuse found blown during test containments for temp storage performance, fuse replaced and are promptly put into place checked Other minor violations of Env.

- WOs processed without Program.

properly annotating the "M&TE Used" field inthe computer Drawing Deviations

Tennessee TITLE SPP-3.1 Valley Authority Rev. 2 Page 1 of 49 TVAN STANDARD CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Quality Related 0 Yes [] No PROGRAMS AND PORC Required 0 Yes [I No PROCESSES 10CFR50.59 Review N Yes 0 No Effective Date 8/14/2000 RESPONSIBLE PEER TEAM: Business and Work Performance Organization CONCURRENCES Larry V. Parscale for D. Nelson 8-1-00

  • Primary Sponsor Date R. Purcell 8-4-2000 PeerTeam Mentor Date APPROVAL For Nuclear Assurance Sponsored SPPs R. J. Adney 8/7/00 General Manager,NA Date Karl W. Singer 8/9/00
  • Senior Vice President,Nuclear Operations Date
  • Site-specific changes are approved by Site Sponsor and Site Vice President (see PCF)

TVA 40480 [05-2000] Page 1 of 1 Orr-' - L - - I

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 2 of 49 REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 0 04/06/98 All Initial issue. Replaces STD-3.4, "Corrective Action Program". General restructure in order to enable the plants to have similar program.

1 7/15/99 2-27, 30, Further standardized the Corrective Action Program 32-35, 37-39 between TVAN sites and clarified statements.

2 8/14/00 2-45,47-49 Re-ordered Appendices; created new Appendices F and J; re-located pertinent sections from procedure body to Appendices; re-worded for clarity and usability.

Incorporated guidance from SPP-3.6 into new Appendix J.

Added template information to improve direction to user on which template to use in the electronic system for selective sections of the process. Added information on how generic reviews will be handled. Provided examples for each classification of a PER and added trend analysis guidelines.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 3 of 49 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 2 Section Title Page R e v is io n Lo g .............................................................................. I......................................................... 2 T a b le of C o nte nts ................................................................................................................................ 3 1 .0 P UR PO S E .............................................................................................................................. 5 2 .0 S C O P E ................................................................................................................................... 5 3 .0 INS T R UC T IO NS ..................................................................................................................... 5 3 .1 P E R In itia tio n .......................................................................................................................... 6 3 .2 S upe rv iso ry R ev iew ................................................................................................................ 7 3.3 Reportability and Operability Review ...................................................................................... 8 3.4 Management Review Committee (MRC) ................................................................................. 8 3.5 Corrective Action Plan Development and Approval ................................................................. 9 3.6 Extension Requests 12..............

12 3.7 Corrective Action Implementation ........................................................................................... 12 3 .8 P E R C lo s u re .................................................. .. ............ . 1................

12 3 .9 R e v isin g P E R s 13..............

13 3 .10 G e n e ric R e v ie w ........................................................................................................ ........... 13 3 .1 1 E s c a la tio n .......... 14..............

14 3 .12 T re nd A na lysis 14..............

14 3.13 Program Monitoring .................................................................................... 1........4......

14 4.0 RECORDS ............................................................. 15 QA Re co rd s ............................................................................. 1................

15 4 .1

.................................. .1......... ... 15 4 .2 N o n-Q A Re co rd s .................................................................

5 .0 DE F INITIO NS ......................................................................................................................... 15 APPENDIXES Appendix A Recognized Administrative Control Programs (ACP) .......................... ..... 18 Appendix B Inactive Unit PERs (BFN-1 and W BN-2) ...................................................... 19 Appendix C Guidelines for Potential Operability Determinations ........................................ 21 Appendix D Condition Classification Criteria ................................... 23 Appendix E Recommended Screening Criteria for Posting Operating Experience (OE)

Messages on Nuclear Network .................................... 31 Appendix F Controlling Nonconforming Materials, Parts, or Components .......................... 32 Appendix G Cause Determination and Corrective Action Development Guidelines ............ 33 Appendix H Resolution of Degraded and Nonconforming Conditions ............................ 36 Appendix I PER Closure ................................................................................................. 40 Appendix J Trend Analysis Guidelines 41.............

41 Appendix K PER Initiation ............................... 43

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 4 of 49 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 of 2 Section Title Page FORMS SPP-3.1-1 Problem Evaluation Report (PER) .................................................................. 44 S P P-3.1-2 E xtension R equest ......................................................................................... 49

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 5 of 49 1.0 PURPOSE This SPP describes the TVA Nuclear Corrective Action Program, and establishes the processes, requirements, and responsibilities for documenting and resolving problems, including adverse conditions.

The overall objectives of the Corrective Action Process are to:

"* Improve plant performance

"* Provide all employees with an effective method for raising issues with equipment, programs or processes that may affect safety, regulatory compliance, reliability, or human performance,

"* Assure that priorities and resources are properly aligned based on significance of the issue

  • Clarify and reinforce standards
  • Provide a means to collect data for trend analysis.

2.0 SCOPE The TVA Nuclear Corrective Action Program identifies and corrects problems. The program is designed to address problems in a manner consistent with the nature of the condition and its importance to plant safety, personnel safety or plant reliability. This SPP contains the detailed requirements for Problem Evaluation Reports (PERs) and applies to all TVA Nuclear and to non TVA Nuclear organizations involved in nuclear power activities.

Other Administrative Control Programs (ACPs) that report and disposition problems are recognized by the overall TVAN Corrective Action Program. A list of ACPs and pertinent requirements is included in Appendix A.

NOTE I PERs identifying problems with inactive units will be handled in accordance with Appendix B.

NOTE 2 Whenever "PER coordinator" is specified, the responsible organization's PER coordinator or designee is implied.

3.0 INSTRUCTIONS It is the responsibility of ALL PERSONNEL TO PROMPTLY DOCUMENT AND REPORT problems and adverse conditions for evaluation and corrective action.

PERs shall not be invalidated, destroyed, canceled, or otherwise prevented from receiving supervisory/management review once they are documented and assigned a number. All PERs shall be entered and tracked to closure in TROI/EMPAC.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 6 of 49 3.1 PER Initiation NOTE 1 PERs should be generated, processed, and tracked using the electronic EMPAC system (Appendix K). This does not prohibit the manual initiation of PER forms, however, information will, eventually be entered into the electronic system (when available at site) for processing. In addition, help text is available and can be utilized to aid in the electronic processing of the PER.

NOTE 2 Site PER conditions identified by offsite personnel should be initiated and processed by personnel assigned by the affected site (including Corporate).

A. Personnel shall promptly document problems including adverse conditions using the appropriate corrective action document. PERs shall be initiated for problems in any area of the site, for programs, processes, recurring or unexpected equipment issues, or human performance issues. If unsure of which document to use, document the condition on a PER form.

B. Any employee identifying a problem or adverse condition shall promptly notify the Shift Manager (SM) when the condition may affect:

1. The reliable operation of the plant which includes technical specification operability and the balance of plant features required for power generation.
2. The health or safety of employees or the public when it involves a significant safety incident/condition or a serious personal injury.
3. A significant radiological or security problem.

NOTE Appendix K may be used as necessary by the initiator to aid in PER initiation.

C. The initiator shall:

1. Describe the problem or adverse condition in clear, concise language.

Identify NAME of your immediate supervisor under the drop down field called "Planner/Supervisor." The final step performed before saving PER information is to select the department that you work for under the drop down field called "Department." Finally, save the information on the initiator's template.

2. Identify any notifications made or immediate actions taken on the PER.
3. Use paper forms if electronic system is unavailable.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 7 of 49

4. Promptly notify the supervisor for review of the PER.

3.2 Supervisory Review (Promptly, shall not exceed 3 working days from the initiation of PER).

NOTE When it is apparent that a condition is generically applicable to other TVAN sites or corporate, the affected site or corporate organization will be notified via EMPAC reports.

A. The supervisor shall:

1. Review the PER to determine if a problem/adverse condition exists.
2. Review the PER for clarity and completeness and to ensure that adequate information is available for subsequent management review.
3. Take immediate action if the condition described may affect the safety of personnel or plant equipment. Evaluate condition for potential operability using Appendix C and potential reportability using SPP-3.5, "Regulatory Reporting Requirements", then:
a. Provide prompt verbal notification of the condition to the Shift Manager (SM) of the affected unit.
b. Initiate and/or support the completion of any required immediate action(s).
4. Determine if PER condition potentially affects plant process equipment and notify Operations Shift Manager (SM) provided a WR/WO has not already been generated. If WR/WO has been generated, document in immediate actions section of the PER.
5. If immediate actions are required, initiate actions, and document the action(s) taken.
6. If the condition described is determined to not be a problem and no action is required, then disposition and/or document justification.

Recommend the PER be closed. PERs determined to be a non-PER condition should be discussed with the initiator. PERs determined to be more appropriately processed by an ACP may be processed by that ACP.

7. Recommend a classification for the PER condition level in accordance with Appendix D.
a. If the PER is recommended as Level A, B, or C, coordinate with responsible organizations, then continue to process.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 8 of 49

b. If the PER is classified as Level D then complete associated templates and any appropriate human performance template fields.
8. Mark if ASME hardware, processes, or programmatic problems are involved. This includes a violation of the Code. Identify the affected systems, and which unit is involved (ANI involvement is restricted to ASME Code driven requirements only).
9. For potential drawing deviations not utilizing SPP-9.8:
a. Perform a verification by confirming the potential drawing deviation condition is valid and that there is no ongoing work that would explain the differences.
b. Confirm affected documents are included and marked up to reflect the actual plant configuration.
c. Evaluate the condition against criteria for Level A and B PERs, take necessary actions.
d. If the condition is valid, sign the PER form. The supervisor signature documents second party verification that the condition is valid and that the enclosed marked up documents accurately reflect the plant configuration.
10. Ensure supervisor's template is completed.

3.3 Reportability and Operability Review A. Operations shall review (immediately, as required by plant Technical Specification) all PERs potentially affecting operability and shall document the operability determination and actions necessary to change plant operating mode on the Operation's template. Appendix C provides guidelines for potential operability determinations.

B. For PERs determined to affect operability, Operations shall document on the Operation's template. If operability potentially affects an offsite licensed site(s),

notification will be made electronically through EMPAC reporting system. Offsite Operation's staff will document their evaluation on the "PER L Reviews template" designated as operability review.

C. Operations and/or Licensing Manager shall take actions in accordance with SPP 3.5, "Regulatory Reporting Requirements" when PERs are determined reportable and document the reportability determination on the Operation's template.

3.4 Management Review Committee (MRC) (should not exceed three working days from the initiation of the PER)

A. The MRC shall:

1. Review and determine the classification level of the PER.

"WVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 9 of 49

2. Determine if a root cause analysis (RCA) is required.
3. Indicate if Nuclear Assurance (NA) approval is required.
4. Assign the responsible organization.

B. MRC should:

1. Review the potential operability and reportability determinations.
2. Determine any additional interim actions necessary.
3. Determine whether the events or conditions described by the PER should be reported to the Nuclear Industry by issuance of an INPO Nuclear Network OE Newsgroup entry. (Reference Appendix E).
4. Confirm if the PER should be reviewed by other TVA plants for operability and/or generic applicability.

3.5 Corrective Action Plan Development and Approval NOTE If during the course of the RCA, extent of condition, or development of corrective action plan, the condition is found to be more significant than initially reported, consideration should be given to returning the PER to Management Review Committee (MRC) for upgrading and re-evaluation of the operability and reportability determinations.

A. If applicable, immediately initiate control of nonconforming materials, parts, or components per Appendix F.

B. Twenty working days from MRC review of the PER is allowed for responsible organizations to develop and obtain approvals of corrective action plans. The time period allotted may be reduced to support licensing submittals. Up to five additional working days is allowed for NA to evaluate the Corrective Action Plan for PERs requiring NA approval. NA will review corrective actions for all audit findings.

1. Apparent cause determination is required for all PER Levels, unless Root Cause Analysis (RCA) is required.
2. corrective action plans may consist of corrective actions and/or enhancements.

NOTE The PER completion date is the long lead corrective action date.

C. The responsible organization shall perform the following for Level A and B:

1. Implement interim actions, if required, to control the situation prior to the development, approval, and implementation of the corrective action.

Consider evidence preservation of hardware and other data that may be needed for the RCA. Document interim actions in the PER.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 10 of 49

2. Perform RCA utilizing qualified individuals and a structured process for all Level A PERs, and for Level B PERs when requested by MRC.

Conclusions and basis of the RCA shall be part of the PER along with the RCA work sheets. (Reference BP-236, "Event Critique and Root Cause Analysis".) An individual is considered qualified if he has received training/re-training, or'has performed a root cause analysis within the last 36 months.

NOTE Refer to Appendix G for guidance in assignment of cause and corrective action.

3. Perform a review of previous similar events for the detection of corrective actions which should have prevented this problem. This review may consist of TROI/EMPAC/NERPEPIX/Maintenance History database searches and should include industry operating experience if applicable. The term "previous similar events" are conditions that involved the same root cause, failure, or sequence of events.
4. Identify an apparent cause for Level B PERs which do not require RCA.

Provide a description of why the event occurred.

5. Determine if the PER is potentially generic and document the determination and affected locations. The extent-of-condition analysis, generic review, and corrective action developed for a Corporate PER shall address all sites unless site-specific PERs have been initiated.
6. Perform an extent of condition review to bound the identified problem.

Investigate, as applicable, whether the identified condition affects other units, systems, components, documents, organizations, etc. The level of detail of this investigation should be consistent with the significance of the condition. If during extent of condition a wide spread problem is discovered, a root cause analysis (and consequently actions to prevent recurrence) shall be performed and returned to MRC for review.

7. Determine specific actions necessary to correct the condition and causes (Refer to Appendix G). For PERs which receive RCA, actions to prevent recurrence are required. When action is required by organizations other than the responsible organization, obtain concurrence with schedule dates.
8. Obtain MRC concurrence.
9. Complete Responsible Organization, Cause, CA/RC, and CAP Concurrence templates. As applicable, complete Human Performance (HP) template.

D. For Level C PERs, the responsible organization shall:

NOTE Refer to Appendix G for guidance in assignment of cause and corrective action.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 11 of 49

1. Determine and document the apparent cause and specific actions to be taken to correct the PER condition and an apparent cause(s), as applicable. Evaluations of lower-significant problems focus on correcting the immediate (or apparent) cause and may not address the root cause. For very simple problems, the cause may be obvious and does not need more rigorous ahalysis to determine corrective actions.

For other lower-significant problems, corrective actions may correct the immediate situation but not prevent recurrence. If similar problems occur, potential adverse performance and/or common causes will be identified through trend analysis.

2. Document any interim actions needed to control the condition until corrective action implementation. Provide schedule completion dates which have been coordinated with implementing organizations.
3. Determine if the PER is potentially generic.

E. For degraded or nonconforming conditions as defined in Section 5.0, annotate the PER as appropriate, and follow the requirements of Appendix H.

F. Coordinate PERs which potentially affect reactivity management with Reactor Engineering personnel. Refer to SPP-10.4, "Reactivity Management Program,"

for determining applicability.

G. If condition is a human performance condition, fill out the necessary fields on the HP template as applicable.

H. For approval of corrective action:

1. Managers of the action organizations approve the due dates for actions assigned to them.
2. Site VP or direct reports (e.g., Plant Manager, Engineering and Support Services Manager) approves Level A PERs.
3. Responsible Organization's Department Manager (e.g., Maintenance and Modifications Manager, Operations Manager) approves Level B PERs.
4. Responsible Organization's Supervisor approves Level C PERs.
5. NA approves audit findings PERs and PERs designated by NA or MRC.
6. Authorized Nuclear Inspector (ANI) reviews PERs involving American Society of Mechanical Engineering (ASME) section XI code-related equipment or activity as documented on the PER A Supervisor's template. The PER is provided by the responsible supervisor as a copy of original or by an automatic printout from the data base. Approval by ANI for corrective action plans is not required.
7. MRC as directed by management.
8. PER completion date is the long lead corrective action date.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 12 of 49 3.6 Extension Requests A. If the corrective action plan development, approval, or PER completion date cannot be completed by the due date, the responsible organization shall request an extension. Extension requests shall be approved consistent with levels of approval outlined in Section 3.5.H, and PERs updated accordingly.

B. The action organization shall coordinate extension to any CA/RC item date change with the responsible organization. Individual CA/RC item dates do not require extension requests. Only the CAP concurrence and PER completion dates required extension requests.

NOTE Extension of corrective action development may not be approved prior to the determination if interim actions are required. Justification should include an evaluation of why the proposed extension does not affect nuclear safety.

3.7 Corrective Action Implementation A. Responsible organization implements and/or monitors the implementation of the approved corrective action plan.

NOTE If new information is obtained indicating causes different than originally identified, consider the need for revision of corrective action and re-review operability and reportability determinations.

B. If a revision to the approved corrective action becomes necessary, the responsible organization shall initiate the revision and obtain the required approvals in accordance with Section 3.9.

3.8 PER Closure A. The action organization(s) ensures that any supporting documentation that provides evidence of completion of the corrective action is either attached or referenced on the original PER. If the documentation is not attached it must be readily retrievable. (Recommend electronically including all documents to support PER closure)

B. Responsible organization verifies completion of the PER corrective actions by the action organization using the guidelines of Appendix I and closes the PER by completing the verification template.

C. The responsible organization ensures that the Authorized Nuclear Inspection Agency (ANI, ANII, or ANIIS) review or acceptance is obtained, if the PER involves an American Society of Mechanical Engineer (ASME) Code-related program activity.

For ASME Section Xl program activities, the completion of the ANI fields on the verification templates signifies review and (when applicable) verification that the activity has been performed in accordance with the owner's repair program (SPP-9.1, "ASME Section XI").

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1I PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 13 of 49 D. Audit finding PERs and PERs identified as needing NA verification should be verified by NA within 10 working days.

E. The responsible organization shall ensure that all Level A PERs and those Level B PERs determined by MRC receive an effectiveness review after completion of corrective actions (do not wait to close PER if the only action left is the effectiveness review). The schedule for completion of this review shall be commensurate with the nature of the corrective actions and should not exceed one year following corrective action plan closure. The responsible organization shall enter their effectiveness review action item and completion date into a tracking data base. If corrective actions are determined to have been ineffective by the review, a new PER should be initiated and reference to the old PER and the old PER should be supplemented with a reference to the new PER.

F. The responsible organization completes verification and closure, then submits PER closure package to EDMS.

3.9 Revising PERs NOTE 1 Extensions approved in accordance with this SPP do not constitute a revision.

The responsible organization should coordinate date changes with those other organizations affected.

NOTE 2 The electronic process will provide history of changes as required by SPP-2.4.

A. When revising PERs, the action/responsible organization indicates the revised portions on the Revision, CA/RC and Supervisor's templates.

1. Obtain approvals required on the Revision and CA/RC templates for the sections of the PER affected by the revision. For revisions to the PER Description of Condition, the revised PER shall be processed the same as a new PER.

NOTE Personnel approving the revision must consider the need for reevaluating generic applicability, reportability, and effect on operability. If the need for reevaluation is identified, actions shall be assigned to ensure they are accomplished.

2. Obtains concurrence signatures from action organizations affected by the change.
3. Forwards the revised PER to the PER Coordinator.

3.10 Generic Review NOTE Generic applicability determination should be made as soon as the responsible organization receives the PER for corrective action development.

A. PERs determined to be potentially generically applicable are designated on the Responsible Organization template. The offsite PER L Reviews template shall be used to document offsite responses (both generic and operability reviews).

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 14 of 49 NOTE Corporate organizations may be specified to perform the generic reviews for issues associated with design criteria, design methods, selected major component groups, and multi site programs or programmatic issues.

B. The PER Coordinator of affected sites/brganizations obtains the PER for evaluation. Level C PERs are provided for information only, with response limited to acknowledgment. (Note that all fields on the generic template for the offsite organizations need to be addressed for all potential generic PERs).

C. Managers of the affected sites/organizations should evaluate the Level A or B PER within 20 working days of review of the EMPAC report, showing potential generic conditions, by their PER Coordinator.

1. If a generic condition is determined to exist, the identification number of the PER used to correct the condition is recorded on the affected organization's evaluation.
2. If a generic condition is determined not to exist, a justification is documented on the affected organization's evaluation.

NOTE Generic review issues may exist at BLN, but, because of the incomplete state of the project and programs, the issue will be tracked in TROI/EMPAC for future consideration as a generic applicability review item.

D. The originating PER Coordinator, verifies the affected organization's evaluations and checks the evaluations for consistency and apparent problems. If the check identifies any problems, initiate actions to ensure they are resolved.

3.11 Escalation The responsible organizations or NA may escalate PERs as needed.

3.12 Trend Analysis Appendix J provides guidelines for performing trend analysis to identify if potential adverse trends exist and to identify areas where improved performance can be achieved.

3.13 Program Monitoring A. Periodic self-assessments are scheduled and performed in accordance with SPP-1.6, MTVAN Self-Evaluation Program", to monitor program health and effectiveness.

B. Indicators are assigned to key program activities and are routinely reported to management.

C. Information concerning outstanding program key actions and age (backlog) is routinely reported to management.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 15 of 49 D. Effectiveness reviews are performed as required, and document what was reviewed, and provide evidence of corrective action effectiveness as documented in individual PERs. Evidence of ineffective corrective actions or inadequate recurrence control shall be reported to site management.

4.0 RECORDS 4.1 QA Records Problem Evaluation Reports - Template Information (with the exception of trend data),

Audit Trail Information, and Supporting Attachments.

Complete generic review packages 4.2 Non-QA Records None 5.0 DEFINITIONS Accept-As-Is - A hardware disposition which may be imposed for a nonconformance when it can be established that the discrepancy will result in no adverse condition and that the item under consideration will continue to meet all engineering functional requirements including performance, maintainability, fit and safety. Meeting all engineering functional requirements may not mean meeting all FSAR or configuration requirements. A design change may be required as a result of the accept-as-is disposition.

Adverse Conditions - Deficiencies including nonconforming material, parts, or components; failures; malfunctions; deviations; hardware problems involving noncompliance with licensing commitments, specifications, or drawing requirements; abnormal occurrences; and non-hardware problems such as failure to comply with the operating license, technical specifications, licensing commitments, procedures, instructions, or regulations.

Adverse Trend - An undesirable change in a quality indicator statistic of such magnitude as to require analysis of the information to ascertain if it requires management attention.

Apparent Cause - A problem or condition cause determination based on the evaluator's judgment and experience, and where reasonable effort is made to determine WHY the problem occurred. This might include fact finding, analysis, interviewing, benchmarking, reviewing data or maintenance history, or other methods as appropriate.

Degraded Condition (Generic Letter 91-18) - A condition of a system, structure or component (SSC) in which there has been any loss of quality or functional capability, within the scope defined in section 2.0 of Appendix H.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 16 of 49 Examples of degraded conditions are:

0 Heat exchanger fouling has reduced heat removal capability below the FSAR or design value.

  • Pump flow rate is below the value used in the FSAR analysis.

0 Valve stroke time is greater than listed in the FSAR.

NOTE All the above examples reference the FSAR, however, the intent and scope is further clarified in section 2.0 of Appendix H.

Drawing Deviation (DD) - is the method used to resolve differences between design output and the actual plant configuration. The plant is correct. The condition does not potentially affect reportability, operability, and is not potentially generic.

Enhancements - Within the scope of this procedure an action that is not required to be performed to satisfactorily correct or prevent recurrence of conditions adversely affecting regulatory compliance, plant reliability or personnel/nuclear safety.

Management Review Committee - A group of key managers designated to review PERs for legibility, clarity, completeness, whether it is an example of a previously identified adverse condition, and determination of responsible organization.

Near Miss - An incident which given different circumstances, could have resulted in an injury/illness or property damaged.

Nonconformances - A deficiency in characteristics, documentation, or procedures which renders the quality of a hardware item unacceptable or indeterminate. Examples of nonconformances include: physical defects, test failures, incorrect or inadequate documentation or deviation from prescribed manufacturing processing, inspection, or test procedures.

Nonconforming Condition (91-18) - A condition of an SSC in which there is failure to meet requirements or licensee commitments within the scope of Section 2.0 of Appendix H, such as:

1. There is failure to conform to one or more applicable codes or standards specified in the FSAR.
2. As-built equipment, or as-modified equipment, does not meet FSAR descriptions.
3. Operating experience or engineering reviews demonstrate a design inadequacy.
4. Documentation required by NRC requirements such as 10CFR50.49 is not available or deficient.

Operable - Operability - A system, subsystem, train, component, or device shall be operable or have operability when it is capable of performing its specified safety function(s). Implicit in this definition shall be the assumption that all necessary attendant instrumentation, controls, normal or emergency electrical power sources, cooling or seal water, lubrication or other auxiliary equipment that are required for the system, subsystem, train, component, or device to perform its specified safety function(s) are also capable of performing their related support function(s).

PER Coordinator - Individual within the various line organizations including NA that will be the primary contact within that organization, department, or group for coordination of actions for

'PERs and submitting necessary documentation for closure of PERs to EDMS.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 17 of 49 Repair - A hardware disposition which restores a nonconforming characteristic of an item to a condition such that the capability of an item to function reliably and safely is unimpaired even though the item still does not conform to design requirements.

Responsible Organization - The organization with lead responsibility for resolving a PER including developing the corrective action, determining potential generic applicability, implementing corrective action, and closing.

Rework - The process by which a nonconforming item is made to conform to a prior specified requirement by completion, re-machining, reassembling, or other corrective means.

Root Cause - The fundamental cause(s) and associated corrective action(s) that, if corrected, will prevent recurrence of an event or an adverse condition.

Scrap - A hardware disposition to discard the item in a controlled manner.

Serious Near Miss - A near miss incident with significant probability that a serious injury/illness or extensive property damage could have occurred.

Significant Problem - A condition or trend which meets the significance criteria as described in Appendix D.

Trend Analysis - A formal evaluation of data to determine the direction of movement in the course of time of a statistically detectable change. Also, trend analysis is the evaluation of data that has been compiled or grouped onto charts, diagrams, reports, or other formats such that the prevailing tendency of selected parameters can identify areas that need improving and areas of past successes. (Refer to Appendix J.)

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 18 of 49 APPENDIX A Page 1 of I RECOGNIZED ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL PROGRAMS (ACP)

In order to be recognized as an ACP by this procedure, the ACP must address the following issues:

"* A procedure must be established describing the ACP. I

"* Procedural guidance must be established for what conditions constitute a PER versus processing in accordance with the ACP procedure.

"* The tracking method (e.g. database) must be specified.

"* Trending of the problems (refer to Appendix J for additional guidance).

"* Supervisor review must be established to ensure PER thresholds are consistent.

ACP Program Maintenance Work Orders SPP-6.1, MMDP-1 (Equipment Failure Trending)

Drawing Deviations SPP-9.8 Safeguard Event Reports SPP-11.3 Receiving Unsatisfactory Reports SPP-4.2

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 19 of 49 APPENDIX B Page 1 of 2 INACTIVE UNIT PERS (BFN-1 and WBN-2) 1.0 PURPOSE This appendix establishes the minimum requirements and responsibilities for inactive PERs.

2.0 SCOPE The requirements of this appendix apply to PERs identified by this procedure and to conditions documented on currently open reporting documents tracked in the TROI/EMPAC system previously placed in a "hold status" (e.g., PERs) identified in previous revisions of the corrective action program.

3.0 DEFINITIONS Inactive unit PERs - PERs placed on inactive status when the activity has been deferred for an extended period of time.

4.0 RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Responsible Organization is responsible for:

1. Reviewing the open PER in accordance with Section 5.0 of this appendix to determine if the PER is to be processed through to closure or placed in inactive status.
2. Completing a continuation form providing justification and approvals for placing the PER in inactive status and forwarding a copy to the Tracking Organization.
3. Ensuring that the documentation package for the inactive unit PER is stored in accordance with this appendix.

B. The Tracking Organization is responsible for:

1. Updating TROI/EMPAC to reflect the status of the inactive unit PER.

5.0 REQUIREMENTS A. PERs, as a minimum, shall be processed through the following actions in accordance with this procedure prior to being placed in inactive status:

1. Management Review or applicable approval.
2. Determination of potential reportability.
3. Potential generic implications.
4. Assignment of trend codes and specification of apparent cause.
5. Determination of any interim actions necessary to control the issue during inactive status.

"WVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 20 of 49 APPENDIX B Page 2 of 2 INACTIVE UNIT PERS (BFN-1 and WBN-2)

B. PERs which impact the following activities should remain in active status:

1. Preservation
2. Layup
3. Security
4. Regulatory Requirements and Commitments
5. Nuclear Safety
6. Personnel Safety
7. Startup or operation of an active unit 6.0 RECORDS A. The original PER (for inactive status) shall be stored by the tracking organization and a copy submitted to EDMS.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 21 of 49 APPENDIX C Page 1 of 2 GUIDELINES FOR POTENTIAL OPERABILITY DETERMINATIONS 1.0 OPERABLE-OPERABILITY A. Without information to the contrary, once a component or system is established as operable, it is reasonable to assume that the component or system should continue to remain operable. However, whenever the ability of a Safety-Related/Technical Specification SSC to perform its specific function is called into question, operability must be determined from a detailed examination of the deficiency.

B. The determination of operability is to be made promptly, with a timeliness that is commensurate with the potential safety significance of the issue. In most cases, the operability determination can be made immediately (e.g., loss of motive power, etc.). In other cases when the determination takes engineering input/analysis, a preliminary determination should be made within approximately 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> of discovery even though complete information may not be available. Some cases may take longer. The Shift Manager shall set the due date for the final operability evaluation.

C. A system, subsystem, train, component, or device shall be operable or have operability when it is capable of performing its specified safety function. Implicit in this definition shall be the assumption that all necessary attendant instrumentation, controls, normal or emergency electrical power sources, cooling seal water, lubrication, or other auxiliary equipment that are required for the system, subsystem, train, component, or device to perform its specified safety function are also capable of performing their related support function D. Generally, to determine potential effect on operability is to ascertain if the condition described in the PER affects the operability of a system or component required by the technical specifications such that it cannot perform its function (Technical Requirements Manual, Offsite Dose Calculation Manual, Safe Shutdown Requirements of Fire Protection Plan, Technical Specifications, etc.). A clear conclusion is needed regarding whether the system or component will perform its safety function, or whether it will perform its safety function with limitations (state limits), or whether it will perform its safety function by taking credit for alternative functional capability, or whether it will not perform its safety function.

D. Design-related deficiencies are to be investigated through calculations, evaluation, communication with vendors, or other means to determine whether the deficiency renders the affected equipment inoperable.

E. Confirmed degradation, damage, failure, malfunction, or loss of plant equipment performed functions important to safety are conditions which may potentially affect unit operability.

F. Failure to follow or create standards to comply with Code of Federal Regulation 10 CFR 50, Appendix B or TVA criteria is not in itself a condition potentially affecting unit operability.

G. ASME Section Xl pumps and valves must be declared as potentially affecting operability when performance data fails in the required action range.

H. Safety-related and quality-related piping and pipe supports found to be degraded or nonconforming required classification as potentially affecting operability.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 22 of 49 APPENDIX C Page 2 of 2 GUIDELINES FOR POTENTIAL OPERABILITY DETERMINATIONS If the degraded condition of the SSC causes any loss of quality of functional capability, then evaluate whether system operability can be justified by taking credit for alternative functional capability (such as manual operation or diverse automatic operation).

Describe why the alternative, or limitations, do not create new or different concerns.

NOTE Where a limiting safety system setting is specified for a variable on which a safety limit has been placed, the setting is chosen so that the automatic protective action will correct the abnormal situation before a safety limit is exceeded. It is therefore, not appropriate to take credit for manual action in place of automatic action for protection of safety limits in considering equipment operable. The use of operator action to put the plant in a safe condition is always appropriate, but operator action cannot be used as a substitute for automatic safety limit protection unless the action has prior concurrence from the NRC.

J. The fact that an SSC is not fully qualified does not necessarily render the SSC unable to perform its intended function. Treat qualification and operability of SSCs separately to ensure that the primary focus is on nuclear safety. Returning the component to fully qualified status should be considered to be a corrective action for a nonconforming/degraded condition.

K. The use of probabilities (i.e., PSA) of the occurrence of accidents or external events shall not be used as the primary source for making operability assumptions. It may be used as supplemental data to support conclusions.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 23 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 1 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA NOTE Appendix D provides guidelines for management consideration when assigning PER condition levels to aid in achieving consistency and ensuring appropriate actions and levels of review are assigned. Typical examples are provided for each classification level, but this list is not intended to be all inclusive. PERs may be classified at the discretion of management upon MRC review; PERs may be assigned classification as Level C or D based upon management judgment in allocating resources.

1.0 LEVEL A - SIGNIFICANT (USUALLY SAFETY RELATED) CONDITIONS - RCA Required A. A major safety-related or QA program condition that has occurred with a frequency as to indicate that past recurrence control has been lacking or ineffective.

B. Confirmed adverse trends in quality activities identified by trend analysis. These adverse trends would normally be associated with the administrative control programs and would represent a major breakdown.

C. A programmatic breakdown which negates quality controls or places doubt on the integrity of the affected program.

D. Repetitive or deliberate occurrences of procedural violations that have a direct and detrimental effect on safety or quality.

E. Conditions which impact the plant's ability to mitigate design basis accidents.

F. An adverse condition which merits increased upper management attention:

G. Falsification or unauthorized changes to quality assurance records (completed or in process).

H. Unplanned reactor/turbine trips as required by management.

1. A fatality or serious accident/incident.

J. NRC Performance Indicators (PI) associated with the revised "Reactor Oversight Process" that falls within the white, yellow or red band.

NOTE RCA is required.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 24 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 2 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA LEVEL A PER CONDITION EXAMPLES Nuclear Safety Personnel Safety Environmental Impact Economic/Operational Impact Immediately reportable spills with I Extensive equipment damage Emergency Plan declaration of Death (e.g., required replacement or alert or higher. potential to harm environment.

Major disability injury significant repairs to major equipment Fuel damage due to misoperation NPDES releases resulting in such as the turbine generator, reactor Serious near miss incident with significant threat to human health coolant pump, MFW pump).

or mishandling.

potential for death or environment, PCB fire or explosion. Conditions resulting in significant Reactor trip power reductions, outage delays or PCB release - 1 lb. or more to extensions.

Turbine trip environment.

Lengthy unplanned outage or operation Event requiring use of safety at significantly reduced power.

systems. Atmospheric asbestos contamination.

Repeat failures of surveillance or post Unusual plant transients modification tests to detect non ACM removal without notification

- operator actions inhibited conforming equipment or systems.

260 linear ft. 160 sq ft. 35 cubic ft.

- extraordinary actions required

- inappropriate actions Repeat NRC notices of violations.

Leaking underground diesel fuel tank or ancillary piping.

Significant operating/design Repeat INPO findings.

violations of TechlSpecs/FSAR, e.g. Operate system with prohibited refrigerant [>30 days &>35% leak Repeat Nuclear Assurance findings.

- reactivity mismanagement

- inaccurate accident analyses rate (process equip) or >15% (pers comfort)]. Repeat occurrences of organizational Loss of entire safety function or programmatic breakdowns.

excluding momentary entry per Intentional dumping of hazwaste.

Repeat missed Tech Spec L.C.O.3.0.3 of low safety Surveillance requirements (unless significance missed surveillance requirement is a result of a conditional Tech Spec Unplanned radioactive release or action).

exposure to radioactive material greater than regulatory limits. Numerous repetitive failures to implement or maintain commitments to Common cause failures that regulatory agencies.

could affect multiple safety systems/components. Major safety-related or OA program condition that has occurred with a No barriers remaining (only luck frequency that indicates past averted an accident). recurrence control has been lacking or ineffective.

Notices of Level 1,11,and III violations NRC PI and findings in the yellow or red band j ________________________________________________________________________________

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 25 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 3 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA 2.0 LEVEL B - ISSUES (SIGNIFICANT, IF RCA IS REQUIRED)

A. Identified conditions which do not meet the criteria of Level A but which require further evaluation.

B. Quality-related deficiencies which require identification of apparent cause and action to correct the condition in accordance with the Nuclear Quality Assurance Plan.

C. Human errors (inappropriate actions) which could have, under different circumstances, caused a significant plant event or serious personnel injury.

D. Responses to regulatory identified issues which did not result from a Level A event.

E. Recurring events not classified as significant which retain the potential for causing a plant event or personnel injury. That is, a negative trend which does not meet the above criteria of Level A, Section 1.0 (A), (B), and (D).

F. Events or conditions which require recurrence control or for NRC reportable issues requiring a formal written response. These include Licensee Event Reports, NRC cited violations, and audit findings. Other examples include adverse trends from plant process equipment history and failure trending on recurring plant process equipment problems.

NOTE Apparent cause is required and may require Root Cause Analysis as determined by Senior Management.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROGRAMS AND PROCESSES Page 26 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 4 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA LEVEL B PER CONDITION EXAMPLES Nuclear Safety Personnel Safety Environmental Impact Economic/Operational Impact Keetdmjrriue

. .a..or una equimen naag o pumps, Emergency Plan declaration of Lost time accident. Repeated major failures such as Major equipmentgamage to pumps, valves, or piping, unusual event. spills of chems or oil, improper Serious near miss incident storage, failed secondary (RCA required) containments, etc.. Conditions resulting in power reductions, Fuel handling incidents with no forced outages or outage fuel damage. delays/extensions or Ž>one day.

Individual exceeds regulatory NPDES permit noncompliance.

Reactivity mismanagement that dose limits.

Stormwater permit exceeded. Unusual conditions such as damage by does not violate Tech Spec. lightning, physical impact from other High radiation areas not properly controlled. PCB spill/leak less than reportable. equipment, corrosion, flood, or other Inadvertent actuation of environmental conditions.

safeguards equipment.

Violation of a stop work order. Exceed annual ACM permitted Repeat events indicative of an Plant transients resulting in limit.

Multiple or other significant organizational or programmatic

Ž10% power change due to BOP breakdown (e.g., design change control, failures. personnel contamination Improper storage or disposal of instances. chems, solid waste or hazwaaste. warehousing, adherence to procedures, etc.).

Events that exceed administrative Other events resulting in state guidelines concerning plant Significant violations of radiological control procedures. Adverse safety trends (i.e., near misses, operations, reactivity NOVs. minor injuries, etc.).

management, and radioactivity releases. Venting Refrigerant Intentional is Notices of violation requiring formal prohibited.

response.

Excessive quantities of Work by uncertified personnel on radioactive material found outside Significant INPO findings.

equipment containing prohibited the Radiation Controlled Area. refrigerant.

Conditions detected by independent Loss or theft of Source or Uncontrolled or unidentified assessors that represent a significant Special Nuclear Material. organization or programmatic barrier hazwaste satellite storage area.

breakdown.

Events or conditions requiring a formal response to the NRC with Failure of multiple administrative and/or the exception of special reports equipment protection barriers such that required by Tech Spec, FSAR, few or as little as one barrier remains.

etc.

Failed detection by surveillance or post Placement of maintenance testing or failed systems/components in administrative barriers with 2nd paragraph (a)(1) of the verification.

Maintenance Rule due to functional failures. A missed Tech Spec Surveillance requirement.

Placement of systems/components in paragraph (a)(1) of the Maintenance Rule due to exceeding Performance Criteria.

NRC PI and findings in the white bnd.RI

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 27 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 5 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA 3.0 LEVEL C - ISSUES (Routine problems warranting additional corrective evaluation and action.)

A. Conditions which do not meet the criteria in Levels A or B but do identify a problem which warrants tracking to closure.

B. Conditions where structures, systems and components are degraded or nonconforming.

C. Conditions which identify a problem that requires issuance of a special report.

a plant D. Human performance problem trends with little consequence and little potential to cause event but require improvement.

E. An incident resulting in a recordable injury or which under different circumstances could have resulted in an injury.

color F. Minor violations, non-cited violations, or NRC findings in the green band or has no

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 28 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 6 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA LEVEL C PER CONDITION EXAMPLES Nuclear Safety Personnel Safety Environmental Impact EconomiclOperational Impact A Balance of Plant (BOP) Radiation areas not properly Failure of tank containing oil or Minor equipment damage < $1OK.

transient that did not result in a posted. chemical to secondary

>10% perturbation to plant power containment but not the Small fires.

or did not challenge any Individual exceeds environment.

engineered safety features, administrative dose limits. Unavailable fire protection equipment.

NPDES permit criteria threatened Equipment failures/malfunctions Minor spills or spread of by a discharge. Maintenance rework items.

resulting in Tech Spec LCO radioactive material.

entry (with no loss of Stormwater best management Condition identified by management.

system/train safety function). Valve/system leaks resulting in practices not in use or maintained "release of radioactivity/spread in good repair. Conditions detected by independent Component failure which does of contamination, assessors that do not represent a not result in the loss of a train of Failure to maintain secondary significant organizational or a maintenance rule system. Uncontrolled water or containment for chemical/oil, programmatic barrier breakdown.

condensation inside the RCA.

Other conditions: Repeat cases of missing labels Failed administrative barrier or Radiation exposure in excess on drums issued or chemical significant equipment protection

- design qualification issues of that projected by the RWP. containers. (additional administrative or other

- procedure deficiencies protective barriers remain).

- personnel errors Personnel contamination Release of radioactive or

- violation of requirements events occurring from hazardous materials in excess of Violation of Administrative

- failure to follow procedure procedural violations or poor administrative limits. Requirements, e g. Incorrect

- valves, switches, breakers radworker practice. procedures, drawings, etc. Adverse found in wrong positions trends in equipment, programmatic or

- radioactive material found Recordable injury/near miss human performance that do not directly outside the RCA incident challenge safety, regulatory compliance or reliability.

Minor violations , non-cited violations, or NRC or PI findings in the green band or has no color

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 29 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 7 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA 4.0 LEVEL D - ISSUES (RESOLVED/CLOSED AND TRENDED. Routine Problems which are adequately addressed by immediate actions or the work control process. Used for documentation and trending)

A. Conditions which do not meet the criteria in Levels A, B, or C and immediate actions taken were sufficient to resolve the condition.

B. Conditions which do not affect operability, are not reportable, and are not potentially generic.

C. Conditions which do not involve ASME Section III hardware or processes (construction plants only).

D. Human performance problems of low importance but require documenting and trending.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 30 of 49 APPENDIX D Page 8 of 8 CONDITION CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA LEVEL D PER CONDITION EXAMPLES Nuclear Safety Personnel Safety Environmental Impact Economic/Operational Impact Minor conditions that can be Problems that are corrected Isolated spills of less than Immediately correctable minor equipment resolved by immediate action immediately: reportable quantities damage Examples include:

Minor personnel hazards Missing labels from drums or Small easily extinguished fires

- personnel errors that do not chem containers impact plant equipment Minor personnel contamination Immediately correctable inoperable incidents resulting from Stormwater best management equipment

- failure to follow minor procedural violations or poor practices failed but were administrative procedural radworker practices, promptly repaired. Minor condition identified by any employee requirements Missing/Inadequate Secondary

- fuse found blown during test containments for temp storage performance, fuse replaced and are promptly put into place checked Other minor violations of Env.

- WOs processed Without Program.

properly annotating the "M&TE Used" field inthe computer Drawing Deviations

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 31 of 49 APPENDIX E Page 1 of a

RECOMMENDED SCREENING CRITERIA FOR POSTING OPERATING EXPERIENCE MESSAGES ON NUCLEAR NETWORK Consideration should be given to preparation of OE messages for events with the following elements:

1. Important to Nuclear, Public, and Personnel Safety a) events that could lead to serious degradation of operating safety margin b) events that affect core reactivity, core cooling, or decay heat removal c) significant personnel injuries or life-threatening situations d) events that exceed, or have a strong potential to exceed, administrative limits because of:

"* fission product barrier breaches

"* uncontrolled release of radioactive material

"* exposures significantly greater than planned

2. Importance to Generation Capability a) transients, including reactor scrams, main turbine trips, feedwater control problems, and other conditions b) equipment malfunctions or human errors c) major equipment damage d) frequent or extended outages
3. Events with Important Generic Implications a) deficiencies in areas such as design, analysis, testing, or procedures with potentially generic implications b) component failures with generic implications c) events involving discovery of information significantly different from what was assumed to be an industry norm d) unique solutions to know industry problems that could benefit other utilities e) transients that required extraordinary actions to terminate event though actual consequences were minor
4. Events for Which a Comprehensive Root Cause Investigation Was Performed and Lessons Learned Would be Beneficial for You to Know About if the Event had Occurred at Another Station

"WVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 32 of 49 APPENDIX F Page 1 of I CONTROLLING NONCONFORMING MATERIALS, PARTS, OR COMPONENTS A. The responsible organization shall determine the scope of thenon-installed, non-conforming item(s).

This determination shall include location, type, and quantity and shall initiate immediate control for the nonconforming items using one of the following:

1. Physical segregation, when possible, and marking of the item. Designated hold areas are the preferred method of control.
2. Tag, mark, or use a tracking program, such as: computerized statusing programs, applicable equipment printouts, outstanding work items list, and inspection or test cards to control the nonconforming item when impractical to segregate.
3. Document on the PER the method of control utilized.

NOTE Control of installed nonconforming items which do not affect Technical Specifications operability is by identification on the corrective action document. Items which affect Technical Specification operability are controlled by use of such mechanisms as limiting condition for operation (LCO) logs and clearances.

B. The responsible organization is responsible for release of items from nonconforming status and removal of tags upon satisfactory completion of corrective action.

C. Disposition actions for nonconforming items (i.e., final disposition) may be accept-as-is, rework, scrap, or repair. Technical justification of accept-as-is or repair shall be obtained from Site Engineering or, for nuclear fuel-related items, Nuclear Fuels. Reworked, repaired, and replaced items shall satisfy the original inspection and test requirements or acceptable alternatives. Guidance associated with the scope of hardware can be found in SPP-9.3, "Plant Modifications & Engineering Change Control."

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 33 of 49 APPENDIX G Page 1 of 3 CAUSE DETERMINATION AND CORRECTIVE ACTION DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES A. Testing Causes and Contributing Causes - Supervisors/Managers/other site personnel should test causes, and contributing causing codes for validity. The following criteria are conditions recognized as useful in validating cause.

1. The problem can be duplicated based on the suggested causes.
2. The problem would not have occurred had the causes not been present.
3. The problem will not recur due to the same causes if those causes are corrected or eliminated,
4. Correction or elimination of the causes will prevent occurrence of similar conditions.
5. Correction or elimination of the causes will restore failed barriers and reduce the likelihood of future barrier failures.
6. Correction or elimination of the causes will break the sequence of events illustrated by an Event and Causal Factor analysis if one was performed B. Developing Corrective Actions - Solutions to problems identified by cause, including root cause if required, should prevent recurrence or minimize the effects of recurrence and be within the control of management. The corrective actions should be identified for each corrective opportunity.
1. The following questions may be considered:
a. Do the corrective actions address all of the corrective opportunities?
b. What are the consequences (positive and negative) of implementing the corrective actions? (e.g. is a new hazard created?)
c. What are the consequences of not implementing the corrective actions?
d. Will training be required as part of the implementation?
e. In what time frame can the corrective actions reasonably be implemented?

(Consider impact on the plant of a repeat event.)

f. Are the parties responsible for corrective action properly identified and have they agreed to the recommended actions?
g. What impact will the development and implementation of the corrective actions have on other activities/work groups? Have these work groups been informed of the potential impacts?
h. Can the implementation of the corrective action be measured? (i.e. "Revise step 6.2 of the procedure to reflect the correct equipment location," is measurable; "Ensure the actions of procedure step 6.2 are performed correctly in the future," is not measurable.)
i. Do the corrective actions address identified generic implications?
j. Where a variety of possible corrective actions exist, the corrective actions should strike a balance among the resources required for implementation, the effectiveness of the corrective action, and the level of significance (risk) of the event or adverse trend?

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 34 of 49 APPENDIX G Page 2 of 3 CAUSE DETERMINATION AND CORRECTIVE ACTION DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES More Effective Less Effective Design or design change to reduce the hazard - Identify and accept assumed risk Install automatic safety devices Install automatic safety warnings or alarms Procedures or procedure changes Personnel (training, knowledge, etc.)

k. Causes identified during the evaluation which are acknowledged as assumed risks must be clearly identified and concurred with by the Responsible Manager?
1. When a root cause or contributing factor is determined to be due to faulty or missing vendor information, the corrective action should include contact with the vendor to obtain valid information?
m. When corrective actions resulting from a cause determination specify replacement of a safety related failed component with one of the same type, the cause determination should consider the potential for age related degradation such that the replacement component can be expected to perform its function reliability?

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROGRAMS AND Page 35 of 49 PROCESSES APPENDIX G Page 3 of 3 CAUSE DETERMINATION AND CORRECTIVE ACTION DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES

2. Potential corrective actions are provided in the Table below for Human Performance errors or issues (based on performance mode).

Performance Suggested Corrective Actions Mode Skill-based 1. Install blocking devices between similar controls.

1l El 2. Identify critical steps of a task to increase attention.

El 3. Increase supervision or include additional personnel to peer check critical steps of task.

El 4. Avoid multi-mode switches or controls.

El 5. Reread previous two/three steps of a procedure before proceeding with task, if distracted or interrupted.

0l 6. Improve planning to reduce distractions and interruptions.

El 7. Improve personal experience with the task.

El 8. Eliminate unnecessary time pressure through scheduling.

0 9. Rotate individuals through various jobs.

El 10. Practice using skills to maintain proficiency.

El 11. Simplify and standardize manual skills (skill of the craft).

El 12. Promote the value of peer checking and challenging.

El 13. Improve human factors identification and layout of controls.

El 14. Automate some tasks less suited for human beings.

El 15. Modify plant equipment to be insensitive to error; reversible.

Rule-based 16. Eliminate procedure inconsistencies.

El El 17. Simplify procedures to clarify criteria and purpose.

El 18. Eliminate drawing and technical manual errors.

El 19. Improve knowledge of procedure basis.

El 20. Practice using multiple, alternative indications.

El 21. Promote practice of verbalizing intentions.

El 22. Practice on transitions between procedures.

El 23. Eliminate unwise use of "rules of thumb" 0 24. Specialize on specific, safety-critical tasks.

ri

25. Improve human factors identification and layout of displays.

-4 El 26. Practice using methodical problem-solving techniques with novel, Knowledge-based unfamiliar situations.

El 27. Design displays to enhance use without keyboarding.

El 28. Practice using team and communication skills.

El 29. Assign role of devil's advocate.

30. Identify popular shortcuts prevalent in decision making.

0] 31. Use system/component knowledge and fundamental principles of physical sciences associated with plant systems and components in unfamiliar problem situations.

El 32. Train on and verify accuracy of system & social mental models.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 36 of 49 APPENDIX H Page 1 of 4 RESOLUTION OF DEGRADED AND NONCONFORMING CONDITIONS 1.0 PURPOSE This appendix establishes requirements for the resolution of degraded and nonconforming conditions as defined by Generic Letter 91-18, Revision 1.

2.0 SCOPE The requirements of this appendix apply to PERs identified by this SPP as degraded or nonconforming conditions affecting the following systems, structures, or components (SSC):

Safety-related SSCs, which are those relied upon to remain functional during and following design basis events (A) to ensure the integrity of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, (B) to ensure the capability to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition, or (C) to ensure the capability to prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents that could result in potential offsite consequences comparable to the 10 CFR Part 100 guidelines. Design basis events are defined the same as in 10 CFR 50,49(b)(1).

  • All SSCs whose failure could prevent satisfactory accomplishment of any of the required functions identified in A, B, and C above.
  • All SSCs relied on in the safety analyses or plant evaluations that are a part of the plant's current licensing basis. Such analyses and evaluations include those submitted to support license amendment requests, exemption requests, or relief requests, and those submitted to demonstrate compliance with the Commission's regulations such as fire protection (10CFR50.48), environmental qualification (10CFR50.49), pressurized thermal shock (10CFR50.61), anticipated transients without scram (10CFR50.62), and station blackout (10CFR50.63).
  • Any SSCs subject to 1 OCFR50, Appendix A, Criterion 1.
  • Any SSCs explicitly subject to facility Technical Specifications (TS).
  • Any SSCs subject to facility TS through the definition of operability (i.e., support SSCs outside TS).

Any SSCs described in the final safety analysis report (FSAR), that affect the functionality of a safety-related SSC that is relied upon to remain functional during and following design basis events and non safety-related SSCs whose failure challenges these safety related SSCs.

3.0 REQUIREMENTS A. Corrective action must be timely and commensurate with safety significance (effects on operability, significance of degradation) and by what is necessary to implement the corrective action. In addition, a high priority should be given to resolving those degraded or nonconforming conditions which require compensatory measures to support plant operations.

B. If a PER involving a degraded or nonconforming condition is not scheduled to be corrected within one cycle of operation, then an appropriate justification must be prepared to support the proposed schedule. The justification should consider the following items:

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 37 of 49 APPENDIX H Page 2 of 4 RESOLUTION OF DEGRADED AND NONCONFORMING CONDITIONS

1. The safety significance of the degraded or nonconforming condition affecting safety or quality-related equipment,
2. The impact of any required compensatory measures on plant operations,
3. The amount of time required for design, review, approval, or procurement for planned repairs or modifications,
4. Availability of specialized equipment needed to make the planned repairs or modifications, or
5. Outage planning and scheduling needs.

If the justification supports a resolution in the future (i.e., more than 1 cycle), it should be reverified once per cycle.

C. If the corrective action for a PER involving a degraded or nonconforming condition is extended past one cycle of operation, then the requirements of 3.0.3 above must be met and must be approved by the Site Vice President or designee.

D. If an interim compensatory action is taken to address the condition and the condition involves a degraded or nonconforming condition, follow the guidance of SPP-9.4 regarding 10CFR50.59 as required. The intent is to determine whether the compensatory action itself (not the degraded condition) impacts other aspects of the facility described in the SAR.

(

TVAN oANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 38 of 49 APPENDIX H Page 3 of 4 RESOLUTION OF DEGRADED AND NONCONFORMING CONDITIONS OPERABILITY DECISION INTERIM IDENTIFICATION PROMPT FOLLOW-UP ACTION DETERMINATION REPORTING CATEGORY OPERATION (Refer to AR, C (efer to SPP-3.5) i Determine reportability:

Identify degraded and nonconforming conditions adverse to safety or quality including failure of safety or I -p Assure public health and safety el e Or l 50.72, 5073, 50.9(b), technical specifications, Part 21, other safety support components or systems to:

- Meet requriements of regulations

- Conform to applicable codes and standards

- Satisfy licensing and/or If immediate threat place plant in safe condition OR I

design basis Not technical Make prompt determination of specifica t ion operability. Timeliness commensuratI with potential safety significance of the issue. I To next page AND Initiate corrective action plan to:

- Resolve condition adverse to Determine rep ort~ability as safety Not Operable [ above particularly 50.9(bs)

- Identify root cause

- Preclude repetition of condition adverse to quality Technical specification thOn yas aowed b follow LCO action c ense I codiion OR Obtain LCO or Contingent upon other relief NRC action

(

TVAN SIANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 39 of 49 APPENDIX H Page 4 of 4 RESOLUTION OF DEGRADED AND NONCONFORMING CONDITIONS DEFICIENCY RESOLUTION From Paoc.dtg Page LONG-TERM FOLLOW-UP (Refer to SPP-9.4)

YE Perform 50.59 for "As Found" condition vs. FSAR I

YNO NRC approval needed? NO > Implen Licensee will modify design bases from FSAR to a new position different than "As YES Found" condition O (Reef; to SPP-9 4) YE_ OtnLiesAmdet

4) YES Perform 50.59 for proposed design change vs. FSAR

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 40 of 49 APPENDIX I Page 1 of I PER CLOSURE NOTE Recommendation for closure with justification may be made at any point in the process with the appropriate approvals.

1. PERs involving hardware corrective action may be closed when field work is complete. The PER may be closed to a scheduled WO provided:

A. The PER and WRJWO are cross-referenced on each document, AND B. Documented justification for any subsequent cancellation of the WR/WO is approved by the organization responsible for the WR/WO and the department manager who approved the original PER corrective action plan.

NOTE Closure of PERs to open WOIWRs is at the discretion of senior site management.

NOTE Degraded/nonconforming conditions being addressed by a PER cannot be closed to a WRWO.

2. PERs not involving hardware which are to be resolved through issuance of new or revised procedures or design output documents may be closed when the affected procedures or design output documents have been approved, AND an acceptable date has been established and approved when full implementation shall be complete.
3. The PER may be closed if the only action remaining is an effectiveness review or enhancement that is to be performed at a future date, provided the action is tracked (TROI, etc.).
4. PERs to be dispositioned by scrapping the item may be closed when controls have been imposed to prevent the inadvertent use or installation of the item which is to be scrapped.
5. For corrective actions to be implemented by a WO, but for which there is a required due date, the PER corrective action will specify the due date and remain open until the corresponding WO is completed. For corrective actions to be implemented by a WO, but for which there is not a required due date, the PER corrective action and/or the PER may be closed to the WO provided the requirements of SPP-3.1 are met.

"TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 41 of 49 APPENDIX J Page 1 of 2 TREND ANALYSIS GUIDELINES 1.0 PROBLEM EVALUATION REPORT (PER) AND ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL PROGRAM (ACP) TRENDING 1.1 Tracking Adverse Conditions The responsible line organization manager shall ensure PERs are loaded in the TROI/EMPAC database and appropriate Human Performance trending information is entered on the PER B template for Level D PERs and PER F template for all other PERs dealing with Human Performance issues. Loading of problems in TROI/EMPAC from ACPs is at the option of the ACP organization manager. This procedure identifies those formal programs (ACPs) approved by TVAN to identify, analyze, and trend problems outside of the PER process.

1.2 ACP Trending A. The organization responsible for the ACP shall ensure the following are identified:

1. Data processing methodology (collection, coding, analysis, etc.),
2. Adverse trends, including what constitutes an adverse trend, and
3. Reporting methodology (type of report, distribution, frequency, as applicable).

B. If an adverse trend is confirmed (from either the ACPs or PERs), the ACP organization shall initiate a PER in accordance with this procedure.

1.3 PER Trending NOTE While it is the responsibility of the line organizations to perform their own appropriate PER trending in conjunction with information and analysis input from Performance Analysis, this section delineates the responsibilities associated with the Performance Analysis PER trending process.

Performance Analysis Manager/Designee A. Assign PER trend and cause codes on the trends template as applicable in the EMPAC database on an ongoing basis.

B. Assemble PER trend data on a quarterly basis (or as requested) utilizing an appropriate rolling interval to compare the data.

C. Organize the data in a manner for comparing the current period trend data with previous periods.

D. Analyze the data and identify potential adverse trends or trend-related issues requiring action.

E. Identify precursors to more significant issues before they become self-revealing.

"WVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 42 of 49 APPENDIX J Page 2 of 2 TREND ANALYSIS GUIDELINES F. Trend key programs, process/barrier activities, and others as appropriate.

G. Utilize causal codes for detailed analysis of apparent/root causes.

H. Notify the affected organization manager when potential adverse trends or trend related issues are identified. The affected organization manager is responsible for the development and implementation of appropriate corrective action to resolve validated trend related issues.

1. Issue a quarterly report (or as requested) to key site organizations which includes providing analysis, describing any detected trends, and substantiating data.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1I PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Rev. 2 PROCESSES Page 43 of 49 APPENDIX K Page 1 of I PER INITIATION PER I-nit....a......n _________ bypreparer J'IýWotkffidei New RH 13 Steps For PER Initiation:

After opening EMPAC, use the tab key to locate the following fields:

1. Problem Desc. - DO NOT ENTER IN WORK DESCRIPTION. This is the problem description.

Clearly describe the condition being reported.

2. Asset No. - Type in 356127 at Browns Ferry and Corporate, 350669 at Watts Bar, or 357160 at Sequoyah.
3. Action - This field defaults to Routine Maint.
4. Shutdown - This field defaults to undetermined.
5. Planner/Supvr - This is the initiator's supervisor.
6. Department - This is the Initiator's department.
7. Requested By - This is the initiator (Field is auto-populated).
8. Phone No - This is the initiator's telephone number (Field is auto-populated).

After completing the above fields, save the PER. A number will be automatically entered into the Work Order field. This is the PER number.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Date 08-14-2000 PROCESSES Page 44 of 49 PROBLEM EVALUATION REPORT (PER) o NRC IDENTIFIED o NA IDENTIFIED PER No.: REV.

[I NA APPROVALVERIFICATION REQUIRED 0 SELF-ASSESSMENT IDENTIFIED PART A: INITIATOR A.1 Description of Condition (What is wrong). If known, what requirements were not complied with, or what could be improved.

Include other pertinent information known. Also, include suggestions, if desired, A.2 Initiator Organization Ext. - Date PART B: SUPERVISOR B.1 Plant process equipment problems? 0 No [3 Yes; if not addressed by a WRNWO, notify SM, & document in Immediate Actions Taken (B.4)

Potentially Affects Operability? C] No 0 Yes notify SM SM: Operability affected? [3 No E0 Yes Potentially Reportable? 0 No 0 Yes notify SM SM: Reportable? [I No E0 Yes Insufficient Information? [I No 0 Yes If yes, see attached SM: Offsite Operability Review at licensed plants? 0 No 0 Yes If Yes, specify SM Signature/Date 8.2 ASME No Cl Yes E0 System numbers affected Units Affected 83 Recommendation/Classification:

C] No Action Required - Close PER, Provide basis:

C3 Process PER As Level (ABC, or D)

B.4 Immediate Actions Taken:

B,5 For D Level PERs: Cause Code INPO Area What organization caused the problem? - What process/procedure was involved?

Hardware disposition C] N/A [I Repair" [0 Accept As-Is*" [I Other 0 Rework 0l Scrap 86 Responsible organization if PER classified as Level C: coordinated with B.7 INITIATING SUPERVISOR Ext Date E.8 Additional Reviews As Required NOTE: For Level D PERs, - Forwardto PER Coordinator for closure.

PART C: RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION (For Level C PER)

C.I Control of nonconforming item? C] No E] Yes If yes, document the scope and send a copy to the organization controlling the item C,2 Hardware disposition [ N/A [I Repair- El Accept As-Is** 0 Rework El Scrap C Other C.3 Offsite generic review? E No C Yes If yes, copies sent to PER Coordinator at: [ BFN - BLN 0- SON C WBN I- CORP 0 All C.4 Causal Factor Code(s) Causing Organization INPO Area __

C.5 Affected Processes/Procedure(s)

C.6 Corrective Actions (See Continuation Page).

C.7 Potential Reactivity Management issue? e No C Yes; If Yes, obtain Reactor Engineering approval C.8 Degraded/Nonconforming condition? No QYes C]

APPROVAL CONCURRENCE C.9 Name (PtntType) Initial Date Name(PdnnType) Initial Date Preparer (Ext I Supervisor (Ext NA* ANI/ANII" PART D: CLOSURE (For Level C PERs)

Name (PrinType) Initial Date Venfication Name(PflntT e) Initial Date Verification Supervisor Ta s Removed' ANI/ANII' NA

'When applicable "*Needs NE justification Page I of 5 SPP-3 1-1 [08-14-20001 TVA 40210 [08-2000]

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Date 08-14-2000 PROCESSES Page 45 of 49 PROBLEM EVALUATION REPORT (PER)

PER No.:

REVISION:

PART E: MANAGEMENT REVIEW (For Level A & B PERs)

EA Disposition: Process PER as Level (NOTE - RCA is required for Level A's)

RCA required? 0l NO [0 Yes E.2 Interim Action Required? 0 No 0 Yes If yes, specify E.3 NA Approval of Corrective Action Required? 0 No []Yes E4 Assign Responsible Organization to:

E.5 MANAGEMENT REVIEW Date PART F: RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION (For Level A or B PERs)

F.1 Control of nonconforming item? C] No 0 Yes Ifyes, document the scope and send copy to the organization controlling the item.

F,2 Potential Reactivity management issue? C] No 0 Yes IfYes, obtain Reactor Engineering approval F.3 Offsite generic review? 0 No 0 Yes Ifyes, specify: C BFN 0 BLN 0 SON 0 WBN Cl CORP 0 All F.4 Hardware disposition [C N/A 0 Repair- 0] Accept-As-ls*" 0 Rework 0] Scrap EC Other

"*(RequiresEngineering Justification, Reference EDMS No.)

F5 0 LER F.6 Cause analysis 0 Apparent C3 Root Method F.7 Causing Factor Code(s) Causing Organization INPO Area F8 Affected Procedure(s)

F.9 Corrective Actions (include extent of condition, previous similar events, and recurrence control). Document on PER continuation form.

F 10 Degraded/Nonconforming condition? []No 0Yes Approval/Concurrence APPROVAL CONCURRENCE F.11 Name (PrintlType) Initial Date Name (Print/Type) Initial Date Preparer (Ext )

Supervisor (Ext _

Department Manager*(A&B)

Site Senior Manager (A)

Plant Manager *(A)

MRC(A & B)"

NA* (A&B)

Reactor Engineering* ANI/ANII*

PART G: CLOSURE (For Level A&B PERs)

Verification Name (PrintType) Initial Date Verification Name (Print/Type) Initial Date Supervisor Ta s Removed*

NA ANYI/ANII "When Applicable TVA 40210 [08-20001 Page 2 of 5 SPP-3 1-1 [08-14-2000]

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Date 08-14-2000 PROCESSES Page 46 of 49 PROBLEM EVALUATION REPORT (PER)

CONTINUATION FORM PER NO.:

REVISION:

PER CONTINUATION SPECIFY block number being continued Signature Date TVA 40210 [08-2000] Page 3 of 5 SPP-3 1-1 [08-14-20001

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Date 08-14-2000 PROCESSES Page 47 of 49 INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING PER FORM Fordetails/furtherrequirementssee body of procedure PART A: INITIATOR Identify and document problem or condition Identify and document any notifications made, or immediate action taken Sign as initiator

  • Forward to supervisor PART B: SUPERVISOR Review problem/condition description for accuracy/completeness
  • Determine if PER condition potentially affects plant equipment operability/reportable, if yes, then notify Operations SM provided WRIWO has not been generated. IfWRIWO has been generated, document in immediate actions section (B4 of PER form).

Identify unit and system affected and ASME applicability Identify if offsite operability review at licensed plants is required Determine appropriate PER classification (Level A, B, C, or D)

Document any notifications made or immediate actions taken If "A"or "B" - Sign Block B.7

- Forward to MR If "C" - Assign responsible organization and coordinate with organization responsible for corrective action

- Sign Block B.7 (Note RO is same as initiating organization then completion of this block is not required)

- Forward to PER Coordinator if other organization is responsible for corrective action development If"D" - Identify causal factor and causing organization (if known), and affected procedure(s) (procedure associated with activity resulting in problem/condition)

- Sign Block B,7 if immediate actions taken were sufficient to resolve the condition and no other corrective action is required, PART C: RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION (IfPER classified Level C)

Address hardware issues (if any), C.1 & C.2 Address off-site generic review, C.3 Identify casual factor code and INPO area code, and causing organization (if known)

Identify affected procedure(s) (procedure associated with activity resulting in problem/condition)

Identify the interim corrective actions if required Identify corrective action(s) and specify completion date for each action

  • Coordinate PERs which potentially affect reactivity management with Reactor Engineering
  • Determine if the PER involves a Degraded or Nonconforming Condition
  • Complete C.9 as preparer.

Obtain supervisor review Obtain required review/approvals when applicable (NA, Site Engineering, ANI)

Submit to Business and Work Performance (B&WP) only a copy of the closure form with required signatures and transmittal showing EDMS number to close TROI item.

PART D: CLOSURE (Level C)

Responsible/Action Organization Supervisor Responsible organization supervisor verifies completion of PER corrective actions and signs PER form as applicable (not applicable for level D)

Ensure ANI/ANII review and NA and/or acceptance is obtained, when applicable

  • Ensure that all documentation is included for all actions as applicable from action organization(s)

PERs generated prior to electronic process, the RO forwards package to EDMS and form to B&WP with EDMS sheet with number indicating closure

  • For electronic PERs, the RO will transmit closure packages TVA 40210 (08-2000] Page 4 of 5 SPP-3 1-1 [08-14-20001

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Date 08-14-2000 PROCESSES Page 48 of 49 INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING PER FORM For details/furtherrequirements see body of procedure PART E: MANAGEMENT REVIEW (Level A & Level B PERs)

To be completed by Management Reviewer or from Management Review Committee (MRC) decisions Validate classification (Level A, B, or C)

IIdentify if RCA is required for Level B Identify any interim actions required Identify if NA approval required Assign responsible organization MRC representative or the Management Reviewer signs E.5 PART F: RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION (If PER classified Level A or Level B)

Address items F.1-F.5 Identify root cause or apparent cause (RCA required for Level A and as identified for Level B, if RCA required, identity method used)

Identity causal factor code, INPO area code, and causing organization

  • Identify affected procedure(s) (procedure associated with activity resulting in a problem/condition)

Corrective Action Plan The Corrective action plan for all A&B PERs shall include the following information:

I An Extent of Condition Evaluation including the following information:

I1. Apparent Cause(s) or Root Cause(s) (required for Level A and when applicable for Level B)

IlL Previous similar events review IV, Interim corrective action, if required V. Corrective actions (annotate if actions are for enhancement)

Specify organization responsible for each corrective action

  • Identify corrective action(s) and specify completion date for each action Determine if the PER involves a Degraded or Nonconforming Condition Obtain required review/approvals (F.11)

Forward a copy of signed closure form to B&WP to close TROI actions for non-electronic PERs and responsible organization send PER closure package to EMDS.

For electronic PERs, the RO will transmit closure packages or NA if they require final review PART G: CLOSURE (Level A and B PERs)

Responsible/Action Organization Supervisor Ensure ANI/ANII a review and NA or acceptance is obtained, when applicable.

Verifies completion of PER corrective actions and signs PER form as applicable.

Ensure that all documentation is included for all actions as applicable from action organization(s)

Forward a copy of signed closure form to B&WP to close TROI actions with EDMS transmittal sheet for non-electronic PERs and RO organization send PER closure package to EMOS.

For electronic PERs, the RO will transmit closure packages.

TVA 40210 [08-2000] Page 5 of 5 SPP-3 1-1 [08-14-20001

TVAN STANDARD SPP-3.1 PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PROGRAM Date 08-14-2000 PROCESSES Page 49 of 49 EXTENSION REQUEST FORM PER No. Level Rev. TROI/EMPAC Sequence # No. of Extension(s) to Date:

Original Completion Date: Current Completion Date: Requested Completion Date:

Description of Actions:

Justification for Extension: (should Include the reason why the extension will not adversely impact nuclear safety)

Ensure extension does not impact other actions in PER nor impact overall completion date. If yes, coordinate and get concurrence with all responsibility managers. Provide completion date REQUIRED MANAGEMENT APPROVALS For Level A or Level B PERs:

1 The Resp. Organization's Depart. Mgr. (that is direct report to: Plant Manager, Engineering and Support Manager (Note at SON Engineering and Support Services Manager)

2. The Resp. Organization's Site Senior Manager (that is direct report to Site V.P.).
3. NA approval for audit finding and NA designated PERs For Level C PERs:
1. The Resp. Organization's supervisor (e.g., Maintenance supervisor, Operations Shift Manger, etc.)
2. NA approval for NA designated PERs For Degraded or Nonconforming Conditions Ifthe corrective action for a PER involving a degraded or nonconforming condition is extended past one cycle of operation, then the requirements for completini a justification must be met and must be approved by the Site Vice President or designee.

NAME (Print/type) INITIAL DATE Submitted by: (Ext. _

Department Manager Site Senior Manager (Level A)

NA Manager Organization Supervisor Routine: (1) Return original to responsible organization for inclusion in PER Package.

Responsible Organization - update TROi / EMPAC.

TVA 40606 [08-20001 Page 1 of 1 SPP-3.1-2 [08-14-2000]

Valve Position Verification BFN The objective of the JPM is to demonstrate the verification requirements/techniques for manually operated valves. The mockup of the refrigeration unit at the BFN Training Center will be used. The valves (4 total) will be positioned prior the start of the JPM at specified below. The applicant will be given a task to Independently Verify all the valves on the checklist sheet. Two of the valves can be independently verified, however, two cannot be independently verified. The valves that cannot be Independently Verified, when identified, will require second party verification.

Equipment Needed Mockup in mechanical maintenance area of BFTVC shop.

Locking Tabs, minimum of two.

Valve Locking Chain.

SETUP POSITION THE FOLLOWING VALVES AS SPECIFIED.

4T-SHV-066-0019A CONDENSER A OUTLET OPEN 4T-SHV-066-0016A CONDENSER A INLET CLOSED 4T-SHV-066-001 SUCTION ISOLATION LOCKED OPEN 4T-SHV-066-003A CIRC A PUMP OUTLET THROTTLED 3 TURNS OPEN Initial Conditions and Initiating Cue Provide initial condition and initiating cue from following page along with Attachment 1.

Note: Student may recognize that two of the four valves cannot be Independently Verified, if so, then ask how these valves must be verified. Once he/she recognizes that 2 nd party verification is the technique, then state, I will act as your 2nd party verifier but you must explain, in detail, my roll in 2fd party verification.

INITIAL CONDITIONS AND INITIATING CUE:

You are an Operator, the refrigeration unit in the maintenance shop is being lined up for service. The Unit Supervisor has directed you to perform Independent Verification of manual valves per Attachment 1 and notify him when complete.

Evaluation Steps Evaluator Copy Pravido'$jceletAfttacmen $1ud requ* 1neidn V fs00 n lse ~e*

Step 1 Independent Verification of valve, 4T-SHV-066-0019A, Condenser A Outlet, OPEN.

Standard:

Locate valve and turn hand-wheel in close (clockwise)direction, notes freedom of movement, then returns valve to fully open position by turning hand-wheel in the counterclockwise direction to end of travel.

SAT UNSAT Comments:

Step 2 Independent Verification of valve, 4T-SHV-066-0016A, Condenser A Inlet, CLOSED.

Standard:

Locate valve and turn hand-wheel in close (clockwise) direction, notes lack of hand wheel movement and concludes valve in CLOSED position SAT UNSAT Comments:

Stec 3 (this step has two oarts)

Independent Verification of valve, 4T-SHV-066-001, Suction Isolation, LOCKED OPEN.

Standard:

Determines valve cannot be Independently Verified LOCKED OPEN SAT UNSAT When. student deternnines that Independent'Veiificaflon cannot be done on a locKed open 90valv, ten: STATE,: I WAIl ectnyourseconcl ety "vofim d#O .manflm how, secondparty verificationwill bellaccomplsedlonthis valve.PleY exin in4h detail urnf Iwil provid4 an~lstance a$ aske44v Standard:

Explains the method of second party verification, i.e., both parties must agree on the valve and required position, break locking tab, position checked as in step 1, then locking tab is reapplied.

SAT UNSAT Comments:

SteD 4 (this step has two parts)

Independent Verification of valve, 4T-SHV-066-003A, Circ A Pump Outlet, THROTTLED 3 TURNS OPEN.

Standard:

Determines valve cannot be Independently Verified as THROTTLED, 3 TURNS OPEN.

SAT UNSAT When student doet~rines that. Independent Veriftation cantnot be .done-an a throttled valve, then STATE, I will act as your second porgy verifie demonstrate how second party Ivrition will be accomplished on this yetO., Ples explain In deteUl and/Iwillprovide assistance when asked.:

Standard:

Demonstrates second party verification, i.e., both parties must agree on the valve and required position, close valve fully by rotating in the clockwise direction until fully closed, then counts turns as opening to achieve 3 turns open.

SAT UNSAT Comments:

(

ATTACHMENT 1 REFRIGERATION UNIT MANUAL VALVE VERIFICATION CHECKLIST Valve ID Number Noun Name Required Position 1st -2nd IV 4T-SHV-066-0019A CONDENSER A OUTLET OPEN 4T-SHV-066-0016A CONDENSER A INLET CLOSED 4T-SHV-066-001 SUCTION ISOLATION LOCKED OPEN RSX 4T-SHV-066-003A CIRC A PUMP OUTLET THROTTLED 3 TURNS OPEN

Tennessee TITLE SPP-10.3 Valley Authority Rev. 0 Page I of 12 TVAN STANDARD VERIFICATION PROGRAM Quality Related Z Yes C No PROGRAMS AND PORC Required Z Yes El No PROCESSES 10CFR5059 Review Z Yes El No Effective Date 6/30/99 (COC & WBN) 7/2/99 BFN YSO LAE&R SQN 813/99 8/6/99 RESPONSIBLE PEER TEAM: OPERATIONS Organization APPROVALS Gilbert Little 3/23/98

  • PrimarySponsor Date For Nuclear Assurance Sponsored SPPs N/A N/A GeneralManager,NA Date J. A. Scalice 5/20/98
  • SeniorVice President,Nuclear Operations Date "Site-specific changes are approved by Site Sponsor and Site Vice President (see PCF)

TVA 40480 [12-97] Page 1 of 1 SPP-2.1-1 (12-01-971

TVAN STANDARD SPP-10.3 PROGRAMSAND VERIFICATION PROGRAM Rev. 0 PROCESSES Page 2 of 12 REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 0 6/30/99 All Initial issue. This procedure replaces STD-12.6 (Corp.),

(COC & WBN) SSP-12.6 (BFN & SQN), and SSP-12.06 (WBN).

7/2/99 BFN "YSO ILATER SQN 813/99 8/6/99

TVAN STANDARD SPP-10.3 PROGRAMS AND VERIFICATION PROGRAM Rev. 0 PROCESSES Page 3 of 12 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page R e vis ion Lo g ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................. 3 1.0 PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................... 4 2 .0 S C O PE .................................................................................................................................... 4 3.0 INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................................................................... 4 3.1 Responsibilities ....................................................................................................................... 4 3.2 Qualifications .................... ................... .................. ... ..... ....... .................. .................. 6 3.3 Verification Techniques ..................................................................................................... 6 3.4 Verification Requirem ents .................................................................................................... 7 4.0 RECORDS .............................................................................................................................. 9 4.1 QA Records ............................................................................................................................ 9 4.2 Non-QA Records ...................................................................................................................... 9 5.0 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................ 10 APPENDIXES Appendix A - Systems and Components Requiring Independent or Second-Party Verification ...................................................................... 11

TVAN STANDARD SPP-10.3 PROGRAMS AND VERIFICATION PROGRAM Rev. 0 PROCESSES Page 4 of 12 1.0 PURPOSE This procedure establishes the requirements for and the criteria used to determine the applicable verification method. The methods of verification are independent (IV)and second-party verification. For the purposes of this procedure and associated procedures/instructions, the term second-party verification is considered synonymous with concurrent verification (CV).

2.0 SCOPE This procedure applies to all TVA Nuclear (TVAN) personnel and contractors performing activities affecting nuclear power plant systems. Self-checking techniques should be utilized to ensure the worker positively identifies the correct unit, train, and/or component, and reviews the intended action and expected response before performing the task.

This procedure does not apply to activities performed by the Quality organization or design verification activities.

3.0 INSTRUCTIONS 3.1 Responsibilities Operations Manager A. The Operations Manager is responsible for the following:

1. Determining the verification method required and designating those systems and/or components requiring IV or second-party verification.

Appendix A provides the list of systems and components requiring IV or second-party verification.

2. Resolving disagreements between plant sections and making the final decision regarding the method of verification required.

Responsible Manager B. The responsible manager is responsible for the following:

1. Designating IV or second-party verification requirements in appropriate plant procedures/instructions and work documents.
2. Ensuring that plant procedures/instructions and work documents specify IV or second-party verification when required.
3. Ensuring that personnel assigned to perform IV and second-party verifications are qualified.

Procedure Preparers C. The preparers of site procedures/instructions and work documents are responsible for the following:

1. Ensuring that IV or second-party verification requirements are specified as appropriate.
2. Ensuring the type of verification is clearly identified.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-10.3 PROGRAMS AND VERIFICATION PROGRAM Rev. 0 PROCESSES Page 5 of 12 Independent Verifier NOTE To ensure the integrity of the IV process, do not rely on the observed actions of the individual performing the initial alignment, installation, position, or condition.

D. The independent verifier shall ensure:

1. The actual component identification matches the identification of the component required to be verified.
2. The component's actual position/condition matches the component's required position/condition.
3. Completion of documentation that an IV occurred.
4. The respective foreman or supervisor is immediately notified if a discrepancy is discovered during the performance of verification.

Second-Party Verifier E. The second-party verifier shall ensure:

1. The actual component identification matches the identification of the component required to be verified.
2. Agreement is reached with the performer that the activity/manipulation to be performed is correct before initiation.
3. The component's actual position/condition matches the component's required position/condition after the activity/manipulation has been performed.
4. Completion of documentation that a second-party verification occurred.

F. Shift Manager The shift manager (SM) shall be responsible for the following:

1. Determining the corrective actions to be taken when discrepancies are discovered.
2. Ensuring that personnel assigned to perform IV and second-party verification are qualified.
3. Authorizing deviations from normal verification practices if needed.

G. Training Manager Develop, conduct, and document training of personnel engaged in verification activities.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-110.3 PROGRAMS AND VERIFICATION PROGRAM Rev. 0 PROCESSES Page 6 of 12 H. All Personnel Inform their respective foreman or supervisor if they have been assigned a verification which they do not feel qualified to perform. In the event their respective supervisor is not available, they will contact the SM for resolution before continuing the verification.

3.2 Qualifications Individuals assigned IV or second-party verification responsibilities shall meet the following qualification requirements:

A. Technically qualified to perform the assigned task (experience, position description, familiarity with the task, etc., should be considered) as determined by the responsible manager.

B. Completed training on verification program requirements.

3.3 Verification Techniques 3.3.1 Valves A. Valves that are to be verified open will be manipulated in the closed direction only as necessary to remove any slack from the operating mechanism and verify valve stem movement. The valve will then be fully opened, subject to normal precautions on backseating valves.

B. Valves that are to be verified closed will be manipulated in the closed direction only as necessary to verify the valve is fully closed, and not binding or difficult to operate. Care must be exercised, however, to avoid overtorquing the valve operator and damaging the valve seat. If any doubt exists, SM should be contacted for resolution.

C. To determine the position of a throttled valve, the total number of turns until the handwheel stops moving in the open/closed direction shall be counted. To set the position of a throttled valve, open/close the valve the required number of turns from the full closed/open position (handwheel will no longer move in the closed/open direction).

D. Reach rod valve position indicators will not be used as the sole method of position verification.

E. Locked valve and throttled valve position cannot be independently verified since these operations require the verifier to observe actions while they are being performed. Second-party verification shall be used to verify the position of locked and throttled valves in those cases where IV would normally be required.

LiSINOiIJ Locked Valve verification may be accomplished using Independent Verification in accordance with approved site procedures until the necessary revisions can be made to applicable site procedures.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-10.3 PROGRAMS AND VERIFICATION PROGRAM Rev. 0 PROCESSES Page 7 of 12 3.3.2 Alternate Verification Techniques Alternate verification techniques may be used by the verifier where specified by approved procedures, valve and breaker line-up checklists, or at the discretion of shift supervisory personnel. Examples include the following:

A. Use of remote position indicators. (Indicating lights in the control room, at the switchgear, or at local controls are the normal method of determining motor-operated and air-operated valve position.)

B. Use of process parameters (e.g., pressure, flow, vibration, current, voltage, potential lamps, etc.).

C. Observation of the valve stem to aid in determination of valve position if the valve stem is marked by paint (when fully closed) or other positive verification methods.

D. Authorized scribe marks on valve stems, properly labeled with the throttled position.

E. Functional mechanical position indicators.

F. A post maintenance/modification functional test provided the testing verifies each component under consideration.

3.3.3 Circuit Breakers Circuit breaker verification will include a local inspection of the breaker, control power switches or fuses, and other equipment as outlined below:

A. To verify a breaker is removed from service, the independent or second party verifier will ensure control power is isolated (if required) by inspecting appropriate switches, fuses or fuse blocks, and ensure the breaker is racked out to the disconnected position, as applicable.

B. To verify a breaker is restored to service, the independent or second party verifier will ensure control power is energized by inspecting appropriate switches, indicating lights, fuses or fuse blocks, and will ensure the breaker is fully racked in with closing springs charged as applicable. Where practical, the end device should be operated following the reinstallation of a breaker. The verifier will also ensure the cubicle door is in good condition with all fasteners tight.

3.4 Verification Requirements When determination of these requirements is not clear, the responsible manager will designate the requirements. If there is disagreement, the operations manager will designate the requirements.

3.4.1 IV or second-party verification is required for those systems listed in Appendix A and shall include the following as a minimum:

A. All valves, breakers, and other components in safety-related systems where an inappropriate positioning could adversely affect system/plant operation or containment integrity.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-110.3 PROGRAMS AND VERIFICATION PROGRAM Rev. 0 PROCESSES Page 8 of 12 B. All valves, breakers, and other components in fire protection system major flow paths, including fire fighting water supply and storage, carbon dioxide storage systems, fire protection systems, and all components necessary for the system to function and supply extinguishing media to the fire.

C. All valves, breakers, and other components in gaseous and liquid radioactive waste handling and processing systems where an inappropriate positioning could result in radioactive material release to the environment.

3.4.2 Activities Exempt From Independent and Second-Party Verification Requirements A. Calculations performed by qualified computer software.

B. Activities for which verifications would be required and one or more of the following conditions exist:

Out-of-service systems/channels/components for which configuration control will not be maintained and will be verified to be in the proper configuration during the return to operable status.

Activities involving significant radiation exposure. As a guideline, an exposure greater than 10 mrem TEDE to perform the verification would be considered excessive.

Activities occurring during emergency conditions (imminent danger to plant or personnel) requiring rapid personnel action.

  • Activities that could jeopardize personnel safety.

Components located within locked/covered/controlled access areas provided access to the area has not occurred since the last documented verification.

For these instances, the decision not to perform a verification is to be documented on the procedure/instruction or work document.

3.4.3 Independent Verification Requirements IV is used to confirm that an activity or condition has been implemented in conformance with specified requirements. The individual performing the IV must physically check the condition without relying on observation or verbal confirmation by the initial performer. However, the independent verifier may be involved in unrelated portions of the same activity and may be physically present when the initial action is performed. IV is required for the following:

A. Any activity that, if done improperly, could remain undetected until that structure, system, or component was called upon to mitigate an accident or transient as described in the FSAR, Fire Protection Plan, Security Plan, or ODCM.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-110.3 PROGRAMS AND VERIFICATION PROGRAM Rev. 0 PROCESSES Page 9 of 12 B. Initial system lineups, or restoring components to their required position/condition following an outage where the system status was not maintained.

C. Normal system line-up periodiq checks conducted during operating conditions. In this case, the individual performing the periodic check of the original lineup is considered to be the independent verifier and an additional second check is not required. IV of locked components consists of checking that required locking devices are present and intact.

D. Removal from service and return to service of a system or component as required by the plant clearance process.

E. Installation and removal of temporary alterations covered by the TACF Program.

3.4.4 Second-Party Verification Requirements Second-party verification is used in lieu of IV for the activities listed below.

When performing a second-party verification, an agreement must be reached between the performer and the verifier that the activity/manipulation to be performed is correct before performance.

A. Activities where performing an IVwould by itself invalidate the actions or conditions the performer is attempting to establish.

EXAMPLE Verification of throttled valve position, locked valve position, installation and removal of high voltage line or bus PT fuses, installation and removal of fuses in fuse blocks/clips which are normally hidden from view, etc.

B. Activities which, if improperly accomplished or incorrectly identified, may cause any of the following:

0 Immediate plant trip or transient 0 Safety system actuation 0 Start of equipment

  • Equipment failure/damage a Release of radioactive material
  • Personnel injury EXAMPLE Removal or installation of wires, jumpers, or other connections; valve, switch, or breaker manipulations; removal or installation of fuses or circuit cards; etc.

4.0 RECORDS 4.1 QA Records None 4.2 Non-QA Records None

TVAN STANDARD SPP-10.3 PROGRAMS AND VERIFICATION PROGRAM Rev. 0 PROCESSES Page 10 of 12 5.0 DEFINITIONS Second-Party/Concurrent Verification (CV) - The act of verifying a condition, such as lifting a lead or installing a jumper, concurrent with the activities related to establishing the condition.

The individual performing the second-party verification and the performer must reach agreement that the activity/manipulation to be performed is correct before performance. The terms second party/concurrent verification are synonymous and may be used interchangeably.

Independent Verification (IV)- The act of checking a condition, such as a component position, separately from the act of establishing the condition. The individual performing the IV must physically check the condition without relying on observation or verbal confirmation by the initial performer. However, the independent verifier may be involved in unrelated portions of the same activity and may be physically present when the initial action is performed.

TVAN STANDARD SPP-10.3 PROGRAMSAND VERIFICATION PROGRAM Rev. 0 PROCESSES Page 11 of 12 APPENDIX A Page 1 of 2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS REQUIRING INDEPENDENT OR SECOND-PARTY VERIFICATION SYS WBN SQN BFN 01 Main Steam (safety-related Main Steam System (safety- Main Steam (safety-related portion) related portion) portion) 03 Main Feedwater System Main Feedwater System Reactor Feedwater System (safety-related portion) (safety-related portion) (safety-related portion) 03 Auxiliary Feedwater System Auxiliary Feedwater System N/A 13 Fire Detection System Fire Detection System Fire Detection System 23 N/A N/A RHR Service Water System 26 High Pressure Fire Protection High Pressure Fire Protection High Pressure Fire Protection 30 Auxiliary Building Gas Auxiliary Building Gas Treatment HVAC (Refueling Zone, Reactor Treatment System, Lower System, MCR Ventilation Zone, Turbine Bldg., Radwaste Compartment Cooler Fans, System, Lower Compartment Bldg.)

Containment Air Return Fans Cooler Fans, Containment Air Return Fans 31 MCR Ventilation Covered by System 30. Control Bay and Off-Gas Building HVAC (CREV) 32 Essential Air System Essential Air System Control Air System (Reactor Bldg. And Drywell) 39 CO 2 Storage and Fire Protection CO 2 Storage and Fire Protection CO 2 Storage and Fire Protection 41 N/A N/A Halon Fire Protection System 43 Post Accident Sampling System Post Accident Sampling System - Sampling and Water Quality

- Those parts of the system that Those parts of the system that System - Those parts that isolate isolate RCS, RHR, Containment isolate RCS, RHR, Containment releases to the environment and and flush water and flush water establish primary and secondary containment 62 Chemical Volume & Control Chemical Volume & Control N/A System System 63 Emergency Core Cooling Emergency Core Cooling System Standby Liquid Control System System 64 N/A N/A Reactor Building Heating and Ventilation System, Primary Containment and Isolation System 65 Emergency Gas Treatment Emergency Gas Treatment Standby Gas Treatment System System System 66 N/A N/A Offgas System 67 Essential Raw Cooling Water Essential Raw Cooling Water Emergency Equipment Cooling System System Water System 68 Reactor Coolant System Reactor Coolant System Reactor Recirculation System 69 N/A N/A Reactor Water Cleanup System I_ II (RWCU)

TVAN STANDARD SPP-10.3 PROGRAMS AND VERIFICATION PROGRAM Rev. 0 PROCESSES Page 12 of 12 APPENDIX A Page 2 of 2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS REQUIRING INDEPENDENT OR SECOND-PARTY VERIFICATION SYS WBN SQN BFN 70 Component Cooling Water Component Cooling Water Rx Bldg Closed Cooling Water System System System (RBCCW) 71 N/A N/A Reactor Core Isolation Cooling System (RCIC) 72 Containment Spray System Containment Spray System Auxiliary Decay Heat Removal 73 N/A N/A High Pressure Coolant Injection System (HPCI) 74 Residual Heat Removal (RHR) Residual Heat Removal (RHR) Residual Heat Removal System System System (RHR) 75 N/A N/A Core Spray System 76 N/A N/A Containment Inerting System 77 Radwaste Systems - Those Radwaste Systems - Those parts Liquid Radwaste System (Floor parts that isolate releases to the that isolate releases to the and Equipment Drains) - Those environment environment parts that isolate releases to the environment and establish primary and secondary containment 78 Spent Fuel Pit Cooling System Spent Fuel Pit Cooling System Fuel Pool Cooling and Cleanup System 82 Emergency Diesel Generators Emergency Diesel Generators Standby Diesel Generators 83 Hydrogen Recombination Hydrogen Recombination N/A 84 N/A N/A Containment Atmosphere Dilution System 85 Rod Control Rod Control Control Rod Drive Hydraulics 86 Refer to System 82 Refer to System 82 Diesel Air Start System 88 Containment Isolation System - Containment Isolation System - N/A including valves/components including valves/components that that provide a containment provide a containment isolation isolation function function 90 Radiation monitoring systems - Radiation monitoring systems - Radiation monitoring system Those parts of the systems that Those parts of the systems that Those parts that isolate releases provide isolation functions to provide isolation functions to to the environment and establish effluent pathways effluent pathways primary and secondary containment 99 ESFAS & RPS ESFAS & RPS Reactor Protection System 268 Permanent Hydrogen Mitigation Permanent Hydrogen Mitigation N/A

- Reactor core (Fuel and Reactor core (Fuel and Reactor core (Fuel and component locations) component locations) component locations)

-- Class lE Electrical Distribution Class 1E Electrical Distribution Class 1E Electrical Distribution System. System. System.

NOTE N/A indicates that the associated system number is not utilized at the referenced plant.

JPM 131 0-SI-4.8.B. I.A. Ia Building Release fraction Note: Any values can be used for this JPM and it may be changed to fit any situation, should however, may a key up to indicate the correct result of the given values.

SOLUTION:

Total building Release Rate is 308.14 microcuries/sec Building Release Fraction 0.002

Fan Status Handout to Student Unit 1 Rx Zone B Fast RF Zone B Fast TB B Fast Ul Turbine Room Exhaust A U/S F uS B I/S G I/S C [IS H I/S D [/S J uS E uS Unit 2 Rx Zone B Fast RF Zone B Fast TB B Fast U2 Turbine Room Exhaust A uS F OOS B U'S G uS C L'S H 00S D [IS J I/S E US Unit 3 Rx Zone A Fast RF Zone A Fast TB B Fast U3 Turbine Room Exhaust A uS F US B uS G 00S D

E US I/S H uS J I/S E I/S

CAM DATA Handout to Student CAM # microcuries/sec

!-RM-90-250 16.56 1-RM-90-249 11.01 I1-RM-90-251 120.00 2-RM-90-250 29.00 2-RM-90-249 12.96 2-RM-90-251 17.53 3-RM-90-250 182.00 3-RM-90-249 15.71 3-RM-90-251 15.25 0-RM-90-252 112.48

I BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT

~JOB PERFORMANJCE MEASURE JPM NUMBER: 131 A. 3 TITLE: DETERMINE BUILDING VENTILATION NOBLE GAS RELEASE RATE TASK NUMBER: U-090-SU-02 SUBMITTED BY: DATE:

VALIDATED BY: DATE:

APPROVED: DATE:

TRAINING PLANT CONCURRENCE: DATE:

OPERATIONS Examination JPMs Require Operations Training Manager or Designee Approval

,and Plant Concurrence

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 2 OF 13 I JBPROMNEMAUEI BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 2 10/4/94 ALL GENERAL REVISION 3 09/02/01 ALL General Revision

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 3 OF 13 BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREI OPERATOR: SS#

RO SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER: 131 TASK NUMBER: U-090-SU-02 TASK TITLE: PERFORM AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE SI K/A NUMBER: 272000A4.05 K/A RATING: RO 2.3 SRO: 3.7 TASK STANDARD: CALCULATE TOTAL BUILDING RADIOACTIVE RELEASE RARE AS DIRECTED BY 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.l LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR PLANT CONTROL ROOM X REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a.1, REV 44 VALIDATION TIME: CONTROL ROOM: 40:00 LOCAL:

MAX. TIME ALLOWED: (Completed for Time Critical JPMs omniy PERFORMANCE TIME: CONTROL ROOM LOCAL COMMENTS:

Additional comment sheets attached? YES NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY __ UNSATISFACTORY

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 4 OF 13 EXAMINER: DATE:

IO PEFRACIE BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT IN-PLANT: I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. All steps shall be simulated. I will provide initiating cues and indicate any steps to be discussed. Ensure that you observe electrical safety precautions when working near energized equipment. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied.

Ensure you indicate to me when you understand your assigned task and when you have completed the assigned task.

IN-SIMULATOR: I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. I will provide initiating cues and reports on other actions when directed by you. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied. Ensure you indicate to me when you understand your assigned task and when you have completed the assigned task.

INITIAL CONDITIONS: You are the Control Bay AUO. Unit 2 is operating at power. Units 1 and 3 are defueled. The surveillance instruction to calculate the building ventilation noble gas release rate (once per shift) is due. The fan status has been determined.

INITIATING CUES: Calculate the building ventilation noble gas release rate per O-SI-4.8.B.1.a.l. Begin at Step 7.7 and continue through Step 7.8.7.

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 5 OF 13 START TIME NOTE:

Due to variations in required performance frequency and to minimize impact on personnel, Steps 7.7 and 7.8, 7.9 through 7.13 can be completed independently. If the stack flow instrumentation (0-Fl 90-271) is inoperable or out of service, Attachment 7 must be completed before Step 7.9 can be completed.

7.7 Fan Status Determination Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X 7.7.1RM-90-249 7.7.1.1 Once per shift: RECORD on Attachment 3 the operating status of each ventilation fan monitored by this CAM. The status shall be indicated with "X" in the appropriate ON/OFF column.

7.7.1.2 Once per day (second shift): If all fans serviced by this CAM are off and the monitor is out of service, VERIFY the exhausts' fan control switches are tagged out of service and VERIFY the fan dampers are closed.

Standard:

Fan status supplied with JPM.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 6 OF 13 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X 7.7.2 RM-90-250 Once per shift: CHECK the status of each fan contributing flow to the ventilation path monitored by the RM-90-250 CAM. USE an "A" or "B" to denote which fan is operating. INDICATE the fan status by using the "O" column for all fans off (if applicable), the "S" column for fans on slow or the "F" column for fans on fast.

Standard:

Fan status supplied with JPM.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

C

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 7 OF 13 Performance Step: Crit'ical Not Critical.X 7.7.3 RM-90-251 7.7.3.1 Once per shift: RECORD on Attachment 3 the operating status of each ventilation fan monitored by this CAM. The status shall be indicated with "X" in the appropriate ON/OFF column.

7.7.3.2 Once per day (second shift) : If all fans serviced by this CAM are off and the monitor is out of service, ENSURE the exhaust fan control switches are tagged out of service and VERIFY the fan dampers are closed.

Standard:

Fan status supplied with JPM.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X 7.7.4 0-RM-90-252 (Unit 1 Only)

Once each shift: RECORD the operating status of fans monitored by this CAM with an "X" in the appropriate column of Attachment 3. USE column "0" for all fans off, column "1" for one fan on or column "2" for two fans on.

Standard:

Fan status supplied with JPM.

SAT IJNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

C

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 8 OF 13

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 9 OF 13 7.7.5 If any of the indicated fans (stack dilution or CAM) are operating and the corresponding monitor is declared inoperable,CONTACT the Chemical Laboratory and ENSURE that compensatory sampling in accordance with 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.2 is being conducted.

7.7.6 Prior to 0659 Friday morning, TOTAL the number of shifts each column of Attachment 3 was marked. RECORD the totals at the bottom of Attachment 3.

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical 7.8 DETERMINE the building ventilation noble gas release rate once per shift by completing the following steps:

7.8.1 For each monitor listed on Attachment 4, COMPLETE one of the following four steps:

7.8.1.1 From the CONTINUOUS AIR MONITORING SYSTEM OPERATOR CONSOLE, O-CONS-90-361A OR 0-CONS-90 362A, Panel 1-9-44, OBTAIN the noble gas release rate by entering the keystrokes shown below.RECORD the noble gas release rate(pCi/sec) in the appropriate columns of Attachment 4 for each operable building ventilation radiation monitor. If the release is negative, record 0.00.

Keystrokes:

[DATA], 3-Digit CAM Code, [-], [1], [ENTER], [PRINT],

[FILE], [ENTER]

CAM CAM Code Code 0-RM-90-252 001 2-RM-90-251 006 I-RM-90-249 002 3-RM-90-251 007 2-RM-90-249 003 3-RM-90-250 008 3-RM-90-249 004 1-RM-90-250 009 1-RM-90-251 005 2-RM-90-250 010

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 10 OF 13 Standard:

OBTAINED noble gas release rate, from the Continuous Air Monitoring System Operator Console and RECORDED on Attachment 4.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

7.8.1.2 If the operator consoles 0-CONS-90-361A or 0 CONS-90-362A are not available and the CAMs are operating, OBTAIN the release rate data from the local display on each CAM by selecting channel 1 with the CAM thumbwheel.

If the release rate is negative, record 0.00.

Note:

If 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.2 is in effect for the CAMs, the Chemical Laboratory will report on a shiftly basis the release rate in 4Ci/sec. The reported release rate will assume maximum flow rate and will yield a conservative (high) release value.

7.8.1.3 For out of service and/or inoperable CAMs with ventilation system in service, CONTACT the Chemical Laboratory and ENSURE that manual sampling is being accomplished in accordance with 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.2. RECORD on Attachment 4 the release rate for each inoperable CAM as reported by the Chemical Laboratory.

7.8.1.4 If the ventilation system for a CAM is totally isolated (i.e., no environmental releases occurring), RECORD a noble gas release rate of 0.00 Uci/sec on Attachment 4.

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical 7.8.2 For each monitor, USE Attachments 3 and 5 and DETERMINE the release factor based on fan status.

RECORD the release factors in the appropriate

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 11 OF 13 columns on Attachment 4.

Standard:

DETERMINED correct release factor based on fan status and RECORDED on Attachment 4 SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical 7.8.3 MULTIPLY the release rate by the release factor and RECORD the answer under the column labeled "Actual Rate" on Attachment 4.

Standard:

MULTIPLIED release rate by the release factor and RECORDED on Attachment 4.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X 7.8.4 For each unit, SUM the actual rates for the P21 249, RM-90-250 and RM-90-251 monitors. RECORD the unit total release rates in the appropriate col = s on Page 4 of Attachment 4.

Standard:

SLIMMED the actual rates and RECORDED the unit total release rate on Page 4 of Attachment 4.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 12 OF 13 Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical 7.8.5 StJM the three unit total release rates and the 0-RM-90-252 actual rate. RECORD the building ventilation release rate on Page 4 of Attachment 4.

Standard:

SUýMED the three unit total release rates and the 90-252 actual rate and RECORDED on Attachment 4.

SAT UNSAMI N/A COMMENTS:

NOTE:

For reporting purposes, the release fraction should only be recorded to three decimal places. For examples:

1. A release fraction of 0.12345 should be recorded as 0.123.
2. A release fraction of 0.000012 should be recorded as 0.000.

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical 7.8.6 DETERMINE the building ventilation release fraction by dividing the total building ventilation release rate by 1.50 E+05 (or 150,000) pCi/sec. RECORD the fraction on both Attachment 2 and Attachment 4.

Standard:

DIVIDED total building ventilation release rate (from Step 7.8.5) by 1.50 E+05 and RECORDED result in Attachments 2 and 4.

SAT UNSAT N/AC COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 131 REV. NO. 3 PAGE 13 OF 13 Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X 7.8.7 VERIFY the acceptance criteria as given in Step 6.2.1 has been met. The building ventilation release fraction must be less than or equal to 0.90. If the acceptance criteria has failed, immediately CONTACT the Shift Operation Supervisor.

(AC)

Standard:

VERIFIED acceptance criteria of building ventilation release fraction < 0.90.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

END OF TASK STOP TIME

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE 6 UNIT 0 0-5I-40.8.B.l.a.

i ATTACHMENT 3 (Page 1 of 3)

Fan Status Report Unit I Fan Statua Week From Tn S REACTOR TURBINE BUILDING H BUILDING RADWASTE D I 1-RM-90-250 1-RM-90-251 1-RM-90-249 BUILDING A F Refuel Reactor Turbine A B C D E F G H J O-RM-90-252 AUO Y T "S F 00 F0 S F ON OFFON OFF ON OFFON OFF ON OFFON ON OOF N OFF ON OFFON OIFF 0 1 2 INIT.

FRI DT ---

11 - - d- - - - 1 P v " - -

N SAT _2D _

NN SUN D NJ MON D N

TUE D0---

N WED D N

THU 0 IN TOTAL Page 28 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.l

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 ATTACHMENT 3 (Page 2 of 3)

/J/

Fan Status Renort Unit 2 Fan Status Week From To S REACTOR TURBINE BUILDING H BUILDING D I 2-RM-90-250 2-RM-90-261 2- RM-90-249 A F Refuel' Reactor Turbine A B C D E F G H J AUO Y T 0 S F 0 8 F 0 S F ON OFFON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON IOFF ON iOFF INIT.

FRI  :.D. A A X:*zz1z X X I--

N SAT D N

SUN D N

MON D N

TUE 0 N

WED D N

THU D T NOTA TOTALIIIl A4.

Page 29 of 50 O-SI-4.8.B.I.a.1

(1 REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 3 (Page 3 of 3)

Fan Status Renort LI Unit 3 Fan Status Week From To S REACTOR TURBINE BUILDING H BUILDING D I 3-RM-90-250 3- RM-90-251 3-RM-90-249

  • F Refuel Reactor Turbine A B C D E F G H J AUO Y T o S F 0 S F 0 S F ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF INIT.

FRI 0 )i x X __ X I -

N SAT D N

9U-N D N

N "TUE D-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

N WEDD N

THU D N

K), Page 30 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1

( REV 0044

(

TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 4

\( ) (Page 1 of 4)

Building Effluent Release Rate Log - Unit 1 Week From To IT-, q ,

Unit 1 ___

D S Reactor "mii Turbine Building A H 1-RM-90-250 (0O09f 1-RM-90-249 [0021 1-RM-90-251 [005] Initials Y I Release 4*tual Release Actual Release Actual F Rate Role*" pt. Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate A Unit T (iCi/sec) Factor "Ejaixna) (pCi/sec) Factor (tCi/sec) (pCi/sec) Factor (pci/sec) U Super (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (L7. 3 .3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) 0 visor N

SAT D N

SUN D N

MON D N

TUE D N

WED D N

Page 31 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.l

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0

ATTACHMENT 4

  • I (Page 2 of 4) 4 Building Effluent Release Rate Log - Unit 2 Week From To " .

Unit 2 D s Reactor Ruildi4 Turbine Building A H 2-RM-90-250 [0103 2-RH-90-249 [0031 2-RM-90-251 [006] Initials y 'I Release Actual Release Actual Release Actual F Rate Releas R*te Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate A Unit T (HCi/sec) Factor (pCi/sea) ($Ci/sec) Factor (HCi/sec) (HCi/sec) Factor (PCi/sec) U Super (7.8.1) (17.9.2) (7.9.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) 0 visor FRI D2 -'&. 5 ~9 p /29,-&'V J 2L . ~ _ _ __

N SAT D N

SUN D N

MON D N

TUE D N

WED D N

THU D N

Si~.

,H.*J, Page 32 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.l

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFWLfA UNIT 0 0-S14.8. B.l. a.

ATTACHMENT 4

. 4 4 ( 1;'(Page 3 of 4)

"* +-- _Building Effluent Release Rate Log - Unit 3 Week From To o I._ý___ . 1 Unit 3 D S Reactor Turbine Building A H 3-RM-90-250 (0033' 3-Rk-90-249 [004] 3-R3-90-251 [007] Initials Y I Release Actuai Release Actual Release Actual F Rate Releam Rt Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate A Unit T (pCi/sec) Factor fjCi/u6o) (LCi/sec) Factor (HCi/sec) (pCi/sec) Factor (pCi/sec) U Super (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.9.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.a.2) (7.8.3) 0 visor FRI D ,/. ,) " , /,j 0 Z_ 7- 2,*, /,1) __/__. ____

N _ _

SAT D _______

N SUN D _ ... ..

MON D TUE D N

VIP WEUD N N

Page 33 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a.I

(i REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RSLEAZE RATE 0UNIT 0

-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 4 (Page 4 of 4)

D S Radwastoea*ujjng Unit Total Release Rates Building A H 0-RM-90-252 [0013 (pCi/sec) Ventilation Building Y I Initials Release &atual Release Ventilation F Rate Ralq4q Rate Rate release A Unit T (oCi/sec) Factor (PCi/saO) Unit I Unit 2 Unit 3 (pCi/sec) Fraction Acceptance (7.0.1) (7.1.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.4) U Super (7.8.4) (7.9.4) (7.8.5) (7.8.6) Criteria D I !." I ,- 0 visor FRI D .... P7- -7 Ii  ;./0

! 0.90 N 0.90 SAT D<

0.90 SUN D N 0.90 MON D < 0.90

<9-1D.90 N_ 4S0.90 TUE D

! 0.90 N r

< 0.90 WED D -- 00. .90 90 N ...... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

0 .9 0 THU 0 _ _ - --

0.90 N I I :_ 0.90 4;a .

Page 34 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.l ATTACHMENT 5 (Page 1 of 1)

Building Ventilation System Release Factors 1-RM-90-249, 2-RM-90-249, and 3-RM-90-251 NumberFans On 0 1 2 3 4 Release Factor 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 4.2 A 4 ptr Dab 34-9 Alsaseractor 0

A 0.001 0.20 o

3. 2 4 0 d'

10.401 0.60 3 4 5 I 0.80 I 1.00 F'

NOTE 1:

If one or more of the fans are off and one or more of the fans are on, assume off fans are on "slow". (This will cover the case where the fans are off, off, slow; off, slow, off; etc.)

Page 35 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a.I

TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT SURVEILLANCE INSTRUCTION O-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE REVISION 44 PREPARED BY: ROGER SHIREMAN PHONE: 2638 RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION: RADCHEM. CHEMISTRY APPROVED BY :ROBERT PITCOCK DATE: 02/21/2001 EFFECTIVE DATE: 02/22/2001 LEVEL OF USE: REFERENCE USE QUALITY-RELATED

REVISION LOG Procedure Number: O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 Revision Number:0044 Pages Affected: 6.

Pagination Pages: None.

Description of Change:

IC Clarified criteria for off gas hydrogen analyzer. Requires only one monitor to be in service.

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.I.a.l

1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Purpose This Surveillance Instruction (SI) is used by Browns Ferry Operations and Radiochemical Laboratory personnel to satisfy the following Technical Requirements Manual (TRM) requirements, ODCM requirements, and data recording functions:

1.1.1 Airborne effluent release rates in accordance with ODCM Surveillance Requirement 2 . 2 . 2 .1.1.a.

1.1.2 The instrumentation checks required by ODCM Table 2.1-2.

1.1.3 The Wide Range Gaseous Effluent Radiation Monitor (WRGERMS),

0-RM-90-306, inoperability requirements in accordance with TABLE 3.3.5-1 of the TRM.

1.1.4 The WRGERMS instrumentation check required by TABLE 3.3.5-1 of the TRM.

1.1.5 Attachment 11 is used to record data during EOI's and REP conditions.

1.2 Scope 1.2.1 ODCM Control 1.2.2.1 requires that the general public dose rate from noble gas effluents to be limited to less than 500 mRerm per year to the total body and less than 3000 mRem per year to the skin. The Off site Dose Calculation Manual (ODCM) describes the methodology by which the dose rate limits are converted to plant process variables such as the stack noble gas radioactive release rate limit. The limiting release rates for the authorized effluent release points have been calculated as 0.15 curies :ýCi per second for the building level release points and 14.4 Ci per second for the stack.

1.2.2 To ensure compliance with ODCM Control 1.2.2.1, each airborne effluent release point is required to be continuously monitored while actively releasing an airborne stream. This is usually accomplished by in-line process instrumentation which has Control Room alarm capabilities. If a monitor is inoperable, releases via that gas stream may continue provided compensatory sampling measures are initiated. Compensatory sampling is accomplished by having the Radiochemical Laboratory personnel obtain and analyze grab samples at a prescribed frequency.

Page I of 50 0-S1-4.8.5. la.I

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a.1 1.2 Scope (Continued) 1.2.3 Technical Instruction (TI) 15 provides the engineering basis for establishing instrumentation alarm set points, monitor sampling rates, and release point allocation factors for the various plant radiation monitors. The conservative parameters prescribed by TI-15 ensures that the ODCM Control 1.2.2.1 limits are satisfied.

1.2.4 Instrumentation checks will be used to provide a reasonable assurance that an unmonitored release does not go undetected.

The instrument checks will be performed on the required monitoring instrumentation at a frequency such that a failed monitor is readily detected. The instrument checks will usually consist of data acquisition/instrument readings of such a detail that they will permit the calculation of the total site release rate.

NOTE:

The source check formerly in this SI (Rev. 40 and previous Revs) are now in 0-SI-2.1-2.

1.2.5 Additionally, this SI provides the pre-planned alternate monitoring instructions for the WRGERMS instrumentation, 0-RM-90-306 and 0-RR-90-360, in the event that the minimum number of operable instrument channels is less than the required number as given in TABLE 3.3.5-1 in the TRM.

1.3 Frequency 1.3.1 The normal performance band for this SI is one week. The procedure will typically start at 0700 Friday and end 0659 the following Friday.

1.3.2 Once per shift, the following checks will be made:

1.3.2.1 Release rate information will be obtained for each effluent stream having continuous monitoring capabilities.

1.3.2.2 The overall site release rate will be calculated from the release rate information.

1.3.2.3 Offgas pretreatment and post-treatment monitors, offgas flow rate, and offgas hydrogen concentration will be recorded during main condenser and offgas treatment systems operations.

Page 2 of 50 0-SI-4.3.S.I.a.r

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.I.a.1 1.3 Frequency (Continued) 1.3.2.4 The WRGERMS instrumentation operability will be demonstrated by an instrumentation check.

1.3.3 Once per day, each effluent radiation monitor shall demonstrate the operability of its sampling rate instrumentation and associated sample flow alarms.

2.0 REFERENCES

2.1 Browns Ferry Nuclear Plant Technical Requirements Manual (TRM).

2.2 Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR)

Section 7.12, Process Radiation Monitoring.

Section 9.5, Gaseous Radwaste System (Modified).

2.3 Operating Instructions (Of) 1-, 2-, and 3-01-90, Radiation Monitoring System 2.4 Surveillance Instructions (SI) 0-SI-2.1-2, Airborne Effluent Radiation Monitor Source Checks.

0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.2, Airborne Effluent Release Rate by Manual Sampling when a Gaseous Effluent Monitor is Inoperable.

1-, 2-, and 3-SI-4.8.B.1.a.3, Off Gas Post-Treatment Release Rate by Manual Sampling.

1-, 2-, and 3-SI-4.8.B.5.a, Off Gas Hydrogen Concentration by Manual Sampling.

2.5 Technical Instructions (TI)

TI-15, Radioactive Gaseous Effluent Engineering Calculations and Measurements.

0-TI-336, Continuous Air Monitor Flow Regulator Adjustment.

2.6 Offsite Dose Calculation Manual (ODCM).

2.7 Part 302 to Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations (40 CFR 302),

Designation, Reportable Quantities, and Notification.

2.8 Memorandum from John W. Sabados to Masoud Bajestani,

Subject:

Sampling Set points for the Eberline Continuous Air Monitor (R46 901116 823).

Page 3 of 50 -4.3.B3.l.a.

Page3of 50O-SI

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1

2.0 REFERENCES

(Continued) 2.9 Controlled Vendor Manuals (CVM)

Technical Manual for the 250 CAM Monitoring System, BFN-CVM-2083.

Technical Manual for the 252 CAM Monitoring System, BFN-CVM-2084.

Technical Manual for the 249-251 CAM Monitoring System, BFN-CVM-2085.

Technical and Operating Manual for the CT-2B(s) Control Terminal, BFN-CVM-2090.

2.10 Memorandum from M. Bajestani to J. W. Sabados,

Subject:

Steam Packing Exhauster flow (R40 911018 914).

2.11 Stack Post Mod. Test for DCN W17999 (PMT-256) 20 April, 1993.

2.12 Technical Requirements Manual 2.13 Memorandum from Rick Givens to Phil Chadwell,

Subject:

Stack Flow Requirements (R70 980730 843) [BFPER980545].

3.0 PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS 3.1 (NRC/C] Radiation monitors may be removed from service for maintenance, calibration, or testing for periods not to exceed 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />. If it becomes apparent that a monitor cannot be returned to service within the 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, the Unit Supervisor shall be immediately notified to ensure compensatory sampling has been initiated. [LER 260/89021]

3.2 The night shifts and day shifts are defined by the day on which the shift begins. (i.e. Friday dayshift is Friday 0700-1900, Friday night shift is Friday 1900 to Saturday 0700.)

4.0 PREREQUISITES This SI must be verified as the most current approved revision with all approved urgent changes attached.

5.0 SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT RECOfMMENDED NONE Page 4 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.L

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.l 6.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA 6.1 Responses which fail to meet the acceptance criteria constitute unsatisfactory surveillance instruction results and require immediate notification of the Unit Supervisor at the time of failure. Failure of release rate acceptance criteria requires notification of the Chemistry Manager. Failure of release rate acceptance criteria will require a National Response Center reportability determination in accordance with Part 302 to Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulation (40 CFR 302).

6.2 The noble gas release rate must be limited such that the off site dose and dose rates are in compliance with ODCM Control 1.2.2.1. This will be accomplished by establishing release rate limits for the building/ground and the stack/elevated release points. The corresponding release rate limits will be checked in accordance with the values listed below.

6.2.1 The sum of the building release rate fraction must be less than or equal to 0.90. The building release rate fraction is defined as the radioactive noble gas release rate at each monitored building release point divided by the ODCM building release limit of 1.50 E+05 pCi/sec.

6.2.2 The stack release rate fraction must be less than or equal to 0.10. The stack release rate fraction is defined as the radioactive noble gas release rate at the stack divided by the ODCM release rate limit of 1.44 E+07 ytCi/sec.

6.2.3 The total site release rate fraction must be less than or equal to 1.00. The total site release rate fraction is defined as the sum of the building and stack release rate fractions.

6.2.4 Compensatory sampling measures must be initiated whenever a radiation monitor is out of service and effluent releases are continuing via that release point.

Page 5 of 50 0 SI 4

  • I B " i " [ I [

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.I.a.1 6.3 The radioactive gaseous effluent instrumentation operability shall be demonstrated by performance of shiftly and/or daily instrument checks as noted below.

6.3.1 Shiftly Checks. The following instrumentation checks must be accomplished at least once per shift during the noted periods of required operability. These instrumentation checks will be used to satisfy ODCM Surveillance Requirements in 2 . 2 . 2 .1.1.a, Table 2.1-2, TRM Table 3.3.5-1, and TRM TSR 3.3.9.1 (noble gas monitor and hydrogen analyzer daily requirements only).

Monitor(s) Required Period of Operability l-, 2-, 3-RM-90-249, When actively releasing an airborne l-, 2-, 3-RM-90-250, effluent stream (i.e., vents are open 1-, 2-, 3-RM-90-251, and the ventilation fans are on).

and 0-RM-90-252 0-RM-90-147 and/or 148 When actively releasing an airborne effluent stream.

0-RM-90-306, and When one or more of the site units 0-RR-90-360 are in either MODES 1 or 2.

1-, 2-, 3-RM-90-265, When actively processing an off gas and/or stream (i.e., unit FCV-66-28 is open).

1-, 2-, 3-RM-90-266 1-, 2-, 3-H2R-66-96 During main condenser offgas (Channels A and/or B) treatment system operations.

The shiftly checks shall be accomplished by recording the release rates or release concentrations as displayed on the appropriate control room recorders.

If a monitor is out of service during a required period of operability, compensatory sampling measures will be initiated in accordance with the instructions given in Steps 7.7.5, 7.8.1.3, and/or 7.9.1.3.

Page 6 of 50 0-S1-4.3.B.l.a.'

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.l 6.3 (Continued) 6.3.2 Daily Checks. The following instrumentation checks must be accomplished at least once per day during the noted periods of required operability. These instrumentation checks will be used to satisfy ODCM surveillance requirements in Table 2.1-Ž (sample flow instrumentation and sample flow annunciators only).

instrumentation Required Period of Operability 1-, 2-, 3-RM-90-249, When actively releasing an airborne 1-, 2-, 3-RM-90-250, effluent stream (i.e., vents are open 1-, 2-, 3-RM-90-251, and the ventilation fans are on).

and Q-RM-90-252 sample flow instrumentation O-Rm-90-147/148 When actively releasing an airborne sample flow rate and effluent stream.

0-FA-90-150 flow abnormal alarm 1-, 2-, 3-PA-90-262 When actively processing an off gas sample pressure stream (i.e., unit FCV-66-28 is open).

abnormal alarm The daily checks shall be accomplished by recording the sample flow rates from the appropriate control room instrumentation and/or testing the alarm annunciator condition. Satisfactory sample flow rate checks must fall within the range specified in the following table. Satisfactory annunciator test results will consist of a simple "go/no-go" test.

If a monitor is out of service during a required period of operability, compensatory sampling measures will be initiated in accordance with the instructions given in Steps 7.7.5, 7.8.1.3, and/or 7.9.1.3. Compensatory sample flow rate measurements are required to be made every four hours, but are not required to satisfy the sample rate limits in the following table.

Monitor Sample Flow (scfm)

Low High 1-, 2-, 3-RM-90-249 1-, 2-, 3-RM-90-251 1.73 2.27 O-PM-90-252 1.12 1.87 1-, 2-, 3-RM-90-250 3.6 4.4 O-RM-90-147/148 1.1 1.5 Page 7 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.k. *.!

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a. 1 6.4 The concentration of hydrogen gas in the off gas shall be less than or equal to 4 percent by volume (TRM LCO 3.7.2) as measured by the applicable unit H2R-66-96 Hydrogen Analyzer or as determined from off gas grab samples.

6.5 Acceptance criteria determination steps will be designated by (AC).

6.6 The off gas pretreatment radiation levels (2-, and 3-RM-90-157) and the off gas flow rate (2-FR-66-Ill, and 3-FR-66-ill) instrumentation readings are required for monitoring system performance and for failed fuel performance calculations. There are no Technical Specification surveillance requirements associated with these observations. The observation will be made shiftly during periods of main condenser/offgas treatment system operation.

Page 8 of 50

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.l Date 7.0 PROCEDURE STEPS INITIALS NOTES:

(1) All notes, remarks, and comments are to be recorded on Attachment 1.

Each statement is to be numbered and cross-referenced to the appropriate attachment or SI step.

(2) Attachments not used in the performance of this SI do not need to be included in the completed SI package.

7.1 OBTAIN permission from the Unit 2 and Unit 3 Supervisors to perform this instruction.

U2 U3 7.2 [NRC/C] NOTIFY the Unit Operator (U2) of the intent to begin this instruction. (RPT 82-16, LER 259/8232]

7.3 RECORD the date/time started and the plant conditions on Attachment 1, Surveillance Instruction Review Form.

NOTE:

SI step performance and acceptance criteria verification are to be noted on the appropriate SI attachments for Steps 7.4 through 7.13.

7.4 REVIEW the Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.0. INITIAL on Attachment 2.

7.5 ENSURE that all Prerequisites in Section 4.0 have been met. INITIAL on Attachment 2.

Page 9 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.i.a. i

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 7.6 OBTAIN the following information.

7.6.1 Once per shift, RECORD on Attachment 2 each unit's 8 hour9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> average power level in megawatts thermal (MWT) . If shutdown enter 0.

NOTE:

Due to variations in required performance frequency and to minimize impact on personnel, Steps 7.7 and 7.8, 7.9 through 7.13 can be completed independently.

If the stack flow instrumentation (0-FI-90-271) is inoperable or out of service and 0-FI-90-348 is not used, Attachment 7 must be completed before Step 7.9 can be completed.

7.7 Fan Status Determination 7.7.1 RM-90-249 7.7.1.1 Once per shift: RECORD on Attachment 3 the operating status of each ventilation fan monitored by this CAM.

The status shall be indicated with "X" in the appropriate ON/OFF column.

7.7.1.2 Once per day (night shift): If all fans serviced by this CAM are off and the monitor is out of service, VERIFY the exhausts' fan control switches are tagged out of service and VERIFY the fan dampers are closed.

7.7.2 RM-90-250 Once per shift: CHECK the status of each fan contributing flow to the ventilation path monitored by the RM-90-250 CAM. USE an "A" or "B" to denote which fan is operating. INDICATE the tan status by using the "0" column for all fans off (if applicable), the "S" column for fans on slow, or the "F" column for fans on fast.

Page 10 of 50 C-S-4.3.3.I.

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI- 4 . 8

.B.1.a.l 7.7 Fan Status Determination (Continued) 7.7.3 RM-90-251 7.7.3.1 Once per shift: RECORD on Attachment 3 the operating status of each ventilation fan monitored by this CAM.

The status shall be indicated with "X" in the appropriate ON/OFF column.

7.7.3.2 Once per day (Night shift): If all fans serviced by this CAM are off and the monitor is out of service, ENSURE the exhausts' fan control switches are tagged out of service and VERIFY the fan dampers are closed.

7.7.4 0-RM-90-252 (Unit 1 Only)

Once each shift: RECORD the operating status of fans monitored by this CAM with an "X" in the appropriate column of Attachment

3. USE column "0" for all fans off, column "I" for one fan on, or column "2" for two fans on.

Dnc* I1 nF so O-3l-4,8.3. l.a.

Pa e 11 of 50

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 7.7 Fan Status Determination (Continued) 7.7.5 If any of the indicated fans (stack dilution or CAM) are operating and the corresponding monitor is declared inoperable, CONTACT the Chemical Laboratory and ENSURE that compensa-tory sampling in accordance with O-SI-4.8.B.I.a.2 is being conducted.

7.7.6 Prior to 0659 Friday morning, TOTAL the number of shifts each column of Attachment 3 was marked. RECORD the totals at the bottom of Attachment 3.

7.8 DETERMINE the building ventilation noble gas release rate once per shift by completing the following steps and VERIFY that all monitors with an open release path are not in standby:

7.8.1 For each monitor listed on Attachment 4, COMPLETE one of the following four steps:

7.8.1.1 From the CONTINUOUS AIR MONITORING SYSTEM OPERATOR CONSOLE, 0-CONS-90-361A or 0-CONS-90-362A, Panel 1-9-44, OBTAIN the noble gas release rate by entering the keystrokes shown below. RECORD the noble gas release rate (PCi/sec) in the appropriate columns of Attachment 4 for each operable building ventilation radiation monitor. If the release rate is negative, RECORD 0.000.

NOTE:

Leading zeros do not have to be entered for CAM code.

Keystrokes:

[DATA], 3-Digit CAM Code, [-1, (1], (ENTER),

(PRINT], (FILE], (ENTER]

CAM Code CAM Code 0-RM-90-252 001 2-RM-90-251 006 I-RM-90-249 002 3-RM-90-251 007 2-2ŽM-90-249 003 3-RM-90-250 008 3-RŽM-90-249 004 I-RM-90-250 009 1-RM-90-251 005 2-RM-90-250 010 Page 12 of 50 (3-81-4.3.B. !.a. i

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-31-4.8. B.1. a.1 7.8 (Continued) 7.8.1.2 If the operator consoles O-CONS-90-361A or 0-CONS-90-362A are not available and the CAMs are operating, OBTAIN the release rate data from the local display on each CAM by selecting channel 1 with the CAM thumb wheel. If the release rate is negative, RECORD 0.000.

NOTE:

If 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.2 is in effect for the CAMs, the Chemical Laboratory will report the release rate in .iCi/sec for each grab sample. The reported release rate will assume a maximum flow rate and will yield a conservative (high) release value.

7.8.1.3 For out of service and/or inoperable CAMs with ventilation system in service, CONTACT the Chemical Laboratory and ENSURE that manual sampling is being accomplished in accordance with 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.2.

RECORD on Attachment 4 the release rate for each inoperable CAM as reported by the Chemical Laboratory.

7.8.1.4 If the ventilation system for a CAM is totally isolated (i.e., no environmental releases occurring), RECORD "OOS" in all three columns on Attachment 4.

7.8.2 For each monitor, USE Attachments 3 and 5 and DETERMINE the release factor based on fan status. RECORD the release factors in the appropriate columns on Attachment 4.

7.8.3 MULTIPLY the release rate by the release factor and RECORD the answer under the column labeled "Actual Rate" on Attachment 4.

7.8.4 For each unit, SUM the actual rates for the RM-90-249, RM-90-250, and RM-90-251 monitors. RECORD the unit total release rates in the appropriate columns on Page 4 of Attachment 4.

Page 13 of 50

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 7.8 (Continued) 7.8.5 SUM the three unit total release rates and the 0-RM-90-252 actual rate. RECORD the building ventilation release rate on Page 4 of Attachment 4.

NOTE:

For reporting purposes, the release fraction should only be recorded to three decimal places. For examples:

1. A release fraction of 0.12345 should be recorded as 0.123.
2. A release fraction of 0.00012 should be recorded as 0.000.

7.8.6 DETERMINE the building ventilation release fraction by dividing the total building ventilation release rate by 1.50 E+05 (or 150,000) pCi/sec. RECORD the fraction on both Attachment 2 and Attachment 4.

7.8.7 VERIFY the acceptance criteria as given in Step 6.2.1 has been met. The building ventilation release fraction must be less than or equal to 0.90. If the acceptance criteria has failed, immediately CONTACT the Unit Supervisors. (AC) 7.9 DETERMINE the elevated (stack) noble gas release rate once per shift by completing the following steps:

7.9.1 RECORD the highest noble gas count rates (counts per second, cps) for the 0-RM-90-147 and 0-RM-90-148 monitors in the appropriate columns of Attachment 6 in accordance with one of the following steps:

7.9.1.1 If both the 0-RR-90-147 and at least one of the radiation monitors are operable, OBTAIN the necessary information from 0-RR-90-147 on Panel 9-2. If applicable, RECORD "OOS" in the appropriate column of Attachment 6 if one of the monitors is out of service.

Page i4 of 500-Sl-4.3.B.t.*.I

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 7.9 (Continued) 7.9.1.2 If 0-RR-90-147 is inoperable and at least one of the radiation monitors is operable, OBTAIN the necessary data from the O-RM-90-147B and/or O-RM-90-148B monitors located on Panel 1-9-10. If applicable, RECORD "OOS" in the appropriate column of Attachment 6 if one of the monitors is out of service.

7.9.1.3 If both monitors are inoperable, CONTACT the Chemical Laboratory and ENSURE that manual sampling has been initiated in accordance with O-SI-4.8.B.1.a.2. RECORD "OOS" in the appropriate columns of Attachment 6.

O0TE:

I Yf O-SI- 4 .8.B.l.a.2 is in effect for the stack monitors, the Chemical Laboratory will report the stack release rate in aCi/sec for each grab s ample. The reported release rate will assume a maximum flow rate and L

will Y'ield a conservative (high) release value. In this case, Is teps 7.9.2 and 7.9.3 are not applicable.

7.9.2 DETERMINE the stack flow rate and RECORD in the appropriate column of Attachment 6.

7.9.2.1 If 0-FI-90-271 on Panel 1-9-53 is operable, RECORD the stack flow in standard cubic feet per minute (scfm).

7.9.2.2 If 0-FI-90-271 on Panel 1-9-53 is inoperable, the flow can be determined from 0-FI-90-348 on Panel 25-412 in the WRGERMS building. If 0-FI-90-348 is used for the flow, MAKE a note in the remarks log that 0-FI-30-343 was used.

7.9.2.3 If 0-FI-90-271 on Panel 1-9-53 is inoperable and 0-FI-90-348 is not used, ESTIMATE the stack flow every" four hours using Attachment 7. RECORD the total stack flow in scfm on Attachment 7. RECORD on Attachment the most current value of the 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> observations from Attachment 7.

Page 15 of 50 05-4.S.B. . i.

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.1.a.l 7.9 (Continued) 7.9.3 DETERMINE the stack release rate by using the gross count rate and total stack flow in accordance with the following equation.

When there are two gross count rate readings, USE the highest gross count rate. IF both monitors (0-RM-90-147/8) are INOP CONTINUE with Step 7.9.4.

Total Stack Flow x Gross Count Rate x 1.23 E-03 .LCi/sec (scfm) (cps) cps-scfm 7.9.4 RECORD in the appropriate column of Attachment 6 either the release rate calculated in Step 7.9.3 or as reported by the Chemical Laboratory for an inoperable monitor.

NOTE:

Alternative sampling for the WRGERM monitor is satisfied by taking readings from the normal stack release monitors, 0-RM-90-147 and/or 0-RM-90-148, when operable or by manual sampling in accordance with O-SI- 4 .8.B.l.a.2 when the normal stack monitors are inoperable. This alternate sampling succession satisfies the requirement for a preplanned alternate method as required in TABLE 3.3.5-1 of the TRM.

7.9.5 Wide Range Gaseous Effluent Radiation Monitor (WRGERM),

0-RM-90-306, Panel 2-9-10.

7.9.5.1 If the monitor is inoperable, RECORD "INOP" in the appropriate column of Attachment 6 and CONTINUE with Step 7.9.6. Otherwise, CONTINUE with Step 7.9.5.2.

7.9.5.2 ENSURE 0-RM-90-306 is in the Sample Mode.

7.9.5.3 RECORD the noble gas release rate in .Ci/sec in the appropriate column of Attachment 6. RECORD results to two decimal places (e.g. 2.95E 00).

7.9.6 If the WRGERM monitor is inoperable for a period greater than one day, CONTACT the Chemistry Manager. If the monitor remains inoperable for a period of seven days, a special report must be submitted to the NRC in accordance with the ODCM.

Page 16 of 50 O-SI-4.8.B. !..*.

  • REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.i.a.1 7.9 (Continued) 7.9.7 If all release streams to the stack are isolated, USE a release rate factor of 0.00. Otherwise, USE 1.00. RECORD the release rate factor in the appropriate column of Attachment 6.

7.9.8 CALCULATE the actual release rate by multiplying the highest release rate (0-RM-90-147/148 or 0-RM-90-306) by the release factor. RECORD the information in the Actual Release Rate column on Attachment 6.

NOTE:

For reporting purposes, the release fractions should only be recorded to three decimal places. For example, a release fraction of 0.12345 should be recorded only as 0.123.

7.9.9 CALCULATE the stack release fraction by dividing the actual release rate by 1.44 E+07 (or 14,400,000) pLCi/sec. RECORD this information on both Attachment 2 and Attachment 6.

7.9.10 VERIFY the acceptance criteria as given in Step 6.2.2 has been met. The stack release fraction must be less than or equal to 0.10. If the acceptance criteria has failed, immediately CONTACT the Unit Supervisors. (AC) 7.10 CALCULATE the total site release fraction by adding the building ventilation and stack release fractions on Attachment 2. VERIFY the site release fraction acceptance criteria as given in Step 6.2.3 has been met. If the acceptance criteria has failed, immediately CONTACT the Unit Supervisors. (AC)

Page 17 of 50 O-SI-4.S.3.1.a.

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 7.11 Once per shift, RECORD the Unit 2, and 3 offgas instrumentation readings on Attachment 8. (Unit I log has been deleted.)

7.11.1 In the "FCV-66-28" column PLACE an "X" in the appropriate box (open or closed).

7.11.2 If the unit's FCV-66-28 is CLOSED, RECORD all other offgas readings as "NA" (not applicable). CONTINUE with Step 7.11.6.

7.11.3 If the unit is not under main condenser/offgas treatment system operations, RECORD the offgas flowrate recorder, offgas pretreatment radiation monitor, and the offgas recombiner readings as "NA__ (not applicable, i.e., not required). CONTINUE with Step 7.11.5.

7.11.4 RECORD the offgas flowrate recorder [Readings from FR-66-20 (Units 2 and 3) should be recorded if FR-66-111 is inoperable.

If readings are taken from FR-66-20 on Units 2 or 3, MAKE a note in the remarks log that readings were taken from FR-66-20], offgas pretreatment radiation monitor, the offgas post-treatment radiation monitors, and the offgas recombiner readings. If the instrumentation is inoperable, RECORD the readings as "INOP". For the FR-66-111, if the narrow range is saturated (upscale; most readings are greater than 30 scfm),

use the wide range recorder; otherwise use the narrow range.

7.11.5 If both of the offgas post-treatment monitors (RM-90-265 and RM-90-266) for a particular unit are inoperable and the unit FCV-66-28 valve is OPEN, CONTACT the Chemical Laboratory and ENSURE that manual sampling has been initiated in accordance with the applicable units l-, 2-, 3-SI-4.8.B.1.a.3.

7.11.6 If the observations have been complete for all units, CONTINUE with Step 7.12. Otherwise, CONTINUE with the next unit.

Page 18 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a.

  • REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI- 4 .8.B.l.a.l 7.12 Once per day (day shift), RECORD on Attachment 9 the various radiation monitor's sample flow rate and/or the abnormal sampling annunciator response in accordance with the following instructions:

7.12.1 GE Stack Gas Monitor: RECORD the'sample flow rate from the STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW indicator/transmitter, 0-FIT-90-153.

7.12.2 Continuous Air Monitors:

7.12.2.1 From the CONTINUOUS AIR MONITORING SYSTEM OPERATOR CONSOLE, 0-CONS-90-361A or 0-CONS-90-362A, Panel 1-9-44, OBTAIN the noble gas sampling rate by entering the keystrokes shown below. RECORD the noble gas sampling rate (scfm) in the appropriate columns of Attachment 9 for each operable building ventilation radiation monitor.

7.12.2.2 If the operator consoles 0-CONS-90-361A or 0-CONS-90-362A are not available and the CAMs are operating, OBTAIN the sampling rate data from the local display on each CAM by selecting channel 15 with the CAM thumb wheel.

7.12.2.3 If the sampling flow rate data is not available, REQUEST the US to declare the CAM inoperable, CONTACT the Chemical Laboratory, and ENSURE manual sampling has been initiated in accordance with 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.2.

Keystrokes:

(DATA], 3-Digit CAM Code, [-], [15), (ENTER],

(PRINT], (FILE], (ENTER]

CAM Code CAM Code 0-RM-90-252 001 2-RM-90-251 006 1-RM-90-249 002 3-RM-90-251 007 2-RM-90-249 003 3-RM-90-250 008 3-RM-90-249 004 1-RM-90-250 009 1-RM-90-251 005 2-RM-90-250 010 Page 19 of 50

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 7.12 (Continued)

NOTE:

The following alarm annunciators will be tested during the performance of Steps 7.12.3 and 7.12.4. Appropriate communications must be established with the unit control room(s) prior to initiating the alarm.

0-FA-90-150 STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW ABNORMAL (1-XA-55-3A, Window 27) 1-PA-90-262 OFFGAS SAMPLE LINE PRESSURE ABNORMAL (l-XA-55-4C, Window 28) 2-PA-90-262 OG POST TRTMT SAMPLE LINE PRESS ABNORMAL (2-XA-55-4C, Window 28) 3-PA-90-262 OFFGAS SAMPLE LINE PRESSURE ABNORMAL (3-XA-55-4C, Window 28) 7.12.3 Stack Sample Flow Abnormal NOTE:

All manipulations are performed from the Stack unless noted otherwise.

7.12.3.1 ESTABLISH communications with Unit 1 Operator.

7.12.3.2 VERIFY 0-FA-90-150, STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW ABNORMAL on I-XA-55-3A window 27 on Panel 1-9-3 RESET.

7.12.3.3 OBSERVE 0-FIT-90-153, STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW indication.

7.12.3.4 PLACE 0-FC-90-153, STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW CONTROLLER to MAN.

7.12.3.5 PLACE 0-FC-90-153, STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW CONTROLLER valve positioner to OPEN.

7.12.3.6 WHEN 0-FIT-90-153, STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW indicates 3.0 SCFM or greater, THEN VERIFY 0-FA-90-150, STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW ABNORMAL IN ALARM.

7.12.3.7 PLACE 0-FC-90-153, STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW CONTROLLER valve positioner to STOP.

7.12.3.8 PLACE 0-FC-90-153, STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW CONTROLLER to AUTO.

Page 20 of 50

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 7.12 (Continued)

7. 12.3.9 OBSERVE 0-FIT-90-153, STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW indication returns to approximately the value observed in Step 7.12.3.3.

7.12.3.10 VERIFY 0-FA-90-150, STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW ABNORMAL will RESET.

7.12.3.11 IF 0-FA-90-150, STACK GAS SAMPLE FLOW ABNORMAL fails to alarm or reset and 0-RM-90-147/148 are operable, THEN PERFORM Attachment 10 to record sample flow readings every four hours.

7.12.4 Offgas Post-Treatment Sample Flow Abnormal 7.12.4.1 NOTIFY the Unit UOs that they will receive annunciation on the following alarms:

I-PA-90-262 OFFGAS SAMPLE LINE PRESSURE ABNORMAL (1-XA-55-4C, Window 28) 2-PA-90-262 OG POST TRTMT SAMPLE LINE PRESS ABNORMAL (2-XA-55-4C, Window 28) 3-PA-90-262 OFFGAS SAMPLE LINE PRESSURE ABNORMAL (3-XA-55-4C, Window 28) 7.12.4.2 On Panel 25-94 in the Offgas Post-Treatment Building, CLOSE the unit 90-319A valve.

7. 12.4.3 VERIFY with the UO that the annunciator is in ALARM.

(AC) 7.12.4.4 OPEN the unit 90-319A valve.

7.12.4.5 VERIFY with the UO that the annunciator will CLEAR when reset. (AC) 7.12.4.6 If PA-90-262 fails the AC and RM-90-265/266 are operable with the FCV-66-28 valve open, USE Attachment 10 to record the sample flow readings every 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />.

7.12.4.7 CONTINUE with the next unit, until all three unit offgas post-treatment system have been completed.

Page 21 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.!. {.i

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 Date INITIALS 7.13 PERFORM the following reviews at the completion of each shift or as stated:

7.13.1 Unit Supervisor: PERFORM Independent Verification of calculations and Acceptance Criteria on Attachments 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, and 9.

7.13.2 STA: REVIEW the data for Technical Requirements Manual and ODCM compliance.

7.14 PERFORM the following during night shift:

7.14.1 MAKE a copy of the up-to-date Attachments 3, 6, and 8. PLACE the copies in a folder marked for the Radiochemical Laboratory pickup. KEEP the folder at the log AUO's desk until picked up by a Chemistry person.

NOTE:

The following steps are to be performed and initialed at the end of the SI performance week.

7.15 REVIEW all applicable attachments and VERIFY they are complete.

7.16 ENSURE all initials which appear in this instruction have been properly recorded and identified as required on Attachment 1. This includes, but is not limited to AUOs, Unit Supervisors, Shift Manager, and STAs.

7.17 ENSURE all Acceptance Criteria listed in Step 6.0 were met.

7.18 For each Acceptance Criteria failure, ENSURE test deficiency packages have been initiated. ENSURE each TD has been identified-in the Remarks Log. NA if no TDs have been identified.

7.19 COMPLETE Attachment 1 up to the Unit Supervisor review.

7.20 NOTIFY the Unit 2 UO and the Unit Supervisors that this instruction is complete.

Page 22 of 50 0-SI-4.9.B.I.I. i

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-S1-4.8.B.1.a. 1 8.0 ILLUSTRATIONS/ATTACHMENTS 8.1 Attachment 1, Surveillance Instruction Review Form 8.2 Attachment 2, Site Effluent Release Rate Summary 8.3 Attachment 3, Fan Status Report 8.4 Attachment 4, Building Effluent Release Rate Log 8.5 Attachment 5, Building Ventilation System Release Factors 8.6 Attachment 6, Elevated Effluent Release Rate Log 8.7 Attachment 7, Airborne Effluent for Total Stack Flow Rates 8.8 Attachment 8, Offgas Instrumentation Log 8.9 Attachment 9, Monitor Sample Flow Rate and Annunciator Log

8. 10 Attachment 10, Sample Flow Abnormal Log 8.11 Attachment 11, EPIP Release Rate Log END OF TEXT Page 23 of 50 0-SI-4.3.B.Ii. *-

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0

-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 1 (Page 1 of 3)

SURVEILLANCE INSTRUCTION REVIEW FORM REASON FOR TEST: DATE/TIME STARTED Scheduled Surveillance DATE/TIME COMPLETED

___ System Inoperable (Explain in Remarks) PLANT CONDITIONS Ul:

_____ Maintenance (WO/WR# ) U2:

___ Other (Explain in Remarks)

U3:

PRE-TEST REMARKS:

PERFORMED BY:

Initials Name (Print) Name (Signature)

Delays or Problems (If yes, explain in post-test remarks) Yes No Acceptance Criteria Satisfied. Yes No If the above answer is no, the Unit Supervisors shall determine if an LCO exists LCO Yes No U2 Unit Supervisor - Date U3 Unit Supervisor - Date Signature attests that I understand the scope and purpose of this instruction and that, to the best of my knowledge, it was properly performed in accordance with instruction in that: the recording, reduction, and evaluation of data is complete and correct; acceptance criteria is met or justification for exceptions is provided; portions of test performed were appropriate for specified test conditions or reasons for test; deficiencies were evaluated and dispositioned; reportability was evaluated; marginal results were evaluated with respect to potential for future problems based on operating experience and regulatory requirements; and instruction was complete except as noted in post-test remarks.

INDEPENDENT QUALIFIED REVIEWER (CPS) Date SCHEDULING COORDINATOR - Date

===- - -

== - -

== -- ======= - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

=== - -

- -=== - --

POST-TEST REMARKS: FREQ - '/W FREQ IN ?0 KEY -

Page 24 of 50 ,3-SI-4.8.S.i.a. L

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 ATTACHMENT 1 (Page 2 of 3)

Week From To STA DAILY REVIEW (INITIALS/TIME)

Day Shift Friday Saturday Sunday Mcnday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Shift Technical / / / / / / /

Advisor (STA)

Night Shift Friday Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursojly Shift Techntci l / / / / / /

Ad5visr (STAý Continued from Attachment 1, Page 1:

PERFORMED BY: (List All Persons Whose Initials Appear in Instruction)

INITIALS NAME (PRINT) NAME (SIGNATURE)

Page 25 of 50 0-SI-4. 9.B. ia.

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.l ATTACHMENT 1 (Page 3 of 3)

Remarks Log Week From To Remark Attachment Remarks Time Date Initials Number or Step Fill t I Page 26 of 50 0-sI-4.9.B.i.a i

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 ATTACHMENT 2 (Page 1 of 1) 7-75, vv-VC ý-te Effluent Release Rate Summary Week From To D S Building Total A H SI Reactor Power Ventilation Stack Site Initials Y I STEP (MWT) Release Release Release F Rate Rate Rate A Unit T 7.4 7.5 Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Fraction Fraction Fraction Acceptance U SuPer (7.6.1) (7.6.1) (7.6.1) (7.8.6) (7.9.9) (7.10) Criteria 0 visor FRI D ..M -S 0 253 3 - 1.00 N* 1.00 SAT D

  • 1.00 N
  • 1.00 SUN D
  • 1.00 N
  • 1.00 MON D
  • 1.00 N io00 1

TUE D < 1.00 N

  • 1.00 WED D
  • 1.00 N
  • 1.00 THU D *1.00 N _ 1.00
  • Initials added as a result of BFPER960634.

Page 27 of 50 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1

(I REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a.1 ATTACHMENT 3 (Page 1 of 3)

Fan Status Reoort Unit I Fan Status Week From To S REACTOR TURBINE BUILDING I H BUILDING RADWASTE D I 1-RM-90-250 1-RM-90-251 1-RM-90-249 BUILDING A F Refuel Reactor Turbine A B C D E F G H J D-RM-90-252 AUO Y T 0 S F 0 S F 0 S F ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0 1 2 INIT.

FRI D FN+

SAT D N

SUN D N

MON D N

TUE D rN

,WEDD THUD TOTAL Page 28 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a.I

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.I.a.1 ATTACHMENT 3 (Page 2 of 3)

Fan Status Report Unit 2 Fan Status Week From To s REACTOR TURBINE BUILDING H BUILDING D I 2-RM-90-250 2-RM-90-251 2- RM-90-249 A F Refuel Reactor Turbine A B C D E F G H J AUO Y T O S F 0 S F 0 S F ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF INIT.

FRI D N

SAT D N

SUN D N

MON D N

TUE D N

WED D THU D N

TOTAL Page 29 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1

C REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 ATTACHMENT 3 (Page 3 of 3)

Fan Status ReDort Unit 3 Fan Status Week From To s REACTOR TURBINE BUILDING H BUILDING D I 3-RM-90-250 3- RM-90-251 3-RM-90-249 A F Refuel Reactor Turbine A B C D E F G H J AUO Y T 0 S F 0 S F 0 S F ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFFON OFF INIT.

FRI D SAT D N

SUN D N

MON DD N

TUE D N

WED D N

THU D N,

ITOTAL II Page 30 ot 50 0-SI 4.8.B.1.a.1

C REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 ATTACHMENT 4 (Page 1 of 4)

Building Effluent Release Rate Log - Unit 1 Week From To Unit 1

  • S Reactor Building Turbine Building A H 1-RM-90-250 [0093 1-RM-90-249 [002] 1-RM-90-251 [005] Initials Y I Release Actual Release Actual Release Actual F Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate A Unit T (pCi/sec) Factor (liCi/sec) (MCi/sec) Factor (pCi/sec) (gCi/sec) Factor (jCi/sec) U Super (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) 0 visor FRI D N

SAT D N

SUN D N

MON D N

TUE D N

WED D N

THU D N

Page 31 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a. 1

(I REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 4 (Page 2 of 4)

Building Effluent Release Rate Log - Unit 2 Week From To Unit 2 D S Reactor Building Turbine Building A H 2-RM-90-250 (010J 2-RM-90-249 [003] 2-RM-90-251 [006] Initials Y I Release Actual Release Actual Release Actual F Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate A Unit T (PCi/sec) Factor (jCi/sec) (RCi/sec) Factor (MCi/sec) (lCi/sec) Factor (jiCi/sec) U Super (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) 0 visor FRI D N

SAT D N

SUN D N

MON D N

TUE D N

WED D N

THU D N

Page 32 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 4 (Page 3 of 4)

Building Effluent Release Rate Log - Unit 3 Week From To Unit 3 D S Reactor Building Turbine Building A H 3-RM-90-250 [008] 3-RM-90-249 [004] 3-RM-90-251 [007] Initials Y I Release Actual Release Actual Release Actual F Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate A Unit T (jCi/sec) Factor (jCi/sec) (pCi/sec) Factor (RCi/sec) (RCi/sec) Factor (jaCi/sec) U Super (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) 0 visor FRI D N

SAT D N

SUN D N

MON D N

TUE D N

WED D N

THU D FRI L_

N0 --

Page 33 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. i

/

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORnE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 4 (Page 4 of 4)

Building Effluent Release Rate Log - Unit 0 Week From To D S Radwaste Building Unit Total Release Rates Building A H 0-RM-90-252 [001] (pci/sec) Ventilation Building Initials Y I Release Actual Release Ventilation F Rate Release Rate Rate release A Unit T (pCi/sec) Factor (gCi/sec) Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 (gCi/sec) Fraction Acceptance U Super (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.4) (7.8.4) (7.8.4) (7.8.5) (7.8.6) Criteria 0 visor FRI D < 0.90 N _*0.90 SAT D < 0.90 N __0.90 SUN D :C 0.90 N  ! 0.90 MON D <1-0.90 N __0.90 TUE D __0.90 N <*0.90 WED D

  • 0.90 N __0.90 THU D
  • 0.90 N _*0.90 Page 34 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.l

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 5 (Page 1 of 1)

Building Ventilation System Release Factors 1-, 2-, and 3- RM-90-250 Fan Status (Note 1) Release Factor Refuel Reactor Turbine Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Off Off Off 0.00 0.00 0.00 Slow Slow Slow 0.49 0.53 0.49 Fast Slow Slow 0.63 0.60 0.59 Slow Fast Slow 0.64 0.73 0.69 Slow Slow Fast 0.72 0.73 0.71 Fast Fast Slow 0.77 0.80 0.78 Fast Slow Fast 0.86 0.80 0.81 Slow Fast Fast 0.87 0.94 0.91 Fast Fast Fast 1.00 1.00 1.00 0-RM-90-252 Number Fans On 0 1 2 Fans Release Factor 0.00 0.62 1.00 l-RM-90-249, 2-RM-90-249, and 3-RM-90-251 Number Fans On 0 1 2 1 3 1 4 Release Factor I 0.00 1 0.25 1 0.50 I 0.75 1 1.00 1-RM-90-251, 2-RM-90-251, and 3-RM-90-249 Release Factor 0.00 1 0.20 0.40 1 0.60 1 0.80 1.00 NOTE 1:

If one or more of the fans are off and one or more of the fans are on, assume off fans are on "slow". (This will cover the case where the fans are off, off, slow; off, slow, off; etc.)

Page 35 of 50 Page 3 of500-S[-4.8.3.

l.a.

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 ATTACHMENT 6 (Page 1 of 2)

Elevated Effluent Release Rate Loq Week From To O-RM-90-147 O-RM-90-148 STACK NOTES FOR PAGE 1 s Red Pen Green Pen FLOW RATE STACK NOTE 1: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE FLOURATE D H GROSS GROSS HIGHEST 0-FI-90-271 RELEASE FOR 0-FI-90-271 OPERABILITY IS A I COUNT COUNT GROSS INOP<16,366 RATE 16,366 SCFM (SEE NOTE 5)

Y F RATE RATE COUNT (NOTES 1 & 5) CONVER- (NOTE 2) NOTE 2: DATA FROM HANUAL SAMPLING T (CPS) (CPS) RATE -OR- SION (pCi/SEC) RESULTS OR 0-90-147/148[(STACK FLOW) X (7.9.1) (7.9.1) (CPS) ATTACH 7 FACTOR (7.9.3 & (HIGHEST GROSS COUNT RATE) X 1.23E-031.

- (7.9.2) 7.9.4) NOTE 5: THE MINIMUM STACK FLOW RATE WAS F D 1.23E-03 REVISED TO 16,366 SCFM (BFPER980545).

R N 1.23E-03 S D 1.23E-03 NOTES FOR PAGE 2 A N 1.23E-03 NOTE 3: USE THE HIGHER OF THE STACK S D 1.23E-03 RELEASE RATE OR THE WRGERMS RELEASE RATE.

U N 1.23E-03 NOTE 4: DIVIDE ACTUAL-STACK RELEASE RATE M D 1.23E-03 (pci/SEC) BY 1.44E+07 pCi/SEC.

O N 1.23E-03 T D 1. 23E-03 U N 1. 23E-03 W D 1.23E-03 E N 1.23E-03 T D 1. 23E-03 H N 1. 23E-03 Page 36 oO. 50 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a.I

/

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI- 4 .8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 6 (Page 2 of 2)

Building Effluent Release Rate Log - Unit 0 Week From To

  • S WRGERMS Highest Stack Initials A H Noble Gas Stack Actual Release Y I DATA Release Rate Release Rate Release Release Fraction F RECORDED 0-RM-90-306 (pCi/sec) Rate Factor Rate (Note 4. A Unit T IN STEP (pCi/sec) (Note 3. (0.00 or 1.00) (MCi/sec) Page 1) Acceptance U Super 7.9.4 (7.9.5) Page 1) (7.9.7) (7.9.8) (7.9.9) Criteria 0 visor FRI D
  • 0.10 N
  • 0.10 SAT D __0.10 N
  • 0.10 SUN D
  • 0.10 N <*0.10 MON D < 0.10 N
  • 0.10 TUE D
  • 0.106 N __0.10 WED D
  • 0.10 N _ *0.10 n% < 0.10 THU D II 44ItI

'J < 0.10 N _ II Page 37 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.l ATTACHMENT 7 (Page 1 of 1)

AIRBORNE EFFLUENT FOR TOTAL STACK FLOW RATES WEEK FROM TO Date: ___________

Time:

I I

C

=

=

9145 Es=9 95048 scfin (in) 0 48 scfin scfin (mn)

(mn)

FC Exhaust 2 A = 3600 scfm (m)

B - 4775 scfm (m)

Off Gas Flow Rate 3 Rate ( ) scfm (m)

U I-FR-6TTW N Dilution Fan I 4 A = 7370 scfm (m)

T B = 7033 scfm (m)

Steam Packing Exhauster 5 Flow = 1410 scfm (o)

Off gas Flow 6 Rate ( ) scfm (m)

U 2-FR-6ZC-W N Dilution Fan I 7 A = 6594 scfm (m)

T B = 6766 scfm (m)

Steam Packing Exhauster II 8 Flow - 1410 scfm (o)

Off Gas Flow 9 Rate ( ) scfm (m)

U 3-FR-6T-[TT- _

N Dilution Fan I 10 A = 6375 scfm (in)

T B = 6055 scfm (m)

Steam Packing Exhauster III 11 Flow = 1410 scfm (0)

Oft Gas Treatment 12 Building Fxhax*st~iow - 1708scfn(in) 13 Total (sofin) uni t Supervlisor' s5fliticils ____ _ _____________

Directions: ENTER given-flow rate values tot individual equipment in operation into blank columns. Total stack flow rate equals sum of values ain Columns I througIh 12.

[NOTES: Bas:ed (u) Measured (m) rn avterage Flow5 tlow measurements Page 38 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.I.a.1 ATTACHMENT 8 (Page 1 of 2)

Offgas Instrumentation Log Week From To UNIT 2 Ir I D S Unit 2 Off Gas Instrumentation Readinas (SI Step 7.11)

I (SI Ste 7.11) m Initi-ls A H Pretreat FCV-66-28 Off Gas Post Treatment Monitor Hydrogen Recombiner Acceptance Y I Monitor Position Flow rate (cps) (Percent H2) Criteria A Unit F RM-90-157 X appr col FR-66-111 RM-90-266 RM-90-265 H2R-66-96 H2R-66-96 for U Super T (mR/hr) Open I losed. (scfm) Red Pen Green Pen 0 visor Red Pen Green Pen Percent H2 FRI D S4.0%

  • 4.0%

N

  • 4.0%

SAT D

  • 4.0%

N

  • 4.0%

SUN D N *4.0%

  • 4.0%

MON D

  • 4.0%

N

  • 4.0%

TUE D

  • 4.0%

N

  • 4.0%

WED D

  • 4.0%

N

  • 4.0%

THU 0D *4.0%

N _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Page 39 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 8 (Page 2 of 2)

Offgas Instrumentation Loa Week From To UNIT 3

-'-I D S Unit 3 Off Gas Instrumentation Readinqs (SI Step 7.11) Initials Initials A H Pretreat FCV-66-28 Off Gas Post Treatment Monitor Hydrogen Recombiner Acceptance Y I Monitor Position Flow rate (cps) (Percent H2) Criteria A Unit F RM-90-157 X appr col FR-66-111 RM-90-266 RM- 90-2 65 H2R-66-96 H2R-66-96 for U Super TF (mR/hr) Open IClosed (scfm) Red Pen Green Pen Red Pen Green Pen Percent H2 0 visor FRI D

  • 4.0%

N

  • 4.0%)

SAT D - 4.0%

N *4.0%

SUN D

  • 4.0%

N

  • 4.0%

MON D *4.0%

N

  • 4.0%

TUE D *4.0%

N

  • 4.0%

WED D

  • 4.0%

N

  • 4.0%

THU D

  • 4.0%

N

  • 4.0%

Page 40 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a. 1

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1 ATTACHMENT 9 (Page 1 of 1)

Week From To Radiation BFN Monitor or AC Range* a of the Week Unit Annunciator Low High Units Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Notes RM-90-147 1.1 1.5 scfm I U-0 RM-90-252 (0011 1.12 1.87 scfm 2 FA-90-150 Yes NA 3 RM-90-249 (0021 1.73 2.27 scfm 2 U-I RM-90-250 [009] 3.6 4.4 scfm 2 RM-90-251 (005] 1.73 2.27 scfm 2 PA-90-262 Yes NA 4 RM-90-249 (0031 1.73 2.27 scfm 2 U-2 RM-90-250 (010] 3.6 4.4 scfm 2 RM-90-251 [006) 1.73 2.27 scfm 2 PA-90-262 Yes NA 4 RM-90-249 (004] 1.73 2.27 scfm 2 U-3 RM-90-250 [008] 3. 6 4. scfm 2 RM-90-251 [007 1.73 2.27 scfm 2 PA-90-262 Yes NA 4

ceptance Criteria AUO Initials atisfied Unit Supervisor Init NOTES:
1. Reference SI Step 7.12.1. Actual reading from 0-FIT-90-153. If 0-FIT-90-153 is inoperable, compensatory sampling must be initiated in accordance with O-SI-4.8.B.I.a.2.
2. Reference SI Step 7.12.2. If the sample flow rate is not available for any CAM, compensatory sampling must be initiated in accordance with u SI-4.8.B.l.a.2.
3. Reference SI Step 7.12.3. If the annunciator fails and 0-RM-90-147/148 is operable, the sample flow rate must be recorded every four hours on Attachment 10.
4. Reference SI Step 7.12.4. If the annunciator fails and RM-90-265/266 is operable, the sample rate must be recorded every four hours on Attachment 10.

Acceptance range changed for BFPER960679.

Page 41 of 50 O-SI-4.3.B. i.a. [

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 10 (Page 1 of 1)

SAMPLE FLOW ABNORMAL LOG WEEK FROM TO MONITOR ID Date/Time I Flow Init. Date/Time Flow Init. Date/Time Flow Init.

I I This logsheet is to be used if the stack sample flow abnormal (FA-90-150) or an offgas post treatment sample flow abnormal (PA-90-262) is inoperable while the applicable monitor is operable. A separate attachment must be used for each monitor. Sample flow shall be recorded each four hours from the applicable rlcw instrument: For the GE stack monitor use FIT-90-153 and for an offgas post treatment monitor use FI-90-268.

Page 42 of 50 D-SI-4.S.S.L.a.I

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 ATTACHMENT 11 (Page 1 of 8)

EPIP RELEASE RATE LOG NOTES:

1. This attachment is used to record data during EOIs and REP conditions.

Page 2 of 8 is similar to Attachment 2. 3 of 8 through 6 of 8 is similar to Attachment 4, and 7 of 8 and 8 of 8 is similar to Attachment 6.

2. Pages from this attachment may be used to document plant release data on as frequent a basis as needed.
3. Multiple copies of forms from this attachment may be used as needed.
4. Any entries on this form may be NA'ed as needed.

Special Instructions for this attachment.

1.0 RECORD the "From To" dates.

2.0 RECORD the day of the month (under DAY) and time on each line as needed.

3.0 Instructions for recording the data for each item is as given in the main body of the SI.

Page 43 of 50 0-S1-4.3.3. *.a.

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1 ATTACHMENT 11 (Page 2 of 8)

Site Effluent Release Rate Summary From To D T Building Total A I SI Reactor Power Ventilation Stack Site Y M STEP (MWT) Release Release Release E Rate Rate Rate 7.4 7.5 Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Fraction Fraction Fraction (7.6.1) (7.6.1) (7.6.1) (7.8.6) (7.9.9) (7.10)

Page 44 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 O-SI-4.8.B.I.a.1 ATTACHMENT 11 (Page 3 of 8)

Buildinq Effluent Release Rate Loq - Unit 1 From To UnitY1 D T Reactor Building Turbine Building A I 1-RM-90-250 [009) I-RM-90-249 [002] 1-RM-90-251 (005]

Y M Release Actual Release Actual Release Actual E Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate (PCi/sec) Factor (RCi/sec) (MCi/sec) Factor (jiCi/sec) (jCi/sec) Factor (gCi/sec)

(7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3)

I I I I + t t I

I I I t t

_________ I _________ I _________ I _________ A.

Page 45 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1

C REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORN4E EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1 ATTACHMENT 11 (Page 4 of 8)

Building Effluent Release Rate Loq - Unit 2 From To Unith2 _

D T Reactor Building Turbine Building A I 2-RM-90-250 [010] 2-RM-90-249 (003] 2-RM-90-251 (006]

Y M Release Actual Release Actual Release Actual E Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate (jiCi/sec) Factor (&Ci/sec) (ICi/sec) Factor (pci/sec) (pCi/sec) Factor (ICi/sec)

(7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3)

Page 46 of 50 O-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1 ATTACHMENT 11 (Page 5 of 8)

Building Effluent Release Rate Log - Unit 3 From To Unit 3 D T Reactor Building Turbine Building A I 3-RM-90-250 [0081 3-RM-90-249 [004] 3-RM-90-251 (007]

Y M Release Actual Release Actual Release Actual E Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate Rate Release Rate (pCi/sec) Factor (pCi/sec) (pCi/sec) Factor (ýtCi/sec) (iCi/sec) Factor (tCi/sec)

(7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3)

_ _ I _ _ _ IIIII I I I

_ _ I I_ I1 I I + t f t I I_ _ _ I I Ip i -i i I I I I F I k t I I_ _ _ _ _ I II+

I I I I + M i I Page 47 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a.1 ATTACHMENT 11 (Page 6 of 8)

Building Effluent Release Rate Log - Unit 0 From To D T Radwaste Building Unit Total Release Rates Building A I 0-RM-90-252 [001] (pCi/sec) Ventilation Building Y M Release Actual Release Ventilation E Rate Release Rate Rate release (pCi/sec) Factor (gCi/sec) Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 (gCi/sec) Fraction (7.8.1) (7.8.2) (7.8.3) (7.8.4) (7.8.4) (7.8.4) (7.8.5) (7.8.6)

Page 48 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a. 1

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a.1 ATTACHMENT 11

- I Or- a)

From To Elevated Effluent Release Rate Log O-RM-90-147 0-RM-90-148 STACK T Red Pen Green Pen FLOW RATE STACK D I GROSS GROSS HIGHEST 0-FI-90-271 RELEASE A M COUNT COUNT GROSS INOP<16,366 RATE Y E RATE RATE COUNT (NOTE 1 & 8) CONVER- (NOTE 2)

(CPS) (CPS) RATE -OR- SION (pCi/SEC)

(7.9.1) (7.9.1) (CPS) ATTACH 7 FACTOR (7.9.3 &

7.9.4)

(7.9.2) 1.23E-03 1.23E-03 1.23E-03 1.23E-03 1.23E-03

1. 23E-03 1.23E-03 NOTES FOR PAGE 7 OF 8 1.23E-03 NOTE 1: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE FLOWRATE 1.23E-03 FOR 0-FI-90-271 OPERABILITY IS 16,366 1.23E-03 SCFM (SEE NOTE 5) 1.23E-03 NOTE 2: DATA FROM MANUAL SAMPLING 1.23E-03 RESULTS OR 0-90-147/148((STACK FLOW) X 1.23E-03 (HIGHEST GROSS COUNT RATE) X 1.23e-03].

1.23E-03 NOTE 5: THE MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE FLOW RATE 1.23E-03 WAS REVISED TO 16,366 SCFM (BFPER980545).

1.23E-03 NOTES FOR PAGE 8 OF 8 1.23E 03 NOTE 3: USE THE HIGHER OF THE STACK 1.23E-03 RELEASE RATE OR THE WRGERMS 1.23E-03 RELEASE RATE.

1.23E-03 NOTE 4: DIVIDE ACTUAL STACK RELEASE 1.23E-03 RATE (pCi/SEC) BY 1.44E+07 pCi/SEC.

Page 49 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.I

(

REV 0044 TITLE: AIRBORNE EFFLUENT RELEASE RATE UNIT 0 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a.l ATTACHMENT 11 (Page 8 of 8)

Building Effluent Release Rate Log - Unit 0 From To D T WRGERMS Highest Stack A I Noble Gas Stack Actual Release Y M Release Rate Release Rate Release Release Fraction E 0-RM-90-306 (pci/sec) Rate Factor Rate (Note 4, (pCi/sec) (Note 3. (0.00 or 1.00) (pei/sec) Page 7 of 8)

(7.9.5) Page 7 of 8) (7.9.7) (7.9.8) (7.9.9)

LAST PAGE Page 50 of 50 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.I

HANDOUT TO OPERATOR You are the Unit One Control Room Operator.

The Shift Manager has decided that the Control Room must be abandoned.

What Are the Immediate actions that must be taken?

(NOTE: Simulate any actions that can affect plant equipment)

Region II Initial Operator License Exam Browns Ferry RO Admin A.4 Question #1 No References Allowed.

You are the Unit One Control Room Operator.

The Shift Manager has decided that the Control Room must be abandoned.

What Are the Immediate actions that must be taken?

(NOTE: Simulate any actions that can affect plant equipment)

Answer:

4.1 Immediate Action NOTE:

This instruction is not intended to support Unit 1 when fuel is in the Reactor vessel. This instruction will require major revision prior to loading fuel in Unit 1.

4.1.1 ACTIVATE the Automatic Paging System (APS).

4.1.2 OBTAIN a hand-held radio.

4.1.3 PROCEED to 4kV Shutdown Board A and await instruction from Unit 2 Backup Control Panel.

Reference 1-AOl-100-2 KA: Gen 2.4.11 Knowledge of abnormal condition procedures.

RO 3.4/SRO 3.6

Grading Standards 4.1.1 ACTIVATE the Automatic Paging System (APS).

Applicant locates APS terminal and SIMULATES activating touch screen.

Examiner Note: This JPMs is conducted in the Unit 1 control room, a fully functional mockup of this device is located in the Simulator and can be used if needed.

4.1.2 OBTAIN a hand-held radio.

Applicant locates a hand-held radio in the control room.

CUE: You have a radio, you may leave the radio here.

4.1.3 PROCEED to 4kV Shutdown Board A and await instruction from Unit 2 Backup Control Panel.

Applicant leaves the control room heads toward the Shutdown Board Room A (1A Electric Board Room)

TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT ABNORMAL OPERATING INSTRUCTION 1-AOI-100-2 CONTROL ROOM ABANDONMENT REVISION 13 PREPARED BY: JEFFERY MORRISON PHONE: 7338 RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION: OPERATIONS APPROVED BY: GILBERT LITTLE DATE: 02/27/98 EFFECTIVE DATE: 03/12/98 LEVEL OF USE: REFERENCE USE VALIDATION DATE:

QUALITY-RELATED

REVISION LOG Procedure Number: I-AOI-100-2 Revision Number: 13 Pages Affected:3 Description of Change: - NIC-14-ISTS A review of CTS, ITS Submittal, and the TRM was completed to support this procedure change which adds ITS/TRM referencestrequirements (as indicated in Parenthesis). At this time there are no changes to CTS required to support this procedure change. CTS requirements/references will be replaced by the ITS/TRM requirements/references when final NRC approval of the submittal is given. When final NRC approval of the submittal is given, no ITS/TRM changes will be required to support the procedure change removing CTS references/requirements.

TITLE: CONTROL ROOM ABANDONMENT UNIT 1 REV 0013 1-AOI-100-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 1.0 PURPOSE 2................................

2.0 SYMPTOMS 2................................

3.0 AUTOMATIC ACTIONS 2................................

4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 3................................

4.1 Immediate Actions ......................................... 3

5.0 REFERENCES

3................................

ILLUSTRATIONS/ATTACHMENTS NONE Page 1 of 3

TITLE: CONTROL ROOM ABANDONMENT UNIT 1 REV 0013 1-AOI-100-2 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this instruction is to provide instructions for the Unit 1 Control Room operator in the event of a Main Control Room evacuation.

2.0 SYMPTOMS 2.1 Dense smoke in the Unit 1 and/or Unit 2 Control Room.

2.2 Toxic gas released through the ventilation system.

2.3 Fire in Unit 1/2 Control Room that does not meet the entry conditions of an Appendix R fire.

3.0 AUTOMATIC ACTIONS None Page 2 of 3

TITLE: CONTROL ROOM ABANDONMENT UNIT 1 REV 0013 l-AOI-100-2 4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS NOTES:

(l) The Shift Manager/Unit Supervisor (SRO) has primary responsibility for implementation and coordination of this instruction, for all situations the Shift Manager/Unit Supervisor (SRO) makes an assessment of the situation and attempts corrective measures to preclude evacuation. If abandonment becomes necessary, the Shift Manager/Unit Supervisor (SRO) has the authority to assign personnel as deemed necessary for implementation of this instruction.

(2) Evacuation or anticipated evacuation is classified by EPIP-1 as an alert. If the control room is evacuated and backup control from Panel 25-32 is not established within 20 minutes, EPIP-l classifies event as a Site Area Emergency.

(3) This procedure cannot be properly executed, nor will it support, shutting down the reactor during any type of accident.

4.1 Immediate Action NOTE:

This instruction is not intended to support Unit 1 when fuel is in the Reactor vessel. This instruction will require major revision prior to loading fuel in Unit 1.

4.1.1 ACTIVATE the Automatic Paging System (APS).

4.1.2 OBTAIN a hand-held radio.

4.1.3 PROCEED to 4kV Shutdown Board A and await instruction from Unit 2 Backup Control Panel.

5.0 REFERENCES

5.1 Technical Specifications (Improved Technical Specifications - ITS/Requirements)

Section 6.8, Procedures/Instructions and Programs.

(ITS Section 5.4, Procedures/Section 5.5, Programs and Manuals).

5.2 Final Safety Analysis Report 5.1.1 Section 7.18, Backup Control System.

5.1.2 Appendix G, Section G.5.3.5.4, Special Event 44-Loss of Habitability of the Control Room.

END OF TEXT Page 3 of 3

Handout to Operator What Actions are taken upon receipt of a fire emergency report, and what individual is responsible for these actions?

Region II Initial Operator License Exam Browns Ferry RO Admin A.4 Question # 2 References Allowed.

What Actions are taken upon receipt of a fire emergency report, and what individual is responsible for these actions?

Answer:

3.2.1 Upon receiving a fire emergency call, the Unit 1 Control Room Unit Operator will:

Obtain the name of the caller Obtain the location of the fire.

Obtain nature of fire.

Obtain telephone numberfrom caller 3.2.2 Initiate the "Fire Alarm Bell".

3.2.3 Announce fire location over the plant public address (PA) system, repeating at regular intervals until instructed otherwise by Shift Manager of the fire.

3.2.4 Notify the Fire Protection Personnel using the Operations/Fire Protection Radio.

3.2.5 Notify the Shift Manager of the fire.

Reference EPIP-21.

K/A:2.4.39 Knowledge of the RO's responsibilities in emergency plan implementation.

RO 3.3/SRO 3.1

TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EPIP-21 FIRE EMERGENCY PROCEDURE REVISION 3 PREPARED BY: T. W. CORNELIUS PHONE: 2038 RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION: EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS APPROVED BY: GILBERT LITTLE DATE: 05/15/2000 EFFECTIVE DATE: 05/15/2000 LEVEL OF USE: REFERENCE USE VALIDATION DATE: NOT REQUIRED QUALITY-RELATED

REVISION LOG Procedure Number: EPIP-21 Revision Number: 3 Pages Affected: All Pagination Pages: NONE Description of Change:

IC This is a general revision to EPIP-21. The revision is being conducted to re-format the procedure, apply the document control storage filter, and at step 3.3.1 (page 1) add direction for the Shift Manager to refer to SSI-001 as applicable based upon the severity of the fire.

FIRE EMERGENCY PROCEDURE 1 BROWNS FERRY nrIr-21 NUCLEAR PLANT 1.0 PURPOSE To provide timely response to fire emergencies at Browns Ferry and a mechanism to notify additionally emergency personnel or resources as needed.

2.0 SCOPE This procedure applies to all fire emergencies at Browns Ferry.

3.0 INSTRUCTIONS 3.1 General 3.1.1 All members of the fire response team will proceed to the scene upon hearing the announcement.

3.2 Initial Notification by Unit Operator 3.2.1 Upon receiving a fire emergency call, the Unit I Control Room Unit Operator will:

"* Obtain name of caller.

"* Obtain location of fire.

"* Obtain nature of fire.

"* Obtain telephone number from caller.

3.2.2 Initiate the "Fire Alarm Bell".

3.2.3 Announce fire location over the plant public address (PA) system, repeating at regular intervals until instructed otherwise by Shift Manager or Unit Supervisor.

3.2.4 Notify the Fire Protection Personnel using the Operations/Fire Protection Radio.

3.2.5 Notify the Shift Manager of the fire.

3.3 Shift Manager Responsibilities 3.3.1 The Shift Manager will:

"* Dispatch Unit Supervisor or designee to the scene to act as Incident Commander.

"* Establish and maintain communications with the Incident Commander.

"* Refer to SSI-001 for applicability based on the severity of the fire.

3.3.2 When requested by the Incident Commander notify the off-duty BFN fire protection personnel. Notify the off-duty BFN fire protection personnel from list in the Shift Manager office. This list will be maintained by the Fire Protection Organization.

PAGE I OF 2 REVISION 3

FIRE EMERGENCY PROCEDURE BROWNS FERRY EPIP-21 NUCLEAR PLANT 3.3 Shift Manager Responsibilities (Continued) 3.3.3 When requested by the Incident Commander notify of the Clements Volunteer Fire Department. Notify the Clements Volunteer Fire Department by calling the Limestone County Sheriffs Dispatcher (233-3473).

3.3.4 Following an "Appendix R Fire" - direct the Operations Support Center (OSC) to provide ventilation of Shutdown Board Rooms by MSI-0-000-PROO05, Electrical Equipment Room Emergency Ventilation.

3.4 Incident Commander Responsibilities 3.4.1 The Incident Commander will:

"* Establish radio communication with the Shift Manager.

"* Keep Shift Manager advised of situation.

"* Request Shift Manager to call in off-site support as needed.

3.5 RADCON Representative Responsibilities 3.5.1 The RADCON Representative will:

"* Advise the Incident Commander of radiological hazards.

"* Ensure the Incident Commander is aware of areas of significant radiation exposure and airborne radioactivity that may affect stay time for team members.

"* Notify the Incident Commander of any team members limitations in regards to stay time.

4.0 ATTACHMENTS None LAST PAGE PAGE 2 OF 2 REVISION 3

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 1 OF 13 I JBPROMNEMAUEI BROWNS FERRY NUJCLEAR PLANT JPM NUMBER: 181 TITLE: CLASSIFY THE EVENT PER THE REP (GASEOUS RELEASE RATE--C-SI-4.8.B.l.a.1)

TASK NUMBER: S-000-EM-21 SUBMITTED BY: DATE:

VALIDATED BY: DATE:

APPROVED: DATE:

TRAINING PLANT CONCURRENCE: DATE:

OPERATIONS Examination JPMs Require Operations Training Manager or Designee Approval and Plant Concurrence

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 2 OF 13 I OBPROMNEMAUEI BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 0 10/1/96 ALL INITIAL ISSUE 1 12/10/96 2,3,9-11 PROCEDURE REVISION 2 10/28/98 3, 6,7,12 PROCEDURE REVISION AND UPDATE 3 11/16/99 2,3,4 PROCEDURE REVISION 4 9/8/01 3, 5, 6, 8, 12, 13 PROCEDURE REVISION

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 3 OF 13 IO PEFRACIESR BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT OPERATOR: SS#

RO SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER: 181 TASK NUMBER: S-000-EM-21 (SRO ONLY)

TASK TITLE: CLASSIFY THE EVENT PER THE REP K/A NUMBER: 2.4.38 K/A RATING: RO 2.2 SRO: 4.0 TASK STANDARD: THE EVENT IS CLASSIFIED AS AN NOUE BASED ON 0-SI 4.8.B.l.a.1 RELEASE FRACTION > 2.0 FOR GREATER THAN 1 HOUR.

LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR X PLANT CONTROL ROOM REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: EPIP-1, REV. 29, EPIP-2, REV. 22 VALIDATION TIME: CONTROL ROOM: 12 MIN LOCAL:

MAX. TIME ALLOWED: (Completed for Time Critical JPMs only)

PERFORMANCE TIME: CONTROL ROOM LOCAL COMMENTS:

Additional comment sheets attached? YES NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY UNSATISFACTORY SIGNATURE: DATE:

EXAMINER

I BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT I

IN-SIMULATOR: I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. I will provide initiating cues and reports on other actions when directed by you. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied. When your task is given, you will repeat the task and I will acknowledge "That's Correct". (OR "That's Incorrect",

if applicable). When you have completed your assigned task, you will say, "my task is complete" and I will acknowledge that your task is complete.

INITIAL CONDITIONS: You are the SHIFT MANAGER/SRO. Unit 2 has just scrammed on low level from 100% power. The Unit 2 Board Operator acknowledges alarm "Reactor Zone Exhaust Radiation High", 2-RA-90 142A, and refers to ARP 2-XA-55-3A, Window 21. The Operator acknowledges that the Control Room, Reactor Zone, and Refueling Zone Isolates, and all SBGT trains start. "Rx Bldg Area Radiation High" is also in alarm, and the Operator verifies that RCIC Room 2 RE-90-26 is reading 350 MR/HR and trending upward. "RCIC Steam Line Leak Detection Temp. High" is alarming due to FCV 71-2 and 3 failing to close automatically on an isolation signal (Operator closes valves manually).

INITIATING CUES: The Log AUO informs you that he/she has just completed 0-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 and the release fraction is 3.1 at 1400 hours0.0162 days <br />0.389 hours <br />0.00231 weeks <br />5.327e-4 months <br />. The Log AUO continues to monitor the gaseous release rate and informs you that the release fraction is trending downward.

At 1515 hours0.0175 days <br />0.421 hours <br />0.0025 weeks <br />5.764575e-4 months <br /> the release fraction is 2.1. Using the following parameters provided to you by the Control Room operating crew, CLASSIFY THE EVENT according to the EPIP's and perform any required actions.

Reactor Level--(+33 inches on Normal Range)

Reactor Pressure--968 psig DW Pressure--l.38 psig DW Temperature--148 degrees F DW Radiation--RR-90-256 reading normal Torus Temperature--89 degrees F Torus Pressure--l.42 psig Torus Level--(+3 inches on normal band) 0-SI-4.8.B.l.a Release Fraction--2.1 NOTE: Unit 2 conditions are fairly stable.

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 5 OF 13 START TIME:

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical Refers to EPIP 1 to determine level of event.

Standard:

SHIFT MANAGER/SED refers to EPIP 1, Section 4.0, Radioactivity Releases and declares an NOUE (4.1-U) based on gaseous release rates exceeding ANY limit (SI-4.8.B.l.a.1 Release Fraction 2.1) in Table 4.1-U and Duration of > 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />.

SAT UNSAT___N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical Implements EPIP-2 NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT.

Standard:

SHIFT MANAGER/SED recognizes/implements an NOUE per EPIP-2.

SAT UNSAT N/AC COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 6 OF 13 NOTIFICATION OF BROWNS FERRY UNUSUAL EVENT EPIP-2 NUCLEAR PLANT 3.0 INSTRUCTIONS 3.1 Notification of the Operations Duty Specialist (ODS)

NOTE:The ODS should be notified within 5 minutes after the emergency event is declared.

Performance Step  : Critical X Not Critical 3.1.1 Complete Attachment A (Initial Notification Form).

Standard:

ATTACHMENT A is complete with EAL Designator 4.1-U NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT status on Unit 2. Unit 2 was at 100% power and scrammed on low water level. RCIC developed a steam leak in the Reactor Building due to FCV 71-2 and 3 failing to close automatically. Valves were closed manually. 0-SI-4.8.B.I.a release fraction is presently 2.1 and has exceeded 2.0 for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> and 15 minutes. Unit 2 is fairly stable with the release fraction trending downward. (INFORMATION GIVEN IN INITIAL CONDITIONS &

INITIATING CUES EXCEPT SAL DESIGNATOR) NOTE: THIS IS GENERIC INFORMATION FOR DESCRIPTION OF EVENT--ALL THIS EXACT INFORMATION IS NOT REQUIRED FOR ACCEPTANCE UNDER BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF EVENT.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 7 OF 13 Performance Step Critical X Not Critical 3.1.2 Notify the ODS and Provide the information from Attachment A.

Note: Utilize the direct ring-down ODS phone when making this notification or as applicable dial direct.

ODS Telephone Numbers 5-1-751-1700 5-1-751-2495 If the ODS cannot be reached, Then contact the State of Alabama directly by requesting the Rad Health Duty Officer at:

Day Shift 8 a.m.-5 p.m.

9-1-334-206-5391 Holidays-Weekends-Offshifts 9-1-334-242-4378 Standard:

NOTIFIES the ODS within 5 minutes from the time of declaration of event and provides the information from Attachment A.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 8 OF 13 Performance Step  : Critical Not Critical.X 3.1.3 Fax a copy of Attachment A to the ODS for confirmation of information (or state if contacted directly.)

ODS Fax AL Rad Health 5-1-751-8620 9-1-334-206-5387 I CUE: FAKING TO THE ODS WILL BE SIMULATED.

Standard:

SIMULATED faxing a copy of Attachment A to the ODS.

SAT UNSAT I _N/A_ COMMENTS:

3.1.4 Receive confirmation call from the ODS (to verify notification of the State of Alabama)

(NA this step if the State was contacted directly).

I CUE: REQUEST SIKJLATOR CONSOLE OPERATOR TO CALL AND CONFIRM THAT ODS HAS NOTIFIED THE STATE OF ALABAMA J

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 9 OF 13 3.2 NOTIFICATION OF SITE PERSONNEL Performance Step Critical X Not Critical 3.2.1 Provide the Unit 1, Unit Operator with a completed copy of Attachment A.

Standard:

SIMULATED providing the Unit 1 Operator with a completed copy of Attachment A.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

I I*

CU:

CUE *P UNIT 1 OPRAO HA Ao UN I 1* ** 4 P A O HA *

  • A*

CoPY OFATAHET A.

CO P O* F 4 A T4 A* ***HM N A . * ***

  • I Performance Step  : Critical X Not Critical 3.2.2 Direct the Unit 1, Unit Operator to make notifications from Attachment B (Unit 1, Unit Operator Notification), utilizing information from Attachment A.

Standard:

SIMULATED by calling Console Operator and requesting Unit 1 Operator and directing to make notifications per Attachment B, utilizing information from Attachment A.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 10 OF 13 Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X 3.2.3 Make the following P.A. announcement:

THIS IS (NAME), SHIFT MANAGER. A NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT HAS BEEN DECLARED ON UNIT 2 . I HAVE ASSUMED THE DUTIES OF SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR.

Standard:

P. A. Announcement was made giving name, SHIFT MANAGER'S Position, NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT status on Unit 2, and informing crew that the SHIFT MANAGER has the duties of SED.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X 3.2.4 Notify the Plant Manager or alternate.

Standard:

SHIFT MANAGER SIMULATES calling the Plant Manager by calling the Simulator Console Operator.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 11 OF 13 Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X 3.3 OFFSITE DOSE ASSESSMENT 3.3.1 Evaluate the need for offsite dose assessment.

(N/A STEP IF NOT APPLICABLE)

ICUE: DOSE ASSESSMENT STEP IS NOT APPLICABLE.1 3.3.1.1 When offsite dose assessment is required obtain the information from the CECC when operational.

3.3.1.2 If the CECC is not operational, contact the TSC, when staffed or the RADCON Shift Supervisor and request the implementation of EPIP 14, for manual dose assessment.

Standard:

SHIFT MANAGER/SED addresses the OFFSITE DOSE ASSESSMENT and N/A's STEP.

SAT UNSAT N/AC COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 12 OF 13 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical 3.4 NOTIFICATION OF THE NRC 3.4.1 Notify the NRC immediately or within within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> and if requested by the NRC maintain an open and continuous communications channel.

Note: Utilize the Emergency Notification System (ENS) when making this notification. Dial the first number listed on the sticker affixed to the ENS telephone, by dialing 9 "The TEN Digit Number Listed on the ENS Telephones".

IF the number is busy, THEN select in order, the alternate numbers until a connection is achieved.

Standard:

PERFORMER notified NRC on the Simulator by calling the console operator and requesting NRC. Informing NRC that the SHIFT MANAGER/SED has declared a NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT status on Unit 2.

SAT UNSAT N/AE COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 181 REV. NO. 4 PAGE 13 OF 13 Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X 3.5 PERIODIC EVALUATION OF THE EVENT 3.5.1 Continue to Evaluate the event by using EPIP-1 as conditions warrant.

I CUE: ANOTHER SHIFT MANAGER (SRO)

THAT WILL BE ALL FOR NOW!

IS HERE TO RELIEVE YOU.

I END OF TASK 1

STOP TIME

EMERGENCY EP1P-I CLASSIFICATION SECTION I CLASSIFICATION PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION INSTRUCTIONS CLASSIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS 1.0 PURPOSE Provide guidance to the Shift Manager or Site Emergency Director (SED) for proper declaration and classification of emergencies and ensure emergency classifications are consistent with those used by state and local governments and the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC).

2.0 SCOPE This procedure applies to site events that constitute an emergency consistent with those site specific events outlined in NUMARC/NESP-007 August 1992. The Shift Manager and the SED are the only persons authorized to make the emergency classification determination.

3.0 INSTRUCTION 3.1 Following plant events or transients, review EPIP-1 Section I1, 1.0 through 8.0 and determine if an event should be classified as an emergency.

Note: (1) If an emergency action level for a higher classification was exceeded, but the present situation indicates a lower classification, the fact that the higher classification occurred shall be reported to the NRC and the CECC, if staffed, or ODS if the CECC is not staffed. The higher classification should not be declared.

(2) If an emergency action level was met but the emergency has been totally resolved, the emergency class that was appropriate shall be reported to the ODS and the NRC but should not be declared.

3.1.1 EPIP- I Section 1I, 1.0 through 8.0 captures events in eight major categories as listed on the event classification index.

3.1.2 Each actual condition in a category is given a numeric designator indicating the section followed by the numeric designator for the specific EAL within the section and an alpha numeric designator for the event class.

Example: 5.2-U These designators provide for cross-reference between the specific EALs and the basis document which provides technical supporting information for the EALs and may aid the Shift Manager/SED in classifying events.

PAGE 3 OF 207 REVISION 29

EMERGENCY EPIP-I CLASSIFICATION SECTION I CLASSIFICATION PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION INSTRUCTIONS (3.1 Continued)

Notes, curves, or tables contained in the Event Classification Matrix, are identified by a flag in the event classification window. The window contains an appropriate symbol to alert the user that a corresponding note, curve, or table applies to the step.

Example: KKKý 1 Notes, curves, or tables contained in the Event Classification Matrix, that are identified by a flag that contains an asterisk shall alert the user that the corresponding note, curve, or table is unit specific. The user must insure that the information being applied to the EAL is associated with the applicable unit.

K*1 K N Example:

3.2 If the event is determined to be one of the four emergency classifications, the Shift Manager assumes the responsibility of SED until relieved by the Plant Manager or designee.

3.2.1 Implement one of the following procedures as applicable:

EPIP-2 Notification of Unusual Event EPIP-3 Alert EPIP-4 Site Area Emergency EPIP-5 General Emergency 3.2.2 Continue to review the emergency conditions in the event classification matrix and escalate, terminate, or implement recovery as appropriate. Refer to EPIP-16 for termination or recovery.

3.3 If the event is determined not to be one of the four event classifications, continue to monitor plant conditions for possible changes that could result in reaching an event classification.

END OF TEXT REVISION 29 PAGE 4 OF 207 CLASSIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS

EMERGENCY EPIP-1 CLASSIFICATION SECTION I PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION GLOSSARY ABBREVIATIONS, ACRONYMS, AND DEFINITIONS The following is a list of terms and phrases found in EPIP-1. Each term or phrase is provided with a meaning, to ensure consistent use and understanding.

TERM/PHRASE MEANING/DEFINITION ADS Automatic Depressurization System AOl Abnormal Operating Instruction ARI Alternate Rod Insertion ARM Area Radiation Monitor ARP Alarm Response Procedure ATWS Anticipated Transient Without Scram Auto Automatic Bomb An explosive device BWR Boiling Water Reactor Can/Cannot be determined The current value or status of an identified parameter relative to that specified in the instruction can/cannot be ascertained using all available indications (direct and indirect, singly or in combination).

Can/Cannot be Maintained The value of the identified parameter(s) is/is not able to be kept Above/Below above/below specified limits. This definition includes making an evaluation that considers both current and future system performance in relation to the current value and trend of the parameter(s). "Cannot" does not imply that the actual value of the parameter must first exceed the specified limit.

Can/Cannot be Restored The value of the identified parameter(s) is/is not able to be returned to Above/Below above/below specified limits within a reasonable time after having exceeded the specified limits. This determination includes making an evaluation that considers both current and future system performance in relation to the current value and trend of the parameter(s).

GLOSSARY PAGE 5 OF 207 REVISION 29

EMERGENCY EPIP-1 CLASSIFICATION SECTION I PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION GLOSSARY (CONTINUED)

TERM/PHRASE MEANING/DEFINITION CAD Containment Atmosphere Dilution CAS Central Alarm Station CDE Committed Dose Equivalent CECC Central Emergency Control Center Ci Curie Civil Disturbance A group of 20 or more persons violently protesting station operations or activities at the site.

cm3 Cubic Centimeters CS Core Spray deg Degrees DG Diesel Generator Drywell The upper portion of the Primary Containment which encloses the Reactor Pressure Vessel.

EAL Emergency Action Level ECCS Emergency Core Cooling System ECL Effluent Concentration Limit EPA Environmental Protection Agency EPIP Emergency Plan Implementing Procedure EQ Environmental Qualification Event Assessment of an EVENT commences when recognition is made that one or more of the conditions associated with the event exists. Implicit in this definition is the need for timely assessment, i.e. within 15 minutes.

Explosion A rapid, violent, unconfined combustion, or a catastrophic failure of pressurized equipment that imparts energy of sufficient force to potentially damage permanent structures required for safe operation.

F Fahrenheit REVISION 29 PAGE 6 OF 207 GLOSSARY

EMERGENCY EPIP-1 CLASSIFICATION SECTION I PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION GLOSSARY (CONTINUED)

TERM/PHRASE MEANING/DEFINITION Fire Combustion characterized by heat and light. Sources of smoke such as slipping drive belts or overheated electrical components do not constitute fires. Observation of flame is preferred but is not required if large quantities of smoke and heat are observed.

Flammable Gas Combustible gasses maintained at concentrations less than the lower explosive limit. Will not explode due to ignition.

GOI General Operating Instruction gm Gram HCTL Heat Capacity Temperature Limit Hostage A person(s) held as leverage against the station to ensure that demands will be met by the station.

HPCI High Pressure Coolant Injection HR Hour IN. Inches KV Kilovolt LCO Limiting Condition for Operation LOCA Loss Of Coolant Accident LPCI Low Pressure Coolant Injection M RFP Minimum RPV Flooding Pressure MCUTL Maximum Core Uncovery Time Limit MIN Minute GLOSSARY PAGE 7 OF 207 REVISION 29

EMERGENCY EPIP-I CLASSIFICATION SECTION I PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION GLOSSARY I

(CONTINUED)

TERMIPHRASE MEANING/DEFINITION Modes of Operation Mode Title Reactor Mode Avg. Reactor Coolant Switch Position Temperature (OF)

I Power Operation Run NA 2 Startup Refuel(') or NA Startup/Hot Standby 3 Hot Shutdown(.) Shutdown > 212 4 Cold Shutdown"') Shutdown < 212 5 Refueling(b) Shutdown or Refuel NA (a) All reactor vessel head closure bolts fully tensioned.

(b) One or more reactor vessel head closure bolts less that fully tensioned.

MPH Miles per Hour mrem Millirem MSIV Main Steam Isolation Valve MSL Main Steam Line MSRV Main Steam Relief Valve NESP National Environmental Studies Project NUMARC Nuclear Management and Resources Council ODS Operations Duty Specialist 01 Operating Instruction OSC Operations Support Center PCIS Primary Containment Isolation System REVISION 29 PAGE 8 OF 207 GLOSSARY

EMERGENCY EPIP-1 CLASSIFICATION SECTION I PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION GLOSSARY (CONTINUED)

TERM/PHRASE MEANING/DEFINITION Primary Containment The drywell, the vent system, and the torus.

Primary System Primary systems comprise the pipes, valves and other equipment connected to the RPV such that a reduction in RPV pressure will effect a decrease in the flow of steam or water being discharged through an unisolable break in the system.

Projectile An object ejected, thrown, or launched towards a plant structure. The source of a projectile may be offsite or onsite. Damage is sufficient to cause concern regarding the integrity of the affected structure or the operability or reliability of safety equipment contained therein.

Protected Area Protected Area encompasses all areas within the security protected area fence.

PSIG Pounds Per Square Inch Gauge R Rad RCIC Reactor Core Isolation Cooling RCS Reactor Coolant System REP Radiological Emergency Plan RHR Residual Heat Removal RPS Reactor Protection System RPV Reactor Pressure Vessel Sabotage Deliberate damage, misalignment, misoperation of plant equipment with the intent to render equipment inoperable.

SEC Second Secondary The spaces immediately adjacent to, or surrounding, the primary Containment containment from which the Reactor Building Ventilation System and the Standby Gas Treatment System provides a filtered elevated release.

SED Site Emergency Director SGTS Standby Gas Treatment System GLOSSARY PAGE 9 OF 207 REVISION 29

EMERGENCY EPIP-I CLASSIFICATION SECTION I PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION GLOSSARY (CONTINUED)

TERMIPHRASE MEANING/DEFINITION Significant Transient An unplanned event involving one or more of the following: (1) Automatic turbine runback >25% thermal ,reactor power: (2) Electrical load reduction >25% full electrical load: (3) Reactor scram: (4) Valid ECCS initiation: or (5) thermal power oscillations > 10%.

SI Surveillance Instruction Site Boundary The Site Boundary is that line beyond which the land or property is not owned, leased, or otherwise controlled by TVA.

Subcritical Reactor power below the heating range and not trending upward.

Suppression Pool The water volume contained in the suppression chamber intended to condense steam from a primary system break inside the drywell.

Suppression Chamber The structure enclosing the suppression pool water and the atmosphere above it.

TAF Top of Active Fuel TEDE Total Effective Dose Equivalent Torus The lower portion of the primary containment which encloses the suppression pool.

Toxic Gas A gas that is dangerous to life or limb by reason of inhalation or skin contact.

TSC Technical Support Center Valid An indication, report, or condition is considered to be valid wvhen it is conclusively verified by redundant indicators or actual observation by plant personnel.

Visible Damage Damage to equipment that is readily observable without measurements.

testing, or analysis. Damage is sufficient enough to cause concern regarding the continued operability or reliability of affected safety structure, system, or component.

Vital Area An area that contains equipment necessary for the safe operations and shutdown of the plant.

WRGERMS Wide Range Gaseous Effluent Radiation Monitoring System Year END OF TEXT PAGERVI OF 207 GLOSSARY REVISION 29

EMERGENCY EPIP-I CLASSIFICATION SECTION I CLASSIFICATION PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION INDEX EVENT CLASSIFICATION INDEX SECTION 1.0 REACTOR 1.1 WATER LEVEL 1.2 SCRAM FAILURE 1.3 REACTOR COOLANT ACTIVITY 1.4 MSL/OFFGAS RADIATION 1.5 LOSS OF DECAY HEAT REMOVAL SECTION 2.0 PRIMARY 2.1 PRIMARY CONTAINMENT PRESSURE CONTAINMENT 2.2 PRIMARY CONTAINMENT HYDROGEN 2.3 DRYWELL RADIATION 2.4 DRYWELL INTERNAL LEAKAGE 2.5 LOSS OF PRIMARY CONTAINMENT SECTION 3.0 SECONDARY 3.1 SECONDARY CONTAINMENT CONTAINMENT TEMPERATURE 3.2 SECONDARY CONTAINMENT RADIATION SECTION 4.0 RADIOACTIVITY 4.1 GASEOUS EFFLUENT RELEASES 4.2 MAIN STEAM LINE BREAK 4.3 LIQUID EFFLUENT SECTION 5.0 LOSS OF POWER 5.1 LOSS OF AC POWER 5.2 LOSS OF DC POWER SECTION 6.0 HAZARDS 6.1 RADIOLOGICAL 6.2 CONTROL ROOM EVACUATION 6.3 TURBINE FAILURE 6.4 FIRE/EXPLOSION 6.5 TOXIC GASES 6.6 FLAMMABLE GASES 6.7 SECURITY 6.8 VEHICLE CRASH SECTION 7.0 NATURAL EVENTS 7.1 EARTHQUAKE 7.2 TORNADO/HIGH WINDS 7.3 FLOOD SECTION 8.0 EMERGENCY 8.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIRECTOR 8.2 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION JUDGEMENT 8.3 LOSS OF ASSESSMENT CAPABILITY 8.4 OTHER PAGE II OF 207 REVISION 29 CLASSIFICATION INDEX

EMERGENCY EPIP-I CLASSIFICATION SECTION I CLASSIFICATION PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION INDEX PROCEDURE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK REVISION 29 PAGE 12 OF 207

EMIERGENCY EPLP-1 CLASSIFICATION SECTION II 4.0 RADIACTIVITY PROCEDURE EVENT CLASSIFICATION MATRIX RELEASE RADIOACTIVITY RELEASES 4.0 4.0 RADIACTIVITY PAGE 33 OF 207 REVISION 29 RELEASE

EPIP-I EMERGENCY 4.0 RADIACTIVITY SECTION II CLASSIFICATION RELEASE EVENT CLASSIFICATION MATRIX PROCEDURE NOTES:

NOTE 4.I-U Prior to making this emergency classification based upon the WRGERMS indication, asses the release tA either of the lbllowing 1.Actual field measurements exceed the limits in Table 4.1 -U

2. S14.8.B.I.a.l Release Fraction exceeds 2.0 It'neithe-as-sesmnt can be coaxt.ed wdun 60 minutes kxi the doclaticn must be made on Ir valid WRGERM reaing NOTE 4.I-A Prior to making this emergency classification based upon the WRGERMS indication, assess the release by eitha of the bllowMng:

1.Actual field masurearnents exceed the limits in Table 4. 1-A

2. SI 4.8.B. .a.l Release Fraction excedq 200 Iflrrnher assessment can be oandktd vwthin 15 minutes thenflrw deuraion must be made on the valid WRGERMS raiding NOTE 4.1-S Prior to making this emergency classification based upon the Gaseous Release Rate indication, asses the release by either ofthe tllowIng rmeds:

4

1. Actual field measurements ec lthe limits in Table .1-S.
2. Projected or Actual Dose Assesinnts exceed 100 ormen TEDE or 500 nmern CDE.

If neither assessment can be conducted within 15 minutes then the dclaration mast be made based on the valid WRGERMS reaing.

NOTE 4.1-G Prior to making this emergency cla&sification a]sed upon the Gaseous Release Rate indication, asses t relese by eithe of the bollowung methods:

I. Actual field mnasuaernents exceed the limits in Table 4.1 -G.

2. Projeted. or Actual Dose Asse--s-ents excdxl 10) mirern TEDE or 50(A) mrem CDE.

If neither assessment can be conductel vvifhin 15 minutes then the declaration must be made atsed on the valid WRGERMS CURVES/TABLES:

Table 4.1-U RELEASE LIMITS FOR UNUSUAL EVENT TYPE MONITORING METHOD LIMIT DURATION STACK NOBLE GAS (WROERMS) 288 X 10'* Clsec I HOUR GASEOUS RELEASE RATE GASEOUS RELEASE RATE S14.8.B.I.a.I RELEASE FRACTION 2.0 I HOUR FIELD ASSESSMENT TEAM 0.10 MREM;,HRy- I HOUR SITE BOUNDARY RADIATION READING Table 4.1-A RELEASE LIMITS FOR ALERT TYPE I MONITORING METHOD LIMIT DURATION STACK NOBLE GAS (WR1ERNS) 288 X 10t tCisec 15 MINUTES GASEOUS RELEASE RATE SI 4.8.B.I.a.I RELEASE FRACTION 200 15 MINUTES GASEOUS RELEASE RATE FIELD ASSESSMENT TEAM 0IREMtHR y -

IH 15 MINUTES Ip SITE BOUNDARY RADIATION READING Table 4.1-S RELEASE LIMITS FOR SITE AREA EMERGENCY TYPE MONITORING METHOD LIMIT DUIRATION GASEOUS RELEASE RATE STACK NOBLE GAS (WRGERNS) I 5.9X00'IiCisec 15 MINUTES SITE BOUNDARY RADIATION READING FIELD ASSESSMENT TEAM 100 NIRENII'HR I- HOUR SITE BOUNDARY IODINE-131 FIELD ASSESSMENT TEAMI 3.9N 10 " ItCI crM I HOUR Table 4. I-G RELEASE LIMITS FOR GENERAL EMERGENCY MONITORING METHOD LIMIT DUIRATION TYPE -... .-- C CrCr

[;YMZPO*IIS PFTIASE RATE ISTACK NOBLE GAS (WRGERNX IREM/HR *"- I Hot R I GASEOUS RELEASE RATE TACK NOBLE GAS (WRCER,% 000 SITE BOINDARY RADIATION READING FIELD LASSESSMEN I I LEAI I HOU R 39NI,,0 , PCl cm, SITE BOUNDARY IODINE-131 I ELD ASSEfSS\MEN L I LAAM PAGE 34 OF 207 4.0 RADIACTIVITY REVISION 29 RELEASE

EMERGENCY EPIP-1 CLASSIFICATION SECTION If 4.0 RADIOACTIVE PROCEDURE EVENT CLASSIFICATION MATRIX RELEASE GLSIIASEOUS EFFCTION MAI t BREAKIATV 4.0N DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION 4.1-U K K4.

Main Steam Line break outside Primary Containment A Gaseous release exceeds ANY limit and duration in Table 4.1-U. with isolation.

OPERATING CONDITION:

- Mode I -Mode 3

- Mode2 Gaseous release exceeds ANY limit and duration in Table 4. 1-A.

OPERATING CONDITION:

-All 4.1-S K4.2-S EITHER of the following conditions exists: Unisolable Main Steam Line break outside Primarv

" Gaseous release exceeds or is expected to exceed Containment.

ANY limit and duration in Table 4. I-S.

" Dose assessment indicates actual or projected dose consequences above 100 mrem TEDE or 500 mrem thyroid CDE.

OPERATING CONDITION:

OPERATING CONDITION: - Mode I - Mode 3

-All - Mode 2 4.1-G K -1 EITHER of the following conditions exists:

"* Gaseous release exceeds or is expected to exceed ANY limit and duration in Table 4. 1-G.

"* Dose assessment indicates actual or projected dose consequences above 1000 mrem TEDE or 5000 rnrem thvroid CDE.

OPERATING CONDITION:

-All 4.0 RADIACTIVITY PAGE 35 OF 207 REVISION 29 RELEASE

EPIP-1 EMERGENCY 4.0 RADIACTIVITY SECTION II CLASSIFICATION RELEASE EVENT CLASSIFICATION MATRIX PROCEDURE NOTES:

CURVES/TABLES:

REVISION 29 PAGE 36 OF 207 4.0 RADIACTIVITY RELEASE

EMERGENCY EPIP-I CLASSIFICATION SECTION II 4.0 RADIOACTIVE PROCEDURE EVENT CLASSIFICATION MATRIX RELEASE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION 4.3-U 2

ci)

Liquid release rate exceeds 20 times ECL as determined by chemistry sample AND r Release duration exceeds or will exceed 60 minutes.

2 OPERATING CONDITION:

- All 4.3-A Liquid release rate exceeds 2000 times ECL as >

determined by chemistry sample r AND Release duration exceeds or will exceed 15 minutes.

OPERATING CONDITION:

- All 4

2 4.0 RADIACTIVITY PAGE 37 OF 207 REVISION 29 RELEASE

EPIP-1 EMERGENCY 4.0 RADIACTIVITY SECTION II CLASSIFICATION RELEASE EVENT CLASSIFICATION MATRIX PROCEDURE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK REVISION 29 PAGE 38 OF 207 4.0 RADIACTIVITY RELEASE

TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT EMERGENCY PLAN IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURE EPIP- 2 NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT REVISION 22 PREPARED BY: TIM CORNELIUS PHONE: 2038 RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION: EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS APPROVED BY: GILBERT LI'ITLE DATE: 03109/2001 EFFECTIVE DATE: 03/31/2001 LEVEL OF USE: REFERENCE USE QUALITY-RELATED

REVISION LOG Procedure Number: EPIP-2 Revision Number: 22 Pages Affected:2,7,8,9,10 Description of Change:

IC-27 This change is being conducted to incorporate the management of NRC Commitment changes as prescribed in the correspondence from site licensing RIMS R08000217713, to remove the Public Information Officer from the notification form and to human factor the notification and follow-up notification forms.

Page 2 - change to step 3. 1.1 involves human factoring the Notification Form Title.

Page 7 - changes involves removing the "NRC Commitment Brackets to step requiring the review of PORC and the human factoring of applicable steps.

Page 7 - change involves human factoring attachment title.

Page 8 - change involves human factoring attachment title and modifying information to ensure consistency with NRC guidance.

Page 9 - change involves removing the Public Information Officer from the Attachment B notifications along with the NRC Commitment Brackets Page 10 - change involved adding a clarify statement concerning the appropriate use of the Follow-up Notification Form.

NOTIFICATION OF BROWNS FERRY UNUSUAL EVENT nrir-z NUCLEAR PLANT 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 Provide for timely notification of appropriate individuals or organizations when the Shift Manager has determined by EPIP- I that an incident has occurred which is classified as a NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT.

1.2 Provide for periodic analysis of the current situation by the Shift Manger/Site Emergency Director (SED) to determine whether the NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT should be terminated, continued, or upgraded to a more serious classification.

2.0 SCOPE This procedure applies to emergency events that are classified as a Notification of Unusual Event by EPIP- 1, Emergency Classification Procedure.

PAGE 1 OF 10 REVISION 22

NOTIFICATION OF BROWNS FERRY UNUSUAL EVENT EPIP-2 NUCLEAR PLANT 3.0 INSTRUCTIONS 3.1 Notification of the Ouerations Duty Specialist (ODS)

Note: The ODS should be notified within 5 minutes after the emergency event is declared.

Date: / /

3.1.1 Complete Attachment A (Initial Notification Form).

INITIALS TIM 3.1.2 Notify the ODS and Provide the information from TIM Attachment A. Imý Note: Utilize the direct ring-down ODS phone when making this notification or as applicable dial direct.

ODS Telephone Numbers 5-751-1700 5-751-2495 If the ODS cannot be reached within 10 minutes, Then contact the State of Alabama directly by requesting the Rad Health Duty Officer at:

Day Shift 8 a.m. - 5 p.m.

9-1-334-206-5391 Holidays-Weekends-Offshifts 9-1-334-242-4378 3.1.3 Fax a copy of Attachment A to the ODS for confirmation TIME of information or state if contacted directly). INIThI ODS Fax AL Rad Health 5-751-8620 9-1-334-206-5387 3.1.4 Receive confirmation call from the ODS (to verify notification of the State of Alabama) (NA this step if the State was contacted INITALUS NE directly).

PAGE 2 OF 10 REVISION 22

NOTIFICATION OF BROWNS FERRY UNUSUAL EVENT EPIP-2 NUCLEAR PLANT 3.0 INSTRUCTIONS (CONTINUED) 3.2 NOTIFICATION OF SITE PERSONNEL 3.2.1 Provide the Unit 1, Unit Operator with a completed INITILýS lair copy of Attachment A.

3.2.2 Direct the Unit 1, Unit Operator to make notifications TM from Attachment B ( Unit 1, Unit Operator INITILs Notification), utilizing information from Attachment A.

3.2.3 Make the following plant P.A. announcement:

INITIALS TIME THIS IS (NAME), SHIFT MANAGER. A NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT HAS BEEN DECLARED ON UNIT . I HAVE ASSUMED THE DUTIES OF SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR.

3.2.4 Notify the Plant Manager or alternate.

LNTIALS TIME 3.3 OFFSITE DOSE ASSESSMENT 3.3.1 Evaluate the need for offsite dose assessment.

IBTmLALS TIME (N/A STEP IF NOT APPLICABLE) 3.3.1.1 When offsite dose assessment is required obtain the information from the CECC when operational.

3.3.1.2 If the CECC is not operational, contact the TSC, when staffed or the RADCON Shift Supervisor and request the implementation of EPIP 14, for dose assessment.

PAGE 3 OF 10 REVISION 22

NOTIFICATION OF BROWNS FERRY UNUSUAL EVENT EPIP-2 NUCLEAR PLANT 3.0 INSTRUCTIONS (CONTINUED) 3.4 NOTIFICATION OF THE NRC 3.4.1 Notify the NRC immediately or within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> and if INITIALS TIME requested by the NRC maintain an open and continuous communications channel.

Note: Utilize the Emergency Notification System (ENS) when making this notification. Dial the first number listed on the sticker affixed to the ENS telephone, by dialing 9-1 "The Ten Digi Number Listed on the ENS Telephones".

If the number is busy, Then select in order, the alternate numbers until a connection is achieved. No access codes are required.

PAGE 4 OF 10 REVISION 22

NOTIFICATION OF BROWNS FERRY UNUSUAL EVENT EPIP-2 NUCLEAR PLANT 3.0 INSTRUCTIONS (CONTINUED) 3.5 PERIODIC EVALUATION OF THE EVENT 3.5.1 Continue to Evaluate the event by using EPIP-1 as conditions warrant.

3.5.2 If other EAL conditions exist indicating the current emergency classification or significant changes in plant conditions have occurred since the last update to the ODS, and the CECC is not staffed, Then, Complete the "Follow-Up" Notification Form (Attachment C), notify the ODS and provide the new information. Utilize the direct ring-down ODS phone when making this notification or as applicable dial direct.

ODS 751-2495, 1700 Note If the ODS cannot be reached, Then contact the State of Alabama directly by requesting the Rad Health Duty Officer at:

Day Shift 8 am. - 5 p.m.

9-1-334-206-5391 Holidays-Weekends-Offshifts 9-1-334-242-4378 3.5.3 If the conditions warrants upgrading to a higher classifications, Then initiate the appropriate EPIP.

3.5.4 If the conditions warrant termination of the classification, Then enter the Termination section of this procedure at step 3.6.

3.5.5 Re-enter this procedural section as conditions warrant at step 3.5.1 or until directed to exit this procedure by steps 3.5.3 or 3.5.4.

PAGE 5 OF 10 REVISION 22

NOTIFICATION OF BROWNS FERRY UNUSUAL EVENT EPIP-2 NUCLEAR PLANT 3.0 INSTRUCTIONS (CONTINUED) 3.6 TERMINATION OF THE EVENT If the situation no longer exists terminate the event and notify the following:

Date: / /

3.6.1 Notify the ODS of the termination of the emergency or IN*7TALS TamE the state directly if the ODS cannot be contacted.

3.6.2 Notify the NRC of the termination of the emergency.

INITIALS TIME 3.6.3 Notify the Plant Manager or Alternate of the termination of the emergency.

INITIALS TIoE 3.6.4 Complete Attachment A by providing the time and date of termination. LNITALS TIME 3.6.4 Notify the Unit 1, Unit Operator. Provide the Unit 1, Unit Operator with the termination time and date and TnDE

  • ITIrALS direct the Unit 1, Unit Operator to notify the individuals contacted on Attachment B of the termination of the emergency.

PAGE 6 OF 10 REVISION 22

NOTIFICATION OF BROWNS FERRY UNUSUAL EVENT EPIP-2 NUCLEAR PLANT 3.0 INSTRUCTIONS (CONTINUED) 3.7 CLOSURE OF THE NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT 3.7.1 Upon termination of the Notification of Unusual Event, INnTAL Tryý the Shift Manager shall send the completed EPIP-2 and all attachments to Emergency Preparedness (EP).

3.7.2 EP shall forward to the PORC Secretary the completed EPIP and all attachments for review by PORC.

INITIALS TaME 3.7.3 PORC Review Completed.

PORC Chairman DATE 3.7.4 After PORC review is completed the PORC secretary shall forward the signed EPIP-2 with all attachments to EP for documentation storage.

INITILLS TIME 4.0 ATTACHMENTS Attachment A - Initial Notification Form Attachment B - Unit 1, Unit Operator Notification Attachment C - Follow Up Information Form PAGE 7 OF 10 REVISION 22

NOTIFICATION OF EPIP BROWNS FERRY UNUSUAL EVENT Erlr -L NUCLEAR PLANT ATTACHMENT A (Page 1 of 1)

INITIAL NOTIFICATION FORM NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT El] THIS IS AN ACTUAL EVENT El THIS IS AN EXERCISE This is NAME A NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT has been declared at Browns Ferry affecting:

El Unit 1 [1 Unit 2 El Unit 3 El Common Event Declared: Time: Date:

EAL Designator:

Brief Description of the Event:

Radiological Conditions:

El No Abnormal Releases Offsite El Airborne Release Offsite El Liquid Release Offsite El Release Information Not Known at this time El There is no Protective Action Recommendation at this time.

El Ask,_"Please repeat the information you have received to ensure accuracy."

PAGE 8 OF 10 REVISION 22

NOTIFICATION OF BROWNS FERRY UNUSUAL EVENT EPIP-2 NUCLEAR PLANT ATTACHMENT B (Page 1 of 1)

UNIT 1, UNIT OPERATOR NOTIFICATIONS Date: / /

Note: All notifications should be made utilizing the information located on EPIP 2, Attachment A Received a completed copy of EPIP 2, Attachment A from the Site Emergency Director. INITIALS TIME Personnel Notifications Initial Notifications Termination Notifications Notify the Operations Manager Initials Time Initials Time (from the weekly duty list)

Notify the Vice President (from the weekly duty list) Initials Time Initials Time Notify the REP manager Initials Time Initials Time (from the weekly duty list)

Notify the Nuclear Security Shift Initials Time Initials Time Supervisor.

Ext. 3150 or 2219 Notify the NRC Resident Ext.

Initials Time Initials Time 2573, or 2572 or from the weekly duty list.

This is a Quality Assurance record with a retention of five years.

PAGE 9 OF 10 REVISION 22

NOTIFICATION OF BROWNS FERRY UNUSUAL EVENT EPIP-2 NUCLEAR PLANT ATTACHMENT C (Page 1 of 1)

FOLLOW-UP INFORMATION FORM NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT Ej THIS IS A REAL EVENT [] THIS IS A DRILL Note: This form is for conducting Follow-up Information only.

This is at Browns Ferry.

Name There has been a NOTIFICATION OF UNUSUAL EVENT declared at Browns Ferry affecting:

F1 Unit I El Unit 2 [] Unit 3 fl Common The Reactor is L] Shutdown Fi At Power Plant Conditions are [l Stable Li Deteriorating "Follow-Up" Information (e.g., Key Events, Status Changes)

Current Radiological Conditions are:

FH No Abnormal Releases Offsite Li Airborne Release Offsite LI Liquid Release Offsite F1 Release Information Not Known Additional Rad information: (e.g., release duration)

F- There is no Protective Action Recommendation at this time.

Please repeat the information you have received to ensure accuracy.

The time for this follow up is: Time: Date:

SIGNATURE:

LAST PAGE PAGE 10 OF 10 REVISION 22

ES-301 Control Room Systems Form ES-301-2 (R8, S1) and Facility Walk-Through Test Outline Facility: Browns Ferry Date of Examination: 9/17-9/19 2001 Exam Level (circle one): RO I SRO(l) / SRO(U) Operating Test No.: 1 B.1 Control Room Systems System / JPM Title Type Safety Code* Function CROSSTIE CAD TRAINS A AND B TO DRYWELL CONTROL M,A,C 3 a

AIR IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2-EOI APPENDIX 8G. (191F)

b. 2-EOI APPENDIX 12- PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING MA,S 9 FROM DRYWELL THROUGH FCV-84-20 (51 F-MOD).
c. START A RECIRC PUMP DURING POWER OPERATION.(JPM D,S 1 90).
d. D,S 2 PERFORM CONTROL ROOM ACTIONS REQUIRED TO ESTABLISH THE CONDENSATE/FEEDWATER SYSTEM AS AN RPV INJECTION SYSTEM. (14).
e. OPERATE RHR SYSTEM IN SUPPRESSION POOL COOLING M,S 5 MODE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2-EOI APPENDIX 17A. (69)
f. M,A,S 7 RESPOND TO CONTROL ROD DRIFT IN. (80F MODIFIED)
g. M,A,S 4 LINE UP INJECTION SYSTEMS - RCIC IN ACCORDANCE WITH EOI APPENDIX 5C (18 modified).

B.2 Facility Walk-Through

a. D 8 2/3-SSl-2-1 ATTACHMENT 1, SECTION 1.0, UNIT 2 REACTOR BUILDING FIRE. (16TC).
b. D,R 2 LINE UP ALTERNATE RPV INJECTION SYSTEM - FIRE SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2-EOI APPENDIX 7K (27F)

C. N 4 JPM NRC-2 FILL AND VENT THE STATOR COOLING SYSTEM 2-01-35A Type g Codes: (D)irect from bank, (M)odified from bank, (N)ew, (A)Iternate path, (C)ontrol room, (S)imulator, (L)ow-Power, (R)CA

ES-301 Control Room Systems Form ES-301-2 (R8, S1) and Facility Walk-Through Test Outline Facility: Browns Ferry Date of Examination: 9/17-9/19 2001 Exam Level (circle one): RO / SRO(l) / SROW) Operating Test No.: 1 B.1 Control Room Systems System / JPM Title Type Safety Code* Function

a. CROSSTIE CAD TRAINS A AND B TO DRYWELL CONTROL AIR IN M,A,C 3 ACCORDANCE WITH 2-EOI APPENDIX 8G. (191 F).
b. 2-EOI APPENDIX 12- PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING FROM M,A,S 9 DRYWELL THROUGH FCV-84-20 (51 F-MOD).

C. START A RECIRC PUMP DURING POWER OPERATION.(JPM 90). D,S 1

d. N/A
e. N/A
f. N/A
g. N/A B.2 Facility Walk-Through
a. 2/3-SSI-2-1 ATTACHMENT 1, SECTION 1.0, UNIT 2 REACTOR D 8 BUILDING FIRE. (16TC).
b. LINE UP ALTERNATE RPV INJECTION SYSTEM - FIRE SYSTEM IN D,R 2 ACCORDANCE WITH 2-EOI APPENDIX 7K (27F)
c. N/A
  • Type Codes: (D)irect from bank, (M)odified from bank, (N)ew, (A)lternate path, (C)ontrol room, (S)imulator, (L)ow-Power, (R)CA

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 1 OF 17 JPM NUMBER:39 NRC - Modified for control room use TITLE: EOI APPENDIX 8G - CROSSTIE CAD TO DRYWELL CONTROL AIR TASK NUMBER: U-000-EM-74 SUBMITTED BY: DATE:

VALIDATED BY: DATE:

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 2 OF 17 REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 2 11/28/94 1,2,3,4 REVISE TO NEW FORMAT 3 10/23/96 4,10 ADDEDED NON-CRITICAL STEP 4 11/02/97 ALL FORMAT, CHANGED MGT.

EXPECT. TO PLANT WORK EXPECTATIONS, ADDED 3-WAY 5 7/30/01 ALL NRC Revised JPM to include CR cues

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 3 OF 17 OPERATOR:

RO SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER:: 39 NRC TASK NUMBER: U-000-EM-74 TASK TITLE: CROSSTIE CAD TRAINS A AND B TO DRYWELL CONTROL AIR IN ACCORDANCE WITH EOI APPENDIX 8G K/A NUMBER:218000A2.03 K/A RATING: R03.4 SRO: 3.6 TASK STANDARD: PERFORM MANIPULATIONS REQUIRED TO ALIGN CONTAINMENT AIR DILUTION SYSTEMS A AND B TO THE DRYWELL CONTROL AIR SYSTEM LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR- PLANT CONTROL ROOM X REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: 3-EOI APPENDIX 8G, REV 4 VALIDATION TIME: CONTROL ROOM: 4Min LOCAL:

MAX. TIME ALLOWED: (Completed for Time CriticalJPMs only)

PERFORMANCE TIME: CONTROL ROOM- LOCAL COMMENTS:

Additional comment sheets attached? YES. NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY- UNSATISFACTORY-EXAMINER: DATE:

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE4 OF 17 IN-CONTROL ROOM I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. I will provide initiating cues, instrument readings, indication, and reports on other actions when directed by you.

You will simulate all actions. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied. When your task is given, you will repeat the task and I will acknowledge "That's Correct". (OR "That's Incorrect", if applicable). When you have completed your assigned task, you will say, "my task is complete" and I will acknowledge that your task is complete.

INITIAL CONDITIONS: You are an Operator. The Unit 3 reactor has scrammed due to low RPV level. EOI-I has been followed to RC/P-9.

INITIATING CUES: The UNIT SUPERVISOR has directed you to perform Appendix 8G.

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 5 OF 17 START TIME Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X WHEN REQUESTED BY EXAMINERdentify/obtain copy of required procedure.

Standard:

IDENTIFIED OR OBTAINEDcopy of 3-EOI APPENDIX 8G.

SATUNSATN/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 6 OF 17 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical

1. OPEN the following valves:

0 0-FCV-84-5, CAD SYSTEM A N2 SHUTOFF VALVE (Unit 3, Panel 9-54)

CUE: AFTER applicant placed 0-HS-84-5A in the OPEN position. RED valve position indicating lamp is illuminated.

Standard PLACED 0-HS-84-5A in the OPEN position and VERIFIED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

1PM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE7 OF 17 Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

CUE: After applicant places 0-FCV-84-16A in the OPEN position. RED valve position indicating lamp is illuminated.

Standard PLACED 0-FCV-84-16A in the OPEN position andVERIFIED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp.

SAT UNSAT N/A. - COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 8 OF 17 Performance Step: Critical- Not CriticalX

2. VERIFY O-PI-84-6/3, VAPORIZER A OUTLET PRESS, and O-PI-84-17/3, N2 VAPORIZER B OUTLET PRESS, indicate approximately 100psig (Unit 3, Panel 9-54 and 9-55).

CUE: When checked, 0-PI-84-6 and 0-PI-84-17 indicate approximately 100 psig.

Standard VERIFIED O-PI-84-6/3 and O-PI-84-17/3 indicating approximately 100psig.

SAT UNSAT N/A _ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 9 OF 17 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical

3. PLACE keylock switch 3-HS-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR in OPEN (Unit 3 , Panel 9-54).

CUE: After applicant simulates, 3-HS-84-48 is in the OPEN position.

Standard PLACED 3-HS-84-48 in the OPEN position.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 10 OF 17 Performance Step : Critical Not Critical.X_

4. CHECK OPEN3-FSV-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR (Unit 3, Panel 9-54).

CUE: AFTER applicant simulates placing 3-HS-84-48 in the OPEN position and checks light indications. RED valve position indicating lamp is illuminated.

Standard VERIFIED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp above 3-HS-84-48.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 1 OF 17 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical_

5. PLACE keylock switch 3-HS-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Unit 3, Panel 9-55).

CUE: After applicant simulates, 3-HS-84-49 is in the OPEN position Standard PLACED 3-HS-84-49 in the OPEN position.

SAT- UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 12 OF 17 Performance Step: Critical- Not Critical X

6. CHECK OPEN3-FSV-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR (Unit 3. Panel 9-55).

Standard VERIFIED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp above 3-HS-84-49.

CUE: AFTER applicant performed all steps correctly, then RED valve position indicating lamp is illuminated.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical- Not CriticalX

7. CHECK MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW, 3-PA-32-31, alarm cleared (3-XA-55-3D, Window 18).

Standard VERIFIED MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW alarm cleared.

CUE: When trainee checks 3-9-3D alarm panel, MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW alarm did not clear.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

1PM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 13 OF 17 Performance Step : Critical- Not CriticalX

8. IF... MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW, 2-PA-32-3 Mnnunciator is or remains in alarm on Panel 9-3 (2-XA-55-3D, Window 18),

THEN. DETERMINEwhich Drywell Control Air header isdepressurized as follows:

a. Dispatch personnel to Unit 3, RB, El 565 if, to monitor the following indication for low pressure:

"* 3-PI-84-51, CAD A CROSSTIE TO DWCA PRESS INDR, for CAD A (R-17 S-line, by Drywell Access Door)

"* 3-PI-84-50, DW CONTROL AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS indicator, for CAD B (R-19 U-line, behind 480V RB Vent Board 3B).

Standard Dispatched personnel to monitor 3-PI-84-51 and 3-PI-84-50.

CUE: When personnel dispatched, 3-PI-84-51 indicates 63psig and lowering, 3-PI-84-50 indicates 98 psig and stable.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

  • ** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
  • I*** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
  • JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 14 OF 17 Performance Stetx Critical X Not Critical
b. Monitor 0-FI-84-7/3(18/3), CAD A(B) N2 SYSTEM FLOW, on Panel 3-9-54(55) for high flow.

Standard:

Monitors 0-FI-84-7/3 on Panel 3-9-54 and 0-FI-84-18/3 on Panel 3-9-55.

CUE: When simulated, 0-F1-84-7/3 indicates 42 SCFM flow and 0-FI-84-18/3 indicates 0 SCFM flow.

SAT UNSAT N/A _ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 15 OF 17 NOTE: CAD System A toDrywell Control Air supplies the followingMSIVs:

"* 3-FCV-1-14, MSIV LINE A INBOARD

"* 3-FCV-1-26, MSIV LINE B INBOARD Note: CAD System B toDrywell Control Air supplies the folloivingMSIVs:

"* 3-FCV-I-37, MSIV LINE C INBOARD

"* 3-FCV-1-51, MSIV LINED INBOARD Performance Sten Critical- Not CriticalX

c. MONITOR inboard MSIV indication status for valves drifting closed Standard Checked MSIV position indications on Panel 3-9-3 and determined noMSIVs drifting closed.

Cue: When checked, all MSIVs indicate fully open.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 16 OF 17 Performance Sten Critical X Not Critical

9. IF ...... Drywell Control Air header supplied from CAD System A shows indication of being depressurized,,

THEN... CLOSE the following valves:

"* 0-FCV-84-5, CAD SYSTEM A N2 SHUTOFF VALVE (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-54).

"* 3-FSV-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-54).

Standard CLOSED 0-FCV-84-5 and 3-FSV-84-48.

Cue: When simulated, 0-FCV-84-5 and 3-FSV-84-48 GREEN position indicating lamps are illuminated.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 39NRC REV. NO. 5 PAGE 17 OF 17 Performance Step Critical X Not Critical

10. IF ...... Drywell Control Air header supplied from CAD System B shows indication of being depressurized,,

THEN... CLOSE the following valves:

"* 0-FCV-84-16, CAD SYSTEM B N2 SHUTOFF VALVE (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-55).

"* 3-FSV-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-55).

Standard Did not close 0-FCV-84-16 or 3-FSV-84-49.

Cue: If simulated, 0-FCV-84-16 and 3-FSV-84-49 GREEN position indicating lamps are illuminated.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Sten Critical_ Not Critical X PERFORMERdemonstrated proper plant work expectations while performing this JPM.

Standard 3 way communications, attention to detail, touch STAAR.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

END OF TASK STOP TIME-

TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT EOI PROGRAM MANUAL SECTION Ix 3-EOI APPENDIX-8G CROSSTIE CAD TO DRYWELL CONTROL AIR REVISION 1 PREPARED BY: M. Morrow PHONE: 3708 RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION: Operations APPROVED BY: A. S. Bhatnagar EFFECTIVE DATE: 10/26/00 LEVEL OF USE: REFERENCE USE VALIDATION DATE: 04/03/93 QUALITY-RELATED

HISTORY OF REVISION/REVIEW 3-EOI APPENDIX-8G REV.

NO. DATE: REVISED PAGES REASON FOR CURRENT REVISION 0 10/5/97 ALL New procedure. Necessary to support implementation of BFNP Unit 3 EOIs.

1 10/26/00 All Converted to MS-Word.

3-EOI APPENDIX-BG I---OAPENIXGI Rev. 1 Page 1 of 2 I ~CROSSTIE CAD TO DRYWELL CONTROL AIR LOCATION: Unit 3 Control Room ATTACHMENTS: None (!)

1. OPEN the following valves:

"* 0-FCV-84-5, CAD SYSTEM A N2 TANK OUTLET VALVE (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-54)

"* 0-FCV-84-16, CAD SYSTEM B N2 TANK OUTLET VALVE (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-55).

2. VERIFY 0-PI-84-6/3, VAPOR A OUTLET PRESS, and 0-PI-84-17/3, VAPOR B OUTLET PRESS, indicate approximately 100 psig (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-54 and 3-9-55).
3. PLACE keylock switch 3-HS-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-54).
4. CHECK OPEN 3-FSV-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR, (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-54).
5. PLACE keylock switch 3-HS-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-55).
6. CHECK OPEN 3-FSV-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-55).
7. CHECK MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW, 3-PA-32-31, alarm cleared (3-XA-55-3D, Window 18).

3-EOI APPENDIX-BG Rev. 1 Pace 2 of 2

8. IF ...... MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW, 3-PA-32-31, annunciator is or remains in alarm (3-XA-55-3D, Window 18),

THEN .... DETERMINE which Drywell Control Air header is depressurized as follows:

a. DISPATCH personnel to Unit 3, RB, El 565 ft, to monitor the following indications for low pressure

"* 3-PI-84-51, CAD A CROSSTIE TO DWCA PRESS INDR, for CAD A (R-17 S-line, by Drywell Access Door)

"* 3-PI-84-50, DW CONT AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS indicator, for CAD B (R-19 U-line, behind 480V RB Vent Board 3B).

b. MONITOR 0-FI-84-7/3(18/3), CAD A(B) N2 SYSTEM FLOW, on Panel 3-9-54(55) for high flow.

NOTE: CAD System A to Drywell Control Air supplies the following MSIVs:

"* 3-FCV-1-14, MSIV LINE A INBOARD

"* 3-FCV-l-26, MSIV LINE B INBOARD.

NOTE: CAD System B to Drywell Control Air supplies the following MSIVs:

"* 3-FCV-l-37, MSIV LINE C INBOARD

"* 3-FCV-I-51, MSIV LINE D INBOARD.

c. MONITOR inboard MSIV indication status for valves drifting closed.
9. IF ...... Drywell Control Air header supplied from CAD System A shows indications of being depressurized, THEN .... CLOSE the following valves:

"* 0-FCV-84-5, CAD SYSTEM A N2 SHUTOFF VALVE (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-54)

"* 3-FSV-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-54).

10. IF ...... Drywell Control Air header supplied from CAD B shows indications of being depressurized, THEN .... CLOSE the following valves:

O-FCV-84-16, 0 CAD SYSTEM4 B N2 SHUTOFF VALVE (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-55)

  • 3-FSV-84-49, CAD B CROSSS TIE TO DW CONTROL AIR (Unit 3, Panel 3-9-55)

I LAST PAGE-tfl

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO 9 PAGE 1 OF 26 I0 1 RACESR BROWNS5 FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT IE JPM NUMBER: 51F (MOD)

TITLE: 2-EOI APPENDIX 12 - PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING FROM DRYWELL THROUGH FCV-84-20 TASK NUMBER: U-000-EM-61 SUBMITTED BY: DATE:

VALIDATED BY: DATE:

APPROVED: DATE: *4,-*,

TRAINING DATE:_"_ ...

4 PLANT CONCURRENCE:

OPERATIONS

  • Examination JPMs Require Operations Training Manager or Designee Approval and Plant Concurrence

JPM NO. 5IF REV. NO. 9 PAGE 2 OF 21 I I BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE m

I REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Date Affected of Revision Number 3 11/28/94 1,2,3,4 REVISE TO NEW FORMAT 10/28/95 ALL GENERAL REVISION 4

10/24/96 4, 15 ADDED NON-CRIT. STEP ON 5

TOUCH STAAR, AND CHANGED ASOS TO US.

10/1/97 ALL FORMAT, CHANGED MGT.

6 EXPECTATIONS TO PLANT WORK EXPECTATIONS AND ADDED 3-WAY COMM.

7 01/04/99 ALL NEW EOI REVISION 10/21/99 ALL PROCEDURE REVISION 8

9/22/00 ALL GENERAL REVISION 9

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 3 OF 21 IO P EFRACIES BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT R

OPERATOR: SS#

RO SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER: 51F (MOD)

TASK NUMBER: U-000-EM-61 TASK TITLE: VENT PRIMARY CONTAINMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2-EOI APPENDIX 12 K/A NUMBER: 295024EA1.20 K/A RATING: RO 3.5 SRO: 3.6 K/A NUMBER: 288000A2.01 K/A RATING: RO 3.3 SRO 3.4 TASK STANDARD: PERFORM OPERATIONS NECESSARY TO VENT THE PRESSURE SUPPRESSION CHAMBER AS DIRECTED BY 2-EOI APPENDIX 12.

LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR X PLANT CONTROL ROOM REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: 2-EOI APPENDIX 12, REV. 2 VALIDATION TIME: CONTROL ROOM: 15:00 LOCAL:

MAX. TIME ALLOWED: (Completed for Time Critical JPMs only)

PERFORMANCE TIME: CONTROL ROOM LOCAL COMMENTS:

Additional comment sheets attached? YES NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY UNSATISFACTORY SIGNATURE: DATE:

EXAMINER

BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT L JOB PERFORMANACE MEASURE IN-SIMULATOR: I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. I will provide initiating cues and reports on other actions when directed by you. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied. When your task is given, you will repeat the task and I will acknowledge "That's Correct". (OR "That's Incorrect",

if applicable). When you have completed your assigned task, you will say, "my task is complete" and I will acknowledge that your task is complete.

INITIAL CONDITIONS: You are a Unit 2 Operator. Unit 2 reactor has scrammed. A leak exists in primary containment. EOI-2 has been followed to PC/P-i.

INITIATING CUES: The UNIT SUPERVISOR directs you to vent containment in accordance with 2-EOI Appendix 12.

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 5 OF 26 START TIME Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X WHEN REQUESTED BY EXAMINER identify/obtain copy of required EOI Appendix.

Standard:

IDENTIFIED OR OBTAINED copy of 2-EOI Appendix 12.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

CAUTION Stack release rates exceeding 1.4 x 107 pCi/sec, or 0-SI 4.8.B.l.a.1 release fraction above 1.0 will result in ODCM release limits being exceeded.

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

1. VERIFY at least one SGTS train in service.

Standard:

VERIFIED A, B or C SGT Trains in service by illuminated red SGT status indicating lamps on Panel 2-9-20.

SAT UNSAT N/AT COMMENTS:

JPI NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 6 OF 26 Performance Step: Critical- Not Critical X

2. VERIFY CLOSED the following valves (Panel 2-9-3 or Panel 2-9-54):
  • 2-FCV-64-31, DRYWELL INBOARD ISOLATION VLV,
  • 2-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL VALVE,
  • 2-FCV-64-34, SUPPR CHBR INBOARD ISOLATION VLV,
  • 2-FCV-64-32, SUPPR CHBR VENT INBD ISOL VALVE.

standard:

VERIFIED 2-FCV-64-31, 29, 34, AND 32 are closed by or illuminated green status indicating lamps on Panel 2-9-3 Panel 2-9-54.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 7 OF 26 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

3. IF. . . . While executing this procedure to vent the Suppression Chamber, Suppression Pool water levelcan not be determined to be below 20 ft, THEN. . . PERFORM step 13 to secure the vent path and re-enter this procedure if further venting is required.

Standard:

VERIFIED level < 20 ft on narrow or wide range indicators/recorder on Panel 2-9-3, i.e. 2-LI-64-159A or 2-LI 64-54A and CONTINUED with Step 4.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

4. IF. . . . While executing this procedure the desired vent path is lost or can not be established, THEN. . . PERFORM step 13 to secure the vent path and re-enter this procedure if further venting is required.

Standard:

NONE: Operator read step 4 and continued to step 5.

SAT UNSAT N/A CCOMMENTS:

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 8 OF 26 CAUTION Venting Primary Containment during CAD addition is outside the CAD system FSAR design basis.

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

5. IF. While executing this procedure, CAD addition per SAMG-2, Step G-4 OR G-9, is to begin, THEN. BEFORE CAD is initiated, PERFORM Step 13 to secure the vent path.

NOTE: Venting may be accomplished using EITHER:

"*2-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, OR

"*2-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT.

NOTE: Venting the Drywell should be performed ONLY if the Suppression Chamber can NOT be vented.

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 9 OF 26 Standard:

Operator determines that since EOIs are in effect the SAMG's are not continued to step 6.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

6. IF ..... EITHER of the following exists:
  • Suppression Pool water level can not be determined to be below 20 ft, OR 0 Suppression Chamber can not be vented, OR
  • SRO orders Direct drywell venting THEN...CONTINUE in this procedure at:

"* Step 10 to vent the Drywell through 2-FCV-84-19, OR

"*Step 11 to vent the Drywell through 2-FCV-84-20.

Standard:

VERIFIED level < 20 ft on narrow or wide range indicators/recorder on Panel 2-9-3, i.e. 2-LI-64-159A or 2-LI 64-54A and CONTINUED with Step 7.

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 10 OF 26 SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 11 OF 26 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

7. CONTINUE in this procedure at:

"* Step 8 to vent the Suppression Chamber through 2-FCV 84-19, OR

"* Step 9 to vent the Suppression Chamber through 2-FCV-84-20.

Standard:

CONTINUED in this procedure at Step 8 to vent the Suppression Chamber through 2-FCV-84-19.

SAT UNSAT N/A CCOMMENTS:

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 12 OF 26

8. VENT the Suppression Chamber using 2-FIC-84-19, PATH B FLOW CONT, as follows:

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical

a. PLACE keylock switch 2-HS-84-35, SUPPR CHBR/DW VENT ISOL BYP SELECT, to SUPPR-CHBR position (Panel 2-9-54).

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-84-35 in the SUPPR-CHBR position.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step  : Critical Not Critical X

b. VERIFY OPEN 2-FCV-64-32, SUPPR CHBR VENT INBD ISOL VALVE (Panel 2-9-54).

Standard:

VERIFIED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp above 2-HS-64-32.

SAT UNSAT N/AC COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 14 OF 26 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical

e. VERIFY 2-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating approximately 100 scfm.

Standard:

OBSERVED 2-FIC-84-19 and DETERMINED flow was NOT being developed . REALIZED THAT PSC COULD NOT BE VENTED VIA 2-FCV-84-19 AND OPERATOR TRANSITIONS TO STEP 13 AS DIRECTED BY STEP 4.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS Performance Step  : Critical X Not Critical

13. WHEN . . . .ANY of the following exist:

"* Venting is no longer required, OR

"* Pressure in the space being vented approaches zero, OR

"* Directed by SRO, OR

"* Directed by Step 3, 4, or 5, THEN. . .SECURE venting as follows:

JPH NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 15 OF 26 Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X

a. VERIFY the following keylock switches in OFF (Panel 2-9-54):
  • 2-HS-84-35, SUPPR CHBR/DW VENT ISOL BYP SELECT,
  • 2-HS-84-36, SUPPR CHBR/DW VENT ISOL BYP SELECT.

Standard:

VERIFIED 2-HS-84-35 and 36, SUPPR CHBR/DW VENT ISOL BYP SELECT in OFF position.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X

b. VERIFY keylock switch 2-HS-84-20, 2-FCV-84-20 ISOLATION BYPASS, in NORMAL (Panel 2-9-55).

Standard:

VERIFIED keylock switch 2-HS-84-20, 2-FCV-84-20 ISOLATION BYPASS, in NORMAL on Panel 2-9-55.

SAT UNSAT N/AC COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 16 OF 26 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical

c. VERIFY keylock switch 2-HS-84-19, 2-FCV-84-19 CONTROL, in CLOSE (Panel 2-9-55).

Standard:

VERIFIED keylock switch 2-HS-84-19, 2-FCV-84-19 CONTROL, in CLOSE on Panel 2-9-55.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X

d. VERIFY CLOSED the following valves (Panel 2-9-3 or Panel 2-9-54):
  • 2-FCV-64-31, DRYWELL INBOARD ISOLATION VLV,
  • 2-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL VALVE,
  • 2-FCV-64-34, SUPPR CHBR INBOARD ISOLATION VLV,
  • 2-FCV-64-32, SUPPR CHBR VENT INBOARD ISOL VLV, Standard:

VERIFIED CLOSED 2-FCV-64-31, 29, 34, AND 32 by VERIFYING position indicating light GREEN on all the listed valves.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 17 OF 26

Critical Not Critical X Performance Step VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-64-141, DRYWELL DP COMP BYPASS e.

VALVE (Panel 2-9-3).

Standard:

VALVE VERIFIED CLOSED 2-FCV-64-141, DRYWELL DP COMP BYPASS position indicating light on Panel 2-9-3 by VERIFYING GREEN said valve.

UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

SAT APPENDIX AND WINDS UP VENT!

INSTRUCTOR NOTE: STUDENT RE-ENTERS 11. RECHECK P THE Drywell VIA FCV 84-20 PER STEP STEP I STEPS UP THROUGH STEP 6 AND THEN PROCEED WITH 2~-LI%ý4A: TO NOTESfl4ULATOR INSTRUCTOR. ENSU1RE.2-L:-,64:-4SSA AND Feet Critical- Not Critical X Performance Step:

in service.

1. VERIFY at least one SGTS train Standard:

in service by illuminated red VERIFIED A, B or C SGT Trains Panel 2-9-20.

SGT status indicating lamps on UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

SAT

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 18 OF 26 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

3. VERIFY CLOSED the following valves (Panel 2-9-3 or Panel 2-9-54):

0 2-FCV-64-31, DRYWELL INBOARD ISOLATION VLV, a 2-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL VALVE,

  • 2-FCV-64-34, SUPPR CHBR INBOARD ISOLATION VLV,
  • 2-FCV-64-32, SUPPR CHBR VENT INBD ISOL VALVE.

Standard:

VERIFIED 2-FCV-64-31, 29, 34, AND 32 are closed by illuminated green status indicating lamps on Panel 2-9-3 or Panel 2-9-54.

SAT UNSAT N/AN COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 19 OF 26 INopflcant nay eiect*to te-entez on this step.

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

4. IF. . . While executing this procedure to vent the Suppression Chamber, Suppression Pool water levelcan not be determined to be below 20 ft, THEN. . . PERFORM step 13 to secure the vent path and re-enter this procedure if further venting is required.

Standard:

VERIFIED level < 20 ft on narrow or wide range indicators/recorder on Panel 2-9-3, i.e. 2-LI-64-159A or 2-LI 64-54A and CONTINUED with Step 4.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

4. IF.
  • While executing this procedure the desired vent path is lost or can not be established, THEN. . . PERFORM step 13 to secure the vent path and re-enter this procedure if further venting is required.

Standard:

NONE: Operator read step 4 and continued to step 5.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

C

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 20 OF 26 CAUTION Venting Primary Containment during CAD addition is outside the CAD system FSAR design basis.

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

5. IF. .
  • While executing this procedure, CAD addition per SAMG-2, Step G-4 OR G-9, is to begin, THEN. BEFORE CAD is initiated, PERFORM Step 13 to secure the vent path.

NOTE: Venting may be accomplished using EITHER:

. 2-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, OR

  • 2-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT.

NOTE: Venting the Drywell should be performed ONLY if the Suppression Chamber can NOT be vented.

ICUE. OIs ARE THE GOVERNING PROCEDE Standard:

Operator determines that since EOIs are in effect the SAMG's are not continued to step 6.

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 21 OF 26 SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical x Not Critical

6. IF ..... EITHER of the following exists:
  • Suppression Pool water level can not be determined to be below 20 ft, OR
  • Suppression Chamber can not be vented, OR
  • SRO orders Direct drywell venting THEN.. .CONTINUE in this procedure at:

"* Step 10 to vent the Drywell through 2-FCV-84-19, OR

"*Step 11 to vent the Drywell through 2-FCV-84-20.

Standard:

VERIFIED level > 20 ft on narrow or wide range indicators/recorder on Panel 2-9-3, 2-LI-64-54A and CONTINUED with Step 7.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 22 OF 26 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical

11. VENT the Drywell using 2-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, as follows:
a. VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-64-141, DRYWELL DP COMP BYPASS VALVE (Panel 2-9-3).

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-64-141, Panel 2-9-3, in the CLOSED position and VERIFIED illuminated GREEN valve position indicating lamp above associated hand switch.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical

b. PLACE keylock switch 2-HS-84-35, SUPPR CHBR/DW VENT ISOL BYP SELECT, to DRYWELL position (Panel 2-9-54).

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-84-35 in the DRYWELL position.

SAT UNSAT N/AC COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 23 OF 26 Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X

c. VERIFY OPEN 2-FCV-64-31, DRYWELL INBOARD ISOLATION VLV (Panel 2-9-54)

Standard:

VERIFIED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp above 2-HS-64-31.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

d. VERIFY 2-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, in AUTO with setpoint at 100 scfm (Panel 2-9-55).

Standard:

PLACED 2-FIC-84-20 in AUTO at 100 scfm.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

e. PLACE keylock switch 2-HS-84-20, 2-FCV-84-20 ISOLATION

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 24 OF 26 BYPASS, IN BYPASS, (Panel 2-9-55)

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-84-20 in the BYPASS position.

SAT UNSAT_ N/A- COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

f. VERIFY 2-FTC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating approximately 100 scfm.

Standard:

DETERMINED vent flow was stable at 100 scfm as indicated on 2 FIC-84-20 and continued with the next step-proceeded to step 12 of this procedure.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 25 OF 26 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical

12. ADJUST 2-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONTR, or 2-FIC-84 20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, as applicable, to maintain ALL of the following:

"* Stable flow as indicated on controller AND

"* 2-PA-84-21, VENT PRESS TO SGT HIGH, alarm light extinguished,

  • Release rates as determined below:
i. IF. .PRIMARY CONTAINMENT FLOODING per C-I, Alternate Level Control, is in progress, THEN. .MAINTAIN release rates below those specified in Attachment 2.

CUE; PRIMARY CONTAINMENT FLOODING IS NOT REQUIREDI ii. IF. . Severe Accident Management Guidelines are being executed, THEN. .MAINTAIN release rates below those specified by the TSC SAM Team.

ICUE: EOIS are still in effect.

in effect.

still CUE: EOIs are I I

JPM NO. 51F REV. NO. 9 PAGE 26 OF 26 iii. IF. .Venting for ANY other reason than items i or ii above, THEN. . MAINTAIN release rates below Stack release rate of 1.4 x 10' 4Ci/sec AND O-SI-4.8.B.1.a.1 release fraction of 1.

Standard:

ADJUSTED 2-FIC-84-20 (as necessary) to obtain maximum indicated flow without 2-PA-84-21 yellow alarm light illuminating. REQUESTED release rates from Log AUO.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

CUE. [WMEN CHECKED] STACK RELEASE RATES AME 1.a X 102 iCi/sec AN4D THE STACK RELvASE FRACTION IS <1. ji ! i IWhen floW ~ is ~

ehecke4 another ~ ~ ....peat.

~ wil......

Xialae.at10sf e the nontrth eeseeae as i Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of TOUCH STAAR during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER verified applicable components by utilizing TOUCH STAAR (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the

JPM NO. SIF REV. NO. 9 PAGE 27 OF 26 need for additional training on TOUCH STAAR to maintain plant standards).

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of 3-WAY COMMUNICATION during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER utilized 3-WAY COMMUNICATION (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the need for additional training on 3-WAY COMMUNICATION to maintain plant standards).

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

END OF TASK STOP TIME:

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 1 OF 17 I JBPROMNE BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANIT JPM NUMBER: 90 JPM B. If TITLE: START A RECIRC PUMP DURING POWER OPERATION TASK NUMBER: U-000-NO-06 SUBMITTED BY: DATE:

VALIDATED BY: DATE:-_____

APPROVED: DATE:

TRAINING PLANT CONCURRENCE: DATE:

OPERATIONS

  • LOR Examination JPMs Require Operations Training Manager or Designee Approval and Plant Concurrence

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 2 OF 17 BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 3 10/4/94 ALL GENERAL REVISION 4 10/31/95 ALL PROCEDURE REVISIONS 5 11/30/95 ALL PROCEDURE REPAGINATION 6 5/2/96 ALL PROCEDURE REPAGINATION.

ADDED NOTE ON DISCH VLV CLOSURE CKT, AND MINOR VERBAL CHANGES 7 11/09/99 ALL PROCEDURE REVISION, RE FORMAT DOCUMENT, ADDED PLANT WORK EXPECT.. TOUCH STAAR, 3-WAY COMM.,

CHANGED ASOS TO US 8 09/23/00 ALL GENERAL REVISION 9 09/02/01 ALL General Revision

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 3 OF 17 BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE OPERATOR: SS#

RO - SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER: 90 TASK NUMBER: U-068-NO-06 TASK TITLE: START AN IDLE RECIRCULATION PUMP DURING POWER OPERATIONS K/A NUMBER: 202001A4.01 K/A RATING: RO3.7 SRO: 3.7 TASK STANDARD: PERFORM OPERATIONS NECESSARY TO RESTART AN IDLE RECIRC PUMP DURING POWER OPERATIONS AS DIRECTED BY 2-01-68 LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR X PLANT __ CONTROL ROOM __

REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: 2-01-68, REV 88 VALIDATION TIME: SIMULATOR: 15:00 LOCAL: __

MAX. TIME ALLOWED: _ (Completed for Time Critical JPMs only)

PERFORMANCE TIME: __ CONTROL ROOM __ LOCAL __

COMMENTS:

Additional comment sheets attached? YES NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY UNSATISFACTORY EXAMINER: DATE:

BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE IN-SIMULATOR: I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. I will provide initiating cues and reports on other actions when directed by you. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied. When your task is given, you will repeat the task and I will acknowledge "That's Correct". (OR "That's Incorrect", if applicable). When you have completed your assigned task, you will say, "my task is complete" and I will acknowledge that your task is complete.

INITIAL CONDITIONS: You are an Operator. 2A Recirc Pump tripped 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> ago. All AOI actions have been completed. The problem with 2A Recirc Pump has been corrected. The SRO has directed 2A Recirc Pump be restarted. The Reactor Engineer is in the control room. All prerequisites have been met and 2-SR 34.93 & 4 has been successfully completed. The startup procedure has been completed through step 5.2 16 This JPM is Time Critical.

INITIATING CUES: The US directs you to continue the return of 2A Recirc Pump to service as directed by 2-01-68 starting at Step 5.2.17 and balance jet pump flows.

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 5 OF 17 START TIME:-

Performance Step: Critical_ Not Critical X WHEN REQUESTED BY EXAMINER identify/obtain copy of required procedure.

Standard:

IDENTIFIED OR OBTAINED copy of 2-01-68.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

NOTE:

The closure circuit for RECIRC PUMP 2A(2B) DISCHARGE VALVE, 2-HS-68-3A(79A) is a seal-in and is NOT to be held in the CLOSE position.

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical 5.2.17 VERIFY RECIRC LOOP A(B) DIFF PRESS LOW ANNUNCIATION, 2-XA-55-4A (4B), WINDOW 31 IN ALARM.

52.18 VERIFY CLOSED, RECIRC PUMP 2A(2B) DISCHARGE VALVE, 2-FCV-68-3(79).

Standard:

VERIFIED 2-XA-55-4A WIN 31 IN ALARM, AND, PLACED 2-HS-68-3A in the CLOSE position and VERIFIED 2-FCV-68-3 TRAVELS FULLY CLOSED.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 6 OF 17 Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical 5.2.19 DEPRESS pushbutton, SCOOP TUBE 2A(2B) RESET, 2-HS-96-15(16).

Standard:

DEPRESSED 2-HS-96-15 ON Panel 2-9.4 SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step Critical- Not Critical X 5220 VERIFY RESET, RECIRC FLUID DRIVE A(B) SCOOP TUBE LOCK 2-XA-96-15(16) 2 XA-55-4A(B), Window 28.

Standard:

RESET annunciator Panel 2-9-4A and VERIFIED window 28 extinguished.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

CAUTION Recirc System operation is restricted by criteria in Illustrations I and 2.

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 7 OF 17 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical-5.2.21 PLACE to START, RECIRC MG 2A(2B) NORMAL FEEDER, 2-HS-57-17(14) or RECIRC MG 2A (2B) ALTERNATE FEEDER, 2-HS-57-15(12) (if normal feeder is unavailable), and VERIFY the following:

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-57-17 in the START position (Normal feeder).

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

  • ********* A ** ********************* A ********** ************* ****

Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X

{continuation from previous performance step)

....and VERIFY the following.

  • Recirc Generator Drive Motor A(B) amps as indicated on AMPS, 2-EI-96-1 IA(B).

increase to full scale, then decreases to no-load amps as motor comes to speed. After 7 seconds the field breaker closes.

Standard:

VERIFIED 2-EI-96-1 IA increased to full scale, decreased to no-load amps and field breaker closed in

-7 seconds as indicated by illuminated RED breaker position indicating lamp.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO 9 PAGE 8 OF 17 Performance Step : Critical_ Not Critical X Pump DP increases to above 5 psid as indicated on PUMP DP, 2-PDI-68-65(82).

Standard:

VERIFIED 2-PDI-68-65 indicated increase above 5 psid.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X

  • Recirc Generator A(B) speed rises to about 40 percent and then lowers to 28 percent.

as indicated on RECIRC MG SET 2A(2B) GEN SPEED, 2-SI-96-2A(2B).

Standard:

VERIFIED 2-SI-96-3A indicated rises to - 40% and then lowers to 28%.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 9 OF 17 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

  • RECIRC LOOP A(B) DIFF PRESS LOW 2-PDS-68-65(2-PDA-68-82), 2-XA-55 4A(B), Window 31, is reset.

Standard:

RESET Panel 2-9-4 annunciators and VERIFIED Panel 2-9-4A, Window 31, CLEARED.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical- Not Critical X

  • RECIRC PUMP 2A(2B) D[SCHARGE VALVE, 2-FCV-68-3(79), begins to open by the automatic jogging circuit.

Standard:

VERIFIED illuminated both RED and GREEN valve position indicating lamps above 2-HS-68-3A.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 10 OF 17 Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X RECIRC MG SET A(B) STARTUP SEQ INCOMPLETE 2-XA-96-40(41), 2-XA 55-4A(B), Window 4 is clear.

Standard:

VERIFIED annunciator Panel 2-9-4A, Window 4 EXTINGUISHED.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical_ Not Critical X VERIFY locally, RECIRC PUMP 2A (2B) breaker closing spring recharged by observing amber breaker spring charged light is on and closing spring target indicates charged.

Standard:

DISPATCHED AUO to VERIFY Recire Pump 2A breaker closing spring recharged.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

                                                        • A. *********************************************************
  • CUE:[WHEN DISPATCHEDI THE AUO REPORTS RECIRC PUMP 2A BREAKER CLOSING SPRING IS CHARGED.

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 11 OF 17 NOTES:

(1) In order to achieve balanced jet pump flows, the Recirc Pumps speed may require a mismatch.

(2) Recirc Pump speed cannot be increased above 28/(/320 RPM generator speed) until total Feedwater flow is greater than 19 percent. Recirc Pump speed can be controlled between 20%(-320 RPM generator speed) using the Recirc Pump Speed Controllers.

(3) Recirc Pump A(B) will trip 85 seconds after initiation of the automatic jogging sequence if RECIRC PUMP A3(B) DISCHARGE VALVE, 2-FCV-68-3(79), is less than 90 percent open.

(4) Performance of 2-SR-3.4.2.1 is required 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> after reaching >25% RTP and/or 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after returning a Recirc Pump to service.

Performance Step Critical- Not Critical X 5.2.22 VERIFY fully open, RECIRC PUMP 2A(2B) DISCHARGE VALVE, 2-FCV-68-3(79).

Standard:

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO 9 PAGE 12 OF 17 CAUTION Per Technical Specifications, the reactor CAN BE operated indefinitely with one Recirc loop out of service, provided the requirements of T.S. 3.4.1 are implemented within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> of entering single loop operations.

Performance Ste: Critical- Not Critical X 5.2.2 3 NOTIFY Reactor Engineer to VERIFY that the following has been PERFORMED, as applicable, depending on the number of operating recirc loops, and RECORD the applicable requirements and their completion status in the narrative log.

5.2.23.1 2-SR-3.4. I(DLO), Reactor Recirculation System Dual Loop Operation.

OR 5.2.23.2 2-SR-3.4. I(SLO), Reactor Recirculation System Single Loop Operation.

Standard:

NOTIFIED Reactor Engineer to verify 2-SR-3.4. I(DLO) has been performed.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

SCUE: REACTOR ENGINEER VERIFIED 2-SR-3.4.1 (DLO)

CUE: HAS BEEN PERFORM ED.

EACTRME!

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO 9 PAGE 13*OF 17 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X 5.2.24 VERIFY BAILEY NULL SWITCH A(B) pushbutton, 2-HS-96-3A(3B) backlight extinguished.

Standard:

VERIFIED Bailey Null Switch A push-button, 2-HS-96-3A back-light is not illuminated.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical_

5.2.25 PLACE in AUTO, RECIRC MG 2A(2B) AUTO/MAN SELECT, 2-XS-57-16A(13A). (N/A if Recirc MG Set is supplied by alternate feeder.

Standard:

PLACED AUTO/MAN SELECT 2-XS-57-16A in AUTO.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 14 OF 17 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical, X 5.2.26 DEPRESS pushbutton RECIRC PUMP 2A(2B) RUNBACK RESET 2-HS-68-32(41).

Standard:

DEPRESSED 2-HS-68-32.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X 5227 MONITOR Recirc Pump seal pressures during pressurization for proper operation.

(Number 2 seal pressure should be approximately one half that of Number I seal pressure).

Standard:

VERIFIED 2-PI-68-63A indicating approximately one-half the indication of 2-PI-68-64A.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 15 OF 17 Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X 5.2.28 MAINTAIN fluid drive oil temperature from cooler at 110F to 130F. on RECIRC MG SET 2A(2B) FLUID CLPG AND BRG TEMP, 2-TR-68-97(98), Point 9, (Panel 2-9-21).

Standard:

VERIFIED Point 9 on 2-TR-68-97 indicating I10F to 130F.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

CAUTION The Recirc System should be operated with balanced jet pump flows to reduce hydraulic forces and xibration stresses on jet pumps and retainers.

IBALANCE

=CE.IFASKEDI THE UNIT SUPERVISOR DIRECTS THE OPERATOR RECIRC FLOWS.I TO

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 16 OF 17 Performance Step: Critical- Not Critical X 5.2.29 ADJUST Recire Pump speeds 2A(2B) using RAMP UP/RAMP DOWN pushbuttons on RECIRC PUMP 2A(2B) SPEED INDICATING CONTROL, 2-SIC-96-3A(3B),

to achieve balanced jet pump flows. (N/A for Single Loop Operation)

Standard:

RAISED 2-SIC-96-3A to balance jet pump flows.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

INSTRUCTOR NOTE: WHEN COMPETENCY DEMONSTRATED ON ADJUSTING 2A RECIRC SPEED THEN TERMINATE THE JPM BY STATING "WE WILL STOP HERE".

Performance Step: Critical __ Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of TOUCH STAAR during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER verified applicable components by utilizing TOUCH STAAR.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 90 REV. NO. 9 PAGE 17 OF 17 Performance Step: Critical-Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of 3-WAY COMMUNICATION during this JPM.

Standard.

PERFORMER utilized 3-WAY COMMUNICATION.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

END OF TASK STOP TIME

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 1 OF 16 I JOIEFRAC BROWNS FERRY NUCtk ESR MELANT JPM NUMBER: 14 JPM B.1.d (MODIFIED)

TITLE: 2-EOI APPENDIX SA INJECTION SYSTEMS LINEUP -

CONDENSATE/FEEDWATER TASK NUMBER: U-000-EM-29 SUBMITTED BY: DATE:

VALIDATED BY: DATE:

DATE:

APPROVED:

TRAINING PLANT CONCURRENCE: DATE:

OPERATIONS Examination JPMs Require Operations Training Manager or Designee Approval and Plant Concurrence

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 2 OF 16 IO EFRACESR BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT I

REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 3 12/6/94 1,2,3,4 REVISE TO NEW FORMAT 4 5/26/95 8,10 Typos and changed light indication from red to amber on RFP trips.

5 10/14/95 ALL Procedure revision 6 10/30/96 ALL PROCEDURE UPGRADE FOR NEW RFW MOD, ADDED NON CRITICAL STEP ON TOUCH STAAR, CHANGED ASOS TO US.

7 09/17/97 ALL FORMAT, ADDED 3-WAY COMM., CHANGED MGT EXPECTATIONS TO PLANT WORK EXP.

8 08/08/01 ALL Matched EOI-App SA rev Modified step 4 and 7, and made editorial changes.

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 3 OF 16 IO PEFRA C EIýS BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT R

OPERATOR: SS#

RO SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER: 14 (Modified)

TASK NUMBER: U-000-EM-29 TASK TITLE: LINE UP INJECTION SYSTEMS - CONDENSATE/FEEDWATER IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2-EOI APPENDIX 5A K/A NUMBER: 295031EA1.08 K/A RATING: RO 3.8 SRO: 3.9 TASK STANDARD: PERFORM CONTROL ROOM ACTIONS REQUIRED TO ESTABLISH THE CONDENSATE/FEEDWATER SYSTEM AS AN RPV INJECTION SYSTEM AS DIRECTED BY 2-EOI APPENDIX 5A LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR X PLANT CONTROL ROOM REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: 2-EOI APPENDIX 5A, REV 6 VALIDATION TIME: CONTROL ROOM: 8:00 LOCAL:

MAX. TIME ALLOWED: (Completed for Time Critical JPMs only)

PERFORMANCE TIME: CONTROL ROOM LOCAL COMMENTS:

Additional comment sheets attached? YES NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY UNSATISFACTORY SIGNATURE: DATE:

EXAMINER

I BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT PF A iMEAU IN-SIMULATOR: I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. I will provide initiating cues and reports on other actions when directed by you. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied. When your task is given, you will repeat the task and I will acknowledge "That's Correct". (OR "That's Incorrect",

if applicable). When you have completed your assigned task, you will say, "my task is complete" and I will acknowledge that your task is complete.

INITIAL CONDITIONS: You are a Unit 2 Operator. The reactor has scrammed and EOI-I has been entered.

INITIATING CUES: The UNIT SUPERVISOR has directed you to establish and maintain RPV water level +2" to +51" as directed by 2-EOI Appendix SA, using Reactor Feed pump 2A.

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 5 OF 16 START TIME Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X WHEN REQUESTED BY EXAMINER identify/obtain copy of required EOI Appendix.

Standard:

IDENTIFIED OR OBTAINED copy of 2-EOI Appendix 5A.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

1. VERIFY Condensate system in service supplying, suction to RFPs.

Standard:

VERIFIED condensate system in service by observation of valve alignment, condensate and condensate booster pump operation and RFP alignment.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 6 OF 16 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

2. VERIFY OPEN MSIVs, supplying steam to RFPTs.

Standard:

VERIFIED MSIVs open by illuminated RED valve position indicating lamps on Panel 2-9-3 (vertical panel or benchboard).

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

3. VERIFY Hotwell Pressure below -7 in. Hg.

Standard:

VERIFIED Hotwell Pressure below -7 inches Hg. as indicated on 2-XR-2-2, Panel 2-9-6 or ICS computer.

SAT UNSAT N/AT COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 7 OF 16 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

4. VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-1-121(129) (137), RFPT 2A(B) (C) LP STEAM SUPPLY VALVE.

Standard:

Identify that the illuminated RED valve position indicating lamps above 2-HS-1-121, on Panel 2-9-6 is lit for RFPT 2A.

and take actions to close valve.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X S. VERIFY OPEN 2-FCV-1-125(133) (141), RFPT 2A(B) (C) HP STEAM SUPPLY VALVE.

Standard:

VERIFIED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp above 2-HS-1-125.

SAT UNSAT N/AO COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 8 OF 16 Performance Step  : Critical X Not Critical

6. DEPRESS 2-HS-46-8A(9A) (10A), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) SPEED CONT RAISE/LOWER, and VERIFY amber light is illuminated.

Standard:

DEPRESSED 2-HS-46-BA, RFPT 2A SPEED CONT RAISE/LOWER AND VERIFIED amber light illuminated.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

7. VERIFY a Main Oil Pump is running for RFPT to be started.

Standard:

Verified a Main Oil Pump is running for RFPT 2A by observing a red indicating light above Handswitches.

SAT UNSAT N/AO COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 9 OF 16 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

8. VERIFY for EACH of the following pushbuttons, the green light is illuminated and the red light is extinguished:

2-HS-3-208A, RX WTR LVL CH A HI RFPT/MT TRIP RESET.

2-HS-3-208B, RX WTR LVL CH B HI RFPT/MT TRIP RESET.

Standard:

VERIFIED illuminated GREEN LIGHT and RED LIGHT extinguished on 2-HS-3-208A & 208B.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

9. VERIFY OPEN the following valves:
  • 2-FCV-3-75, HP HTR 2A1 FW OUTLET ISOL VLV.
  • 2-FCV-3-76, HP HTR 2B1 FW OUTLET ISOL VLV.
  • 2-FCV-3-77, HP HTR 2C1 FW OUTLET ISOL VLV.

Standard:

VERIFIED OPEN 2-FCV-3-75 (76) OR (77) HP HTR FW OUTLET ISOL VLVS.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 10 OF 16 Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

10. DEPRESS 2-HS-3-124A(150A) (175A), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) TRIP RESET, and CHECK the following:
  • Blue light extinguished
  • HP Stop Valve open as indicated by red light above the following:

- 2-HS-3-108, RFPT 2A HP STOP VLV (2-FCV-1-127)

TEST

- 2-HS-3-134, RFPT 2B HP STOP VLV (2-FCV-l-135)

TEST

- 2-HS-3-159, RFPT 2C HP STOP VLV (2-FCV-1-143)

TEST LP Stop Valve open as indicated by red light above the following:

- 2-HS-3-107, RFPT 2A LP STOP VLV (2-FCV-1-123)

TEST

- 2-HS-3-133, RFPT 2B LP STOP VLV (2-FCV-1-131)

TEST

- 2-HS-3-158, RFPT 2C LP STOP VLV (2-FCV-1-139)

TEST Standard:

DEPRESSED 2-HS-3-124A, RFPT 2A TRIP RESET, and CHECKED the blue light extinguished, HP Stop Valve open as indicated by red light above 2-HS-3-108, RFPT 2A HP STOP VLV 2-FCV-1-127.

AND the LP Stop Valve open as indicated by the red light above 2-HS-3-107, RFPT 2A LP STOP VLV 2-FCV-1-123.

SAT UNSAT N/A CCOMMENTS:

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 11 OF 16 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

11. VERIFY OPEN 2-FCV-3-20(13) (6), RFP 2A(2B) (2C) MIN FLOW VALVE.

Standard:

VERIFIED illuminated RED valve position indicating light above 2-HS-3-20, Panel 2-9-6.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

12. PLACE 2-HS-46-112A(138A) (163A), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C)

START/LOCAL ENABLE, in START.

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-46-112A, RFPT 2A START/LOCAL ENABLE, in START.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

C

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 12 OF 16 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

13. CHECK RFPT 2A (2B) (2C) Speed accelerates to approximately 600 rpm.

Standard:

CHECKED RFPT 2A Speed accelerated to approximately 600 rpm.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

14. VERIFY OPEN 2-FCV-3-19(12) (5), RFP 2A(2B) (2C) DISCHARGE VALVE.

Standard:

VERIFIED illuminated RED valve position indicating light above 2-HS-3-19.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

C

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 13 OF 16 Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

15. RAISE RFPT 2A (2B) (2C) speed UNTIL RFP discharge pressure is approximately equal to RPV pressure using ANY of the following methods on Panel 2-9-5:

Using individual 2-HS-46-8A (9A) (10A), RFPT 2A (2B) (2C) SPEED CONT RAISE/LOWER switch in MANUAL GOVERNOR, OR Using individual 2-SIC-46-8 (9) (10), RFPT 2A (2B)

(2C) SPEED CONTROL PDS in MANUAL, OR Using 2-LIC-46-5, REACTOR WATER LEVEL CONTROL PDS, in MANUAL with individual 2-SIC-46-8 (9) (10), RFPT 2A (2B) (2C) SPEED CONTROL PDS in AUTO.

Standard:

RAISED RFPT 2A speed UNTIL RFP discharge pressure was approximately equal to RPV pressure utilizing one of the methods above on Panel 2-9-5.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 14 OF 16 Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

16. SLOWLY RAISE speed of RFPT UNTIL RFW flow to the RPV is indicated using ANY of the following methods on Panel 2 9-5:
  • Using individual 2-HS-46-8A (9A) (10A), RFPT 2A (2B) (2C) SPEED CONT RAISE/LOWER switch in MANUAL GOVERNOR, OR Using individual 2-SIC-46-8 (9) (10), RFPT 2A (2B)

(2C) SPEED CONTROL PDS in MANUAL, OR

  • Using 2-LIC-46-5, REACTOR WATER LEVEL CONTROL PDS, in MANUAL with individual 2-SIC-46-8 (9) (10), RFPT 2A (2B) (2C) SPEED CONTROL PDS in AUTO.

Standard:

SLOWLY RAISED speed of RFPT 2A UNTIL RFW flow to the RPV is indicated utilizing one of the above methods.

SAT UNSAT N/AN COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 15 OF 16 Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X

17. ADJUST RFPT speed as necessary using ANY of the following methods on Panel 2-9-5:

Using individual 2-HS-46-BA (9A) (10A), RFPT 2A (2B) (2C) SPEED CONT RAISE/LOWER switch in MANUAL GOVERNOR, OR Using individual 2-SIC-46-8 (9) (10), RFPT 2A (2B)

(2C) SPEED CONTROL PDS in MANUAL, OR Using 2-LIC-46-5, REACTOR WATER LEVEL CONTROL PDS, in MANUAL with individual 2-SIC-46-8 (9) (10), REPT 2A (2B) (2C) SPEED CONTROL PDS in AUTO.

Standard:

ADJUSTED speed of 2A RFPT as required utilizing one of the above methods.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMM4ENTS:

CUE: WHEN RX WATER LEVEL IS RISING AND EXAMINEE DEMONSTRATES CONTROL OF RX FEED PUMP:

"ANOTHER OPERATOR WILL RELIEVE YOU OF WATER LEVEL CONTROL."

"THAT WILL BE ALL FOR NOW."

JPM NO. 14 REV. NO. 8 PAGE 16 OF 16 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of TOUCH STAAR during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER verified applicable components by utilizing TOUCH STAAR (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the need for additional training on TOUCH STAAR to maintain plant standards).

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step:

PERFORMER demonstrated the use of 3-WAY COMMUNICATION during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER utilized 3-WAY COMMTUNICATION (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the need for additional training on 3-WAY COMMUNICATION to maintain plant standards).

SAT_ UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

END OF TASK STOP TIME

TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT EOI PROGRAM MANUAL SECTION Ix 2-EOI APPENDIX-5A INJECTION SYSTEMS LINEUP CONDENSATE / FEEWATER REVISION 6 PREPARED BY: M. Morrow PHONE: 3708 RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION: Operations APPROVED BY: A. S. Bhatnagar EFFECTIVE DATE: 10/26/00 LEVEL OF USE: REFERENCE USE VALIDATION DATE: 02/14/92 QUALITY-RELATED

HISTORY OF REVISION/REVIEW 2-EOI APPENDIX-5A REV.

NO. DATE: REVISED PAGES REASON FOR CURRENT REVISION 0 6/15/92 ALL New procedure. Necessary to support implementation of Revision 4 EPGs into BFNP EOIs.

7/10/92 ALL Incorporate Writer's Guide discrepancies, typos, and plant nomenclature discrepancies.

2 4/21/93 ALL Converted from WordPerfect 5.1 to Pagemaker 4.0 to better support desktop publishing capabilities.

2 References to Control Room Labels corrected.

Phrase "maintain RPV level" replaced with "control injection" to address cases of usage with C4 flowchart.

1,2 Incorporated Changes as result of NRC comments:

  • Control Panel label 1 information added for reference to RFPT HP and LP Stop Valves.
  • UNID info for RFPT high RPV level trips added.

1

  • Added step for placing MGU in manual.

3 8/3/95 1 Revised Step 9 to require verification that all RX WTR LVL HI RFPT TRIP RESET amber lights are extinguished.

4 10/26/95 2 Corrected nomenclature for stop valves in Step 11.

5 ALL Digital Feedwater Control:

DCN's W25841A, W25842A, W25843A,added new controllers.

6 10/26/00 All Converted to MS-Word.

2-EOI APPENDIX-SA Rev. 6 Page 1 of 4 I 2-EOI APPENDIX-5A I Rev.

Page of 4 2-EOI 16APPENDIX-5A I

LOCATION:

INJECTION SYSTEMS LINEUP CONDENSATE/FEEWATER Unit 2 Control Room I

ATTACHMENTS: None (!)

1. VERIFY Condensate System in service, supplying suction to RFPs.
2. VERIFY OPEN MSIVs, supplying steam to RFPTs.
3. VERIFY Hotwell Pressure below -7 in. Hg.
4. VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-l-121(129) (137), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) LP STEAM SUPPLY VALVE.
5. VERIFY OPEN 2-FCV-1-125(133) (141), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) HP STEAM SUPPLY VALVE.
6. DEPRESS 2-HS-SA(9A) (10A), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) SPEED CONT RAISE/LOWER, and VERIFY amber light is illuminated.
7. VERIFY a Main Oil Pump is running for RFPT to be started.
8. VERIFY for EACH of the following pushbuttons, the green light is illuminated and the red light is extinguished:

"* 2-HS-3-208A, RX WTR LVL CH A HI RFPT/MT TRIP RESET

"* 2-HS-3-208B, RX WTR LVL CH B HI RFPT/MT TRIP RESET.

2-EOI APPENDIX-5A Rev. 6 Page 2 of 4

9. VERIFY OPEN the following valves:

"* 2-FCV-3-75, HP HTR 2A1 FW OUTLET ISOL VLV

"* 2-FCV-3-76, HP HTR 2B1 FW OUTLET ISOL VLV

"* 2-FCV-3-77, HP HTR 2C1 FW OUTLET ISOL VLV.

10. DEPRESS 2-HS-3-124A(150A) (175A), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) TRIP RESET, and CHECK the following:

"* Blue light extinguished.

"* HP Stop Valve OPEN as indicated by red light above the following, as applicable:

0 2-HS-3-l08, RFPT 2A HP STOP VLV TEST 0 2-HS-3-134, RFPT 2B HP STOP VLV TEST 0 2-HS-3-159, RFPT 2C HP STOP VLV TEST.

"* LP Stop Valve OPEN as indicated by red light above the following, as applicable:

0 2-HS-3-107, RFPT 2A LP STOP VLV TEST 0 2-HS-3-133, RFPT 2B LP STOP VLV TEST 0 2-HS-3-158, RFPT 2C LP STOP VLV TEST.

11. VERIFY OPEN 2-FCV-3-20(13) (6), RFP 2A(2B) (2C) MIN FLOW VALVE.
12. PLACE 2-HS-3-112A(138A) (163A), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C)

START/LOCAL ENABLE, in START.

13. CHECK RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) speed increases to approximately 600 rpm.
14. VERIFY OPEN 2-FCV-3-19(12) (5), RFP 2A(2B) (2C) DISCHARGE VALVE.

2-EOI APPENDIX-5A Rev. 6 Page 3 of 4

15. RAISE RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) speed UNTIL RFP discharge pressure is approximately equal to RPV pressure using ANY of the following methods on Panel 2-9-5:

"* Using individual 2-HS-46-SA(9A) (10A), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C)

SPEED CONT RAISE/LOWER switch in MANUAL GOVERNOR, OR

"* Using individual 2-SIC-46-8(9) (10), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C)

SPEED CONTROL PDS in MANUAL, OR

"* Using 2-LIC-46-5, REACTOR WATER LEVEL CONTROL PDS, in MANUAL with individual 2-SIC-46-8(9) (10), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) SPEED CONTROL PDS in AUTO.

16. SLOWLY RAISE speed of RFPT UNTIL RFW flow to the RPV is indicated using ANY of the following methods on Panel 2-9-5:

"* Using individual 2-HS-46-8A(9A) (10A), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C)

SPEED CONT RAISE/LOWER switch in MANUAL GOVERNOR, OR

" Using individual 2-SIC-46-8(9) (10), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C)

SPEED CONTROL PDS in MANUAL, OR

" Using 2-LIC-46-5, REACTOR WATER LEVEL CONTROL PDS, in MANUAL with individual 2-SIC-46-8(9) (10), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) SPEED CONTROL PDS in AUTO.

2-EOI APPENDIX-SA Rev. 6 Page 4 of 4

17. ADJUST RFPT speed as necessary to control injection using ANY of the following methods on Panel 2-9-5:

"* Using individual 2-HS-46-SA(9A) (10A), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C)

SPEED CONT RAISE/LOWER switch in MANUAL GOVERNOR, OR

"* Using individual 2-SIC-46-8(9) (10), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C)

SPEED CONTROL PDS in MANUAL, OR

"* Using 2-LIC-46-5, REACTOR WATER LEVEL CONTROL PDS, in MANUAL with individual 2-SIC-46-8(9) (10), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) SPEED CONTROL PDS in AUTO.

18. WHEN .... RPV level is approximately equal to desired level AND automatic level control is desired, THEN .... PLACE 2-LIC-46-5, REACTOR WATER LEVEL CONTROL PDS, in AUTO with individual 2-SIC-46-8(9) (10), RFPT 2A(2B) (2C) SPEED CONTROL PDS in AUTO.

LAST PAGE

BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JIO PER FE MEA SUR E I JPM NUMBER: 69 1PM B. I .c Modified TITLE: 2-EOI APPENDIX 17A - RHR IN SUPPRESSION POOL COOLING WITH A LPCI INITIATION SIGNAL PRESENT TASK NUMBER: U-000-EM-79 SUBMITTED BY: DATE:

VALIDATED BY: DATE:_____

APPROVED DATE:

TRAINING PLANT CONCURRENCE: DATE:

OPERATIONS LOR Examination JPMs Require Operations Training Manager or Designee Approval and Plant Concurrence

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO, 10 PAGE 2 OF 15 BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 3 12/7/94 1,2,3,4 REVISE TO NEW FORMAT 4 5/1/96 ALL GENERAL REVISION DUE TO PROCEDURE REV 5 8/4/96 ALL ADDED CRITICAL STEP ON TOUCH STAAR, UNID, AND CHANGED COMM STD 6 10/2/97 ALL FORMAT, CHANGED MGT EXPECTATIONS TO PLANT WORK EXPECTATIONS, ADDED 3-WAY COMM.

7 10/28/98 ALL GENERAL REVISION 8 01/04/99 ALL PROCEDURE REVISION ADDED STEP TO MONITOR RHR NPSH,

& CHANGED STEP NUMBERS.

9 10/16/00 4,10,13 REVIEWED FOR ACCURACY.

REMOVED NON-CRITICAL STEPS. REVERSED THE ORDER OF STEPS 2G AND 2H TO MATCH THE EOI APPENDIX. CORRECTED STEP 2.1 ON PAGE 13 TO BE STEP 2.M TO CORRECT MISNUMBERING.

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 3 OF 15 REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 10 8/8/01 ALL Exchanged sequence of step 2.g and 2.h in order to sequence suppression pool cooling valve and pump operation identically to that used in the operating instruction 2-01-74. Add direction to verify power available to RHR min flow valves if required to verify valve closed (TACF 2-00-012-074,TACF 3-00-008 074).

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 4 OF 15 I

OPERATOR:

JBPROMNE BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT RO SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER: 69 TASK NUMBER: U-000-EM-79 TASK TITLE: OPERATE RHR SYSTEM IN SUPPRESSION POOL COOLING MODE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2-EOI APPENDIX 17A K/A NUMBER: 295026EA1 .01 K/A RATING: RO 4.1 SRO: 4.1 TASK STANDARD: PERFORM OPERATIONS NECESSARY TO PLACE RHR LOOP II IN SUPPRESSION POOL COOLING WITH A LPCI SIGNAL PRESENT AS DIRECTED BY 2-EOI APPENDIX 17A LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR X PLANT _ CONTROL ROOM REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: 2-EOI APPENDIX 17A, REV 8 VALIDATION TIME: CONTROL ROOM: 8:00 LOCAL:

MAX. TIME ALLOWED: - (Completed for Time Critical JPMs only)

PERFORMANCE TIME: CONTROL ROOM LOCAL COMMENTS:

Additional comment sheets attached'? YES NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY UNSATISFACTORY EXAMINER: DATE:

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 5 OF 15 I BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE IN-SIMULATOR: I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. I Vill provide initiating cues and reports on other actions when directed by you. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied. When your task is given, you will repeat the task and I will acknowledge "That's Correct". (OR "That's Incorrect", if applicable). When you have completed your assigned task, you will say, "my task is complete" and I will acknowledge that your task is complete.

INITIAL CONDITIONS: You are an operator. Unit 2 reactor has scrammed. Due to a LOCA, EOI-2 has been followed to SP/T-3. 2-EOI Appendices 16F and 16G, Bypassing RHR Injection Valve Timers HAVE been completed.

INITIATING CUES: The Unit Supervisor directs you to place RHR Loop II, -D" RHR Pump in Suppression Pool Cooling mode as directed by 2-EOI Appendix 17A.

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 6 OF 15 START TIME Performance Step: Critical_ Not Critical X WHEN REQUESTED BY EXAMINER identify/obtain copy of required EOI Appendix. 17A Standard:

IDENTIFIED OR OBTAINED copy of 2-EOI Appendix 17A.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical_ Not Critical X

1. IF ..... Adequate core cooling is assured, THEN .BYPASS LPCI Injection Valve Timers as necessary using EOI Appendices 16F and 16G.

Standard:

None. Given in initial conditions.

SAT UNSAT N/A__ COMMENTS:________________

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 7 OF 15 Performance Step: Critical_ Not Critical X

2. PLACE RHR SYSTEM II in Suppression Pool Cooling as follows:
a. VERIFY at least one RHRSW pump supplying each EECW header.

Standard:

VERIFIED A3 or C3 AND B3 or D3 EECW pumps running by red light above handswitch on panel 2-9-3..

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical.

b. VERIFY RHRSW pump supplying desired RHR Heat Exchanger(s).

Standard:

STARTED RHRSW Pump(s) Dl or D2 using handsxitch and observed RED light illuminated above associated handswitch.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 8 OF 15 Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

c. THROTTLE the following in-service RHRSW outlet valves to obtain between 1350 and 4500 gpm RHRSW flow:

Standard:

THROTTLED valves for HX(s) in service to obtain 1350-4500 gpm RHRSW flow.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 9 OF 15 Performance Stel p: Critical X Not Critical

d. IF..... Directed by SRO, THEN ...PLACE the following keylock switches in MANUAL OVERRIDE:
  • 2-XS-74-122, RHR SYS I LPCI 2/3 CORE HEIGHT OVRD.
  • 2-XS-74-130, RHR SYS II LPCI 2/3 CORE HEIGHT OVRD.

I CUE: SRO DIRECTS OVERIDE OF 2/3 CORE HEIGHT INTERLOCK Standard:

PLACED 2-XS-74-122 and 2-XS-74-130 to MANUAL OVERRIDE. Both interlock swithces are required to place suppression pool cooling if a accident signal is present.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

  • * * * * *
  • A A * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
  • JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 10 OF 15 Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical_
e. IF ..... LPCI INITIATION Signal exists, THEN ...MOMENTARILY PLACE the following in select:
  • 2-XS-74-12 1, RHR SYS I CTMT SPRAY/CLG VLV SELECT.
  • 2-XS-74-129, RHR SYS 1I CTMT SPRAY/CLG VLV SELECT.

Standard:

MOMENTARILY PLACED 2-XS-74-121 and 2-XS-74-129 in the SELECT position.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical-f IF.....2-FCV-74-53(67), RHR SYS I(II) LPCI INBD INJECT VALVE is open, THEN ...VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-74-52(66), RHR SYS I(I1) LPCI OUTBD INJECT VALVE.

Standard:

VERIFIED open 2-FCV-74-67 by red light above handswitch. PLACED 2-HS-74-66A in the CLOSE position and VERIFIED illuminated GREEN valve position indicating lamp above associated control switch.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE II OF 15 Performnance Step: Critical X Not Critical

g. OPEN 2-FCV-74-57(7 1), RHR SYS I(II) SUPPR CHBRIPOOL ISOL VLV.

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-74-71 in OPEN and VERIFIED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp above associated control switch.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

h. VERIFY desired RHR pump(s) for Suppression Pool Cooling are operating.

Standard:

STARTED RHR Pump "D" using handswitch and observed illuminated red lights above associated handswitches or other 9-3 indications.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 12 OF 15 Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

i. THROTTLE OPEN 2-FCV-74-59(73), RHR SYS I(II) SUPPR POOL CLGrTEST VLV, to maintain EITHER of the following as indicated on 2-F1-74-50(64), RHR SYS I(1I) FLOW:
  • Between 7000 and 10,000 gpm for one-pump operation.

OR

  • At or below 13,000 gpm for two-pump operation.

Standard:

THROTTLED open 2-FCV-74-73 to obtain 7,000 to 10,000 gpm for one pump or - 13.000 gpm for two pumps on 2-11-74-64, and if, BLUE LOCA Closing Time indicating light extinquishes, then close valve to illuminate lamp.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical- Not Critical X

j. VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-74-7(30), RHR SYSTEM 1(11) MIN FLOW VALVE (VERIFY CLOSED 2-BKR-074-0007(0030) on 480V RMOV Board 2D(2E),

Compartment 5E(4E), if required).

Standard:

VERIFIED illuminated GREEN valve position indicating lamp above 2-HS-74-30.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 13 OF 15 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

k. MONITOR RHR Pump NPSH using Attachment 1.

Standard:

PERFORMER MONITORED RHR Pump NPSH per Attachment 1.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical_ Not Critical X I. NOTIFY Chemistry that RHRSW is aligned to in-service RHR Heat Exchangers.

Standard:

NOTIFIED Chemistry that RHRSW is aligned to RHR Heat Exchangers 2D.

CUE: CHEMISTRY REPEATS BACK "RHRSW IS ALIGNED TO RHR HEAT EXCHANGER 2D ".

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 14 OF 15 Performance Step: Critical_ Not Critical X

m. IF ..... Additional Suppression Pool Cooling flow is necessary, THEN.. PLACE additional RHR and RHRSW pumps in service using Steps 2.b through 2.1.

Standard:

Starts additional RHR pumps and/or RHRSW pumps, if not done previously, vith associated handswitches and observing illuminated red indicating lights above associated handswitches in accordance with Steps 2.b through 2.1.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 69 REV. NO. 10 PAGE 15 OF 15 Performance Step: Critical-Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of TOUCH STAAR during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER verified applicable components by utilizing TOUCH STAAR SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical-Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of 3-WAY COMMUNICATION during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER utilized 3-WAY COMMUNICATION SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

END OF TASK STOP TIME

TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT EOI PROGRAM MANUAL SECTION Ix 2-EOI APPENDIX-17A RHR SYSTEM OPERATION SUPPRESSSION POOL COOLING REVISION 8 PREPARED BY: M. Morrow PHONE: 3708 RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION: Operations APPROVED BY: A. S. Bhatnagar EFFECTIVE DATE: 10/26/00 LEVEL OF USE: REFERENCE USE VALIDATION DATE: 06/28/94 QUALITY-RELATED

HISTORY OF REVISION/REVIEW 2-EOI APPENDIX-17A REV.

NO. DATE: REVISED PAGES REASON FOR CURRENT REVISION 0 6/15/92 ALL New procedure. Necessary to support implementation of Revision 4 EPGs into BFNP EOIs.

1 7/10/92 ALL Incorporate Writer's Guide discrepancies, typos, and plant nomenclature discrepancies.

2 4/21/93 ALL Converted from WordPerfect 5.1 to Pagemaker 4.0 to better support desktop publishing capabilities.

References to Control Room Labels corrected.

Steps that used "Perform the following:" were reworded to summarize the tasks presented by the associated substeps.

2,3 Changed Note and Action step regarding the test isolation valve to reference the red light indication extinguishing for indication of valve closure.

4 Changed the system pressure requirement from 48 psig to 45 psig to provide a readable value on available instrumentation.

3 12/28/93 1 Corrected methodology for bypass of LPCI 2/3 Core Height Override logic associated with containment sprays and containment spray valve select logic.

3,4 Changed methodology for reset of LPCI Initiation Logic to direct both System I and System II be reset during return to normal when initiation signals have cleared.

1,3 Changed terminology from RHR System initiation to LPCI initiation.

HISTORY OF REVISION/REVIEW 2-EOI APPENDIX-17A (continued)

REV.

NO. DATE: REVISED PAGES REASON FOR CURRENT REVISION 4 8/24/94 1 Changed to clarify when EOI Appendix 16F and 16G may be performed.

2 Revised caution concerning system flow to make consistent with 01.

9/8/95 2 Deleted Step 2.k regarding controlling cooldown rate while in suppression pool cooling mode of RHR.

12/17/98 2, 5 Added an Attachment 2 for monitoring NPSH curve, as well as, a step in the Appendix directing its usage.

04/28/00 2 Exchanged sequence of step 2.g and 2.h in order to sequence suppression pool cooling valve and pump operation identically to that used in the operating instruction 2-01-74.

Corrected format and numbering of step 2.m.

10/26/00 2 Add direction to verify power available to RHR min flow valves if required to verify valve closed (TACF 2-00-012-074, TACF 3-00-008-074).

2-EOI APPENDIX-17A Rev. 8 Page 1 of 6 I ~RHR SYSTEM OPERATION E SUPPRESSSION POOL COOLING LOCATION: Unit 2 Control Room ATTACHMENTS: 1. NPSH Monitoring (\)

1. IF ...... Adequate core cooling is assured, THEN .... BYPASS LPCI Injection Valve Timers as necessary using EOI Appendices 16F and 16G.
2. PLACE RHR SYSTEM I(II) in Suppression Pool Cooling as follows:
a. VERIFY at least one RHRSW pump supplying each EECW header.
b. VERIFY RHRSW pump supplying desired RHR Heat Exchanger(s).
c. THROTTLE the following in-service RHRSW outlet valves to obtain between 1350 and 4500 gpm RHRSW flow:

"* 2-FCV-23-34, RHR HX 2A RHRSW OUTLET VLV

"* 2-FCV-23-46, RHR HX 2B RHRSW OUTLET VLV

"* 2-FCV-23-40, RHR HX 2C RHRSW OUTLET VLV

"* 2-FCV-23-52, RHR HX 2D RHRSW OUTLET VLV.

d. IF ..... Directed by SRO, THEN ... PLACE the following keylock switches in MANUAL OVERIDE:

"* 2-XS-74-122, RHR SYS I LPCI 2/3 CORE HEIGHT OVRD

"* 2-XS-74-130, RHR SYS II LPCI 2/3 CORE HEIGHT OVRD.

e. IF ..... LPCI Initiation signal exists, THEN ... MOMENTARILY PLACE the following in select:

"* 2-XS-74-121, RHR SYS I CTMT SPRAY/CLG VLV SELECT

"* 2-XS-74-129, RHR SYS II CTMT SPRAY/CLG VLV SELECT.

2-EOI APPENDIX-17A Rev. 8 Page 2 of 6

2. (continued from previous page)
f. IF ..... 2-FCV-74-53(67), RHR SYS I(II) LPCI INBD INJECT VALVE, is OPEN, THEN ... VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-74-52(66), RHR SYS I(II)

LPCI OUTBD INJECT VALVE.

g. OPEN 2-FCV-74-57(71), RHR SYS I(II) SUPPR CHBR/POOL ISOL VLV.
h. VERIFY desired RHR pump(s) for Suppression Pool Cooling are operating.

CAUTION RHR System flows below 7,000 gpm or above 10,000 gpm for one-pump operation may result in excessive vibration and equipment damage.

i. THROTTLE OPEN 2-FCV-74-59(73), RHR SYS I(II) SUPPR POOL CLG/TEST VLV, to maintain EITHER of the following as indicated on 2-FI-74-50(64), RHR SYS I(II) FLOW:
  • Between 7,000 and 10,000 gpm for one-pump operation.

OR

  • At or below 13,000 gpm for two-pump operation.
j. VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-74-7(30), RHR SYSTEM I(II) MIN FLOW VALVE (VERIFY CLOSED 2-BKR-074-0007(0030) on 480V RMOV Board 2D(2E), Compartment SE(4E), if required).
k. MONITOR RHR Pump NPSH using Attachment 1.
1. NOTIFY Chemistry that RHRSW is aligned to in-service RHR Heat Exchangers.
m. IF ..... Additional Suppression Pool Cooling flow is necessary, THEN ... PLACE additional RHR and RHRSW pumps in service using Steps 2.b through 2.1.

2-EOI APPENDIX-17A Rev. 8 Page 3 of 6

3. WHEN .... Suppression Pool Cooling is NO longer required, THEN .... SECURE System I(II) Suppression Pool Cooling as follows:

NOTE: Handswitches for 2-FCV-74-59 and 2-FCV-74-73 are held in CLOSE during closing cycle approximately 6 seconds AFTER red light extinguishes to ensure valve closure.

a. CLOSE 2-FCV-74-59(73), RHR SYS I(II) SUPPR POOL CLG/TEST VLV, as follows:
1) PLACE and HOLD 2-HS-74-S9A(73A), RHR SYS I(II)

SUPPR POOL CLG/TEST VLV, handswitch in CLOSE.

2) WHEN ... Approximately 6 seconds elapse AFTER the red light extinguishes, THEN ... RETURN 2-HS-74-59A(73A), RHR SYS I(II)

SUPPR POOL CLG/TEST VLV, handswitch to NORMAL.

b. VERIFY OPEN 2-FCV-74-7(30), RHR SYSTEM I(II) MIN FLOW VALVE.

C. IF ..... RHR operation is desired in ANY other mode, THEN ... EXIT this EOI Appendix.

d. STOP RHR PUMPS 2A and 2C (2B and 2D).
e. CLOSE 2-FCV-74-57(71), RHR SYS I(II)SUPPR CHBR/POOL ISOL VLV.

2-EOI APPENDIX-17A Rev. 8 Page 4 of 6

3. (continued from previous page)
f. IF ..... ALL of the following conditions exist:

"* LPCI Initiation Signal, AND

"* Drywell pressure below 2.4 psig, AND

"* RPV water level above -120 in.,

THEN ... RESTORE RHR System I and II logic to normal as follows:

1) DEPRESS 2-HS-74-151, LPCI AUTO-INIT LOGIC A RESET, and CHECK amber light extinguished.
2) DEPRESS 2-HS-74-152, LPCI AUTO-INIT LOGIC B RESET, and CHECK amber light extinguished.
3) DEPRESS 2-XS-74-125, CTMT SPRAY/CLG VLV INTLK LOGIC A RESET, push-button and CHECK amber light extinguished.
4) DEPRESS 2-XS-74-131, CTMT SPRAY/CLG VLV INTLK LOGIC B RESET, and CHECK amber light extinguished.
5) DEPRESS 2-XS-74-123, RECIRC DISCH VALVES ISOL LOGIC A RESET.
6) DEPRESS 2-XS-74-128, RECIRC DISCH VALVES ISOL LOGIC B RESET.
7) MOMENTARILY PLACE 2-XS-74-121, RHR SYS I CTMT SPRAY/CLG VLV SELECT, in RESET.
8) MOMENTARILY PLACE 2-XS-74-129, RHR SYS II CTMT SPRAY/CLG VLV SELECT, in RESET.
9) VERIFY the following keylock switches in NORM and key removed:

"* 2-XS-74-122, RHR SYS I LPCI 2/3 CORE HEIGHT OVRD.

"* 2-XS-74-130, RHR SYS II LPCI 2/3 CORE HEIGHT OVRD.

2-EOI APPENDIX-17A Rev. 8 Page 5 of 6

3. (continued from previous page)
g. VERIFY CLOSED the following valves:
h. STOP RHRSW pumps supplying ANY Unit 2 RHR Heat Exchanger.
i. VERIFY RHR system discharge header pressure above 45 psig on 2-PI-74-51(65), RHR SYS I(II) DISCH PRESS.

END OF TEXT

2-EOI APPENDIX-17A Rev. 8 Page 6 of 6 ATTACHMENT 1 NPSH MONITORING Adequate NPSH is assured by maintaining pump flow rates below the curve for the applicable Suppression Chamber pressure.

For Suppression Chamber pressures between the values on the curves extrapolation must be used.

CURVE 2 RHR NPSH LIMITS 245 235 -15 PSIG -SAFE 225 10 PSIG 'SAFE I" 215 5 PSIG 5SAFE205

- 195 C 0 PSIG *SAFE ý - - ,

2 185 S 175 165.

155 145 500 2500 4500 6500 8500 10500 12000 RHR PUMP FLOW(GPM)

  • SUPPR CHMBR PRESS Other indications of inadequate NPSH are:

"* Suppression Pool level below 10.0 FT

"* System flowrate decreasing with constant valve position

"* System flowrate or discharge pressure less than expected for present system conditions

"* Pump discharge pressure lower than expected or fluctuating excessively

"* Pump Motor amps lower than expected or fluctuating excessively

  • Pump Suction pressure low (local indication)

Z1 LAST PAGE

JPM NO. 8OF REV. NO. 1 PAGE 1 OF 11 I JBPROMNEMAUEI BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JPM NUMBER: 80F TITLE: RESPOND TO CONTROL ROD DRIFT IN TASK NUMBER: U-000-AB-05 SUBMITTED BY: DATE:

VALIDATED BY: DATE:

APPROVED: DATE:

TRAINING PLANT CONCURRENCE: DATE:

OPERATIONS Examination JPMs Require Operations Training Manager or Designee Approval and Plant Concurrence

JPM NO. 8OF REV. NO. 1 PAGE 2 OF 11 BROWNS FERRY NUCLWA PLANT I JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREI REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 0 09/23/99 ALL NEW JPM 1 10/04/00 ALL GENERAL REVISION 2 09/07/01 ALL GENERAL REVISION

JPM NO. 8OF REV. NO. 1 PAGE 3 OF 11 BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE OPERATOR: SS#

RO SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER: 8OF TASK NUMBER: U-085-AB-05 TASK TITLE: RESPOND TO CONTROL ROD DRIFT IN K/A NUMBER: 201002A2.03 K/A RATING: RO 3.4 SRO: 3.7 TASK STANDARD: PERFORM OPERATIONS NECESSARY TO RESPOND TO A CONTROL ROD DRIFT IN AS DIRECTED BY 2-AOI-85-5 LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR X PLANT CONTROL ROOM REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: 2-AOI-85-5, REV 12 VALIDATION TIME: CONTROL ROOM: 11:00 LOCAL:

MAX. TIME ALLOWED: -_ (Completed for Time Critical JPMs only)

PERFORMANCE TIME: CONTROL ROOM LOCAL COMMENTS:

Additional comment sheets attached? YES NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY .UNSATISFACTORY SIGNATURE: DATE:

EXAMINER

!i!i~ iii~iiiiii!III !i~ iiiiiiJOBi MEA PLANT FERRY NUCLEAR BROWNS PERFORMANCE UREii!III!! !i

    • 4*4** *4* ****.i***lji***I**:1 *7**:*** *4*4*4* 4*4* +****

IN-SIMULATOR: I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. I will provide initiating cues and reports on other actions when directed by you. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied. When your task is given, you will repeat the task and I will acknowledge "That's Correct". (OR "That's Incorrect",

if applicable). When you have completed your assigned task, you will say, "my task is complete" and I will acknowledge that your task is complete.

INITIAL CONDITIONS: You are an Operator. Unit 2 is at 100% power.

INITIATING CUES: STATE: I(INSTRUCTOR/EVALUATOR) WILL ACT AS YOUR UNIT SUPERVISOR. YOU ARE TO RESPOND TO THE NEXT EVENT.

JPM NO. 8OF REV. NO. 1 PAGE 5 OF 11 START TIME Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical EXAMINEE recognize CR Drift in and responds per 2-AOI-85-5.

Standard:

Responds per 2-AOT-85-5.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 4.1 Immediate Actions Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X 4.1.1 If multiple rods are drifting into the core, THEN Manually SCRAM Reactor. REFER TO 2-AOI-100-1.

Standard:

CHECKED periodically for multiple drift lights on full core display.

SAT UNSAT N/AC COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 8OF REV. NO. 1 PAGE 6 OF 11 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X 4.2.1 IF the Control Rod travels greater than two (2) notches from its intended position; THEN INSERT Control Rod to position 00 using continuous in Standard:

PERFORMER recognizes rod travel greater than two notches from its intended position, SELECTS & uses continuous in to drive the rod full in.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical 4.2.2 INFORM Reactor Engineer.

Standard:

Contacts RE.

SAT UNSAT N/AC COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 80F REV. NO. 1 PAGE 7 OF 11 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X 4.2.3 Checks Thermal Limits on ICS (Run Official 3D)

Standard:

Proceeds to ICS Terminal NSSS Menu & selects "Run Official 3D".

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 8OF REV. NO. 1 PAGE 8 OF 11 Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X 4.2.4 ADJUSTS CONTROL ROD PATTERN AS DIRECTED BY REACTOR ENGINER AND CHECKS THERMAL LIMITS ON ics (RUN OFFICIAL 3D)

CUE: REACTOR ENGINEER (IF REQUESTED) REPORTS THERMAL LIMITS SATISFACTORY, AND INSERTION OF SYbMETRICAL CONTROL RODS ARE NOT NECESSARY AT THIS TIME.

Standard:

FOLLOWS RE RECOtMMENDATIONS.

SAT UNSAT N/AC COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 80F REV. NO. 1 PAGE 9 OF 11 Performance Step: Critical- Not Critical X 4.2.5 IF CRD Cooling Water Header DP is excessive and causing the control rod drift, THEN Alternately ADJUST the tape setpoint CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 2-FIC-85-II, and position of CRD DRIVE WATER PRESS CONTROL VLV, 2-HS-85 23A, to establish the following:

  • CRD CLG WTR HDR DP, 2-PDI-85-18A, of about 20 psid, and
  • CRD DRIVE WTR HDR DP, 2-PDI-85-17A, between 250 and 270 psid, and
  • CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 2-FIC-85-11A, between 40 and 65 gpm.

Standard:

VERIFIED:

Cooling water DP approximately 60 psid on 2-PDI-85-18A and attempts to throttle open 2-FCV-85-27.

Drive Water DP 250-270 psid on 2-PDI-85-17A.

CRD Flow 40-65 gpm on 2-FI-85-11A.

SAT UNSAT N/AC COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 80F REV. NO. 1 PAGE 10 OF 11 4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 4.1 Immediate Actions

  • *4*4*4*** ** ** ** *4* ** *4*********** ** ** *4** * ******4* * **4**** * **

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical 4.1.1 If multiple rods are drifting into the core, THEN Manually SCRAM Reactor. REFER TO 2-AOI-100-1.

Standard:

OPERATOR recognizes multiple rod drifts and manually SCRAMS the Reactor and REFERS TO 2-AOI-100-1.

"* Depresses both scram pushbuttons.

"* Places mode switch in shutdown.

"* Verifies All Rods in.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

CUE: AFTER OPERATOR SCRAMS REACTOR AND PERFORMS ABOVE ACTIONS THEN "STATE" THAT WILL BE ALL FOR NOW

JPM NO. 80F REV. NO. 1 PAGE 11 OF 11 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of TOUCH STAAR during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER verified applicable components by utilizing TOUCH STAAR (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the need for additional training on TOUCH STAAR to maintain plant standards).

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X PERFOR1MER demonstrated the use of 3-WAY COMMUNICATION during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER utilized 3-WAY COMMUtJNICATION (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the need for additional training on 3-WAY COMMIUNICATION to maintain plant standards).

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

END OF TASK STOP TIME

ABNORMAL OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 2-AOI 5 ROD DRIFT IN REVISION 12 PREPARED BY: Michael K Teggins PHONE: 3728 RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION: OPERATIONS APPROVED BY: PHILLIP CHADWELL DATE :06/08/2001 EFFECTIVE DATE: 06/11/2001 LEVEL OF SE: REFERENCE SE ALITY RELATED

REVISION LOG Procedure Number: 2-AOI-85-5 Revision Number: 12 Pages Affected: 3 Description of Change: IC ENHANCEMENT Changed the note prior to step 4.2.8.2 stating the CRD accumulator is inop when the charging water is isolated for that CRD. The referenced Tech Spec was changed from 3.1.3 to 3.1.5.

TITLE: ROD DRIFT IN UNIT 2 2-AOI-85-5 REV 0012 1.0 PURPOSE This abnormal operating instruction provides symptoms, automatic actions and operator actions for a control rod drift in.

2.0 SYMPTOMS 2.1 CONTROL ROD DRIFT annunciator, (2-XA-55-5A, Window 28) in alarm.

2.2 DRIFT status light on Full Core Display in alarm.

2.3 Control rod position number on Full Core Display changes.

2.4 If selected, control rod position number on 4-Rod Display changes.

2.5 If selected, LPRM readings around control rod change.

3.0 AUTOMATIC ACTIONS None

TITLE: ROD DRIFT IN UNIT 2 2-AOI-85-5 REV 0012 4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 4.1 Immediate Actions 4.1.1 IF multiple rods are drifting into core, THEN Manually SCRAM Reactor. REFER TO 2-AOI-100-1.

4.2 Subsequent Actions 4.2.1 IF the Control Rod travels greater than two (2) notches from it's intended position, THEN INSERT Control Rod to position 00 using CONTINUOUS IN.

4.2.2 INFORM Reactor Engineer.

4.2.3 CHECK Thermal Limits on ICS (RUN OFFICIAL 3D).

4.2.4 ADJUST Control Rod pattern as directed by the Reactor Engineer AND CHECK Thermal Limits on ICS (RUN OFFICIAL 3D).

4.2.5 IF CRD Cooling Water Header DP is excessive and causing the control rod drift, THEN Alternately ADJUST tape setpoint of CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 2-FIC-85-11, and position of CRD DRIVE WATER PRESS CONTROL VLV, 2-HS-85-23A, to establish the following conditions:

"* CRD CLG WTR HDR DP, 2-PDI-85-18A, of about 20 psid, and

"* CRD DRIVE WTR HDR DP, 2-PDI-85-17A, between 250 and 270 psid, and

  • CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 2-FIC-85-11A, between 40 and 65 gpm.

TITLE: ROD DRIFT IN UNIT 2 2-AOI-85-5 REV 0012 4.2 Subsequent Actions (Continued)

NOTE:

All observations and checks made in the following steps should be made as a comparison and relative to the other Hydraulic Control Units.

4.2.6 VERIFY scram pilot air header aligned to scram inlet and outlet valves.

4.2.7 CHECK CRD SCRAM OUTLET, 2-FCV-085-39B, for leakage as indicated by the following:

"* Scram riser for affected HCU has higher than normal temperature.

"* CRD SCRAM OUTLET, 2-FCV-085-39B, producing flow noise.

4.2.8 CHECK CRD SCRAM INLET VALVE, 2-FCV-085-39A, for leakage as follows:

4.2.8.1 CHECK insert riser for affected HCU for higher than normal temperature.

NOTE:

The CRD accumulator shall be considered inoperable per Technical Specifications 3.1.5 when the charging water is isolated.

4.2.8.2 CLOSE CHARGING WATER SOV, 2-SHV-085-588, and OBSERVE CRD ACCUMULATOR NITROGEN SIDE PRESS, 2-PI-85-34, for a lowering trend.

TITLE: ROD DRIFT IN UNIT 2 2-AOI-85-5 REV 0012 4.2 Subsequent Actions (Continued)

NOTE:

(1) If either the Scram Inlet or Outlet valve is found to be leaking, the preferred action is to scram the affected rod at Panel 2-9-16, and initiate corrective maintenance if necessary.

(2) Individual control rod scram to attempt to reset scram valves may be performed at discretion of UNIT SUPERVISOR. Reactor Engineer will determine impact on core thermal limits and preconditioning envelope.

4.2.9 IF either Scram Inlet or Outlet Valve is found to be leaking, THEN PERFORM the following to scram the control rod:

4.2.9.1 ESTABLISH communications between Control Room and the following locations:

  • Hydraulic control unit affected, elevation 565, Reactor Building.
  • Panel 2-9-16 in Auxiliary Instrument Room, elevation 593, Control Bay.

4.2.9.2 VERIFY CLOSED CHARGING WATER SOV, 2-SHV-085-588.

NOTE:

Panel 2-9-16, containing the Rod Scram Switches is locked and a key from the Unit 2 Control Room Key Cabinet will be required to perform the next step.

4.2.9.3 INITIATE individual rod scram by actuating selected rod scram switch on Panel 2-9-16 to its scram (DOWN) position.

4.2.9.4 VERIFY control rod has reached FULL IN on Panel 2-9-5.

4.2.9.5 IF attempting to reseat scram valves, THEN At Panel 2-9-16, RETURN rod scram switch for associated control rod to its normal (UP) position.

TITLE: ROD DRIFT IN UNIT 2 2-AOI-85-5 REV 0012 4.2 Subsequent Actions (Continued) 4.2.9.6 CHECK solenoids of CRD SCRAM INLET and OUTLET valves, 2-FCV-085-39A and 2-FCV-085-39B, function normally without chatter or abnormal buzzing.

4.2.9.7 CHECK stem travel indicators on CRD SCRAM INLET and OUTLET valves, 2-FCV-085-39A and 2-FCV-085-39B, in CLOSE position.

4.2.9.8 CHECK blue Scram indicator light on Full Core Display extinguished.

4.2.9.9 RESET Rod Drift Alarm and CHECK DRIFT indicator light on Full Core Display extinguished.

4.2.9.10 CHECK annunciator CONTROL ROD DRIFT (2-XA-55-5A, Window 28) clear.

4.2.9.11 SLOWLY OPEN CHARGING WATER SOV, 2-SHV-085-588.

4.2.9.12 CHECK amber ACCUM indicator light on Full Core Display extinguished.

4.2.9.13 On local Panel 2-25-4(2-25-22), CHECK red indicating light for associated HCU extinguished.

4.2.9.14 WITHDRAW control rod to its original position in accordance with UNIT SUPERVISOR and Reactor Engineer instructions.

4.2.10 IF insert directional control valve is suspected of leaking, THEN ATTEMPT to reseat valve as follows:

4.2.10.1 INSERT control rod one notch.

4.2.10.2 WITHDRAW control rod to original position in accordance with UNIT SUPERVISOR and Reactor Engineer instructions.

4.2.11 IF attempts to stop control rod drifting are unsuccessful, THEN INSERT control rod drive to position 00.

4.2.12 REMOVE associated HCU from service. REFER TO 2-01-85 and Tech Spec 3.1.3.

TITLE: ROD DRIFT IN UNIT 2 2-AOI-85-5 REV 0012

5.0 REFERENCES

5.1 Technical Specifications Section 3.1, Reactivity Control Systems.

Section 5.4, Procedures.

Section 5.5, Programs and Manuals.

5.2 Final Safety Analysis Report Section 3.4, Reactivity Control Mechanical Design 5.3 Plant Instructions 2-ARP-9-5, Panel 2-9-5 Annunciator Response Procedures 2-AOI-100-1, Reactor Scram 2-01-85, Control Rod Drive System 5.4 Plant Drawings 2-45N620-6, Wiring Diagram Annunciator 2-47E610-85-1, Mechanical Control Diagram CRD Hydraulic System 104B2506 Sheet 2, Connection Diagram Position Indicator Probe 730E321 Sheet 10, Elementary Diagram Reactor Manual Control System 5.5 Vendor Manuals GEK-9585/9586, BFN Controlled Manual Number 9, General Electric, Control Rod Drive System, Contract 90744 5.6 Miscellaneous Documents.

INPO SER 90-15, Suspending Testing After Equipment Failure 6.0 ILLUSTRATIONS/ATTACHMENTS None END OF TEXT

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 1 OF 14 I ~ BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREI JPM NUMBER: 18 (NRC Modified) B. l.g TITLE: EOI APPENDIX 5C - INJECTION SYSTEM LINEUP - RCIC TASK NUMBER: U-O00-EM-31 SUBMITTED BY DATE:

VALIDATED BY: DATE:_____

APPROVED: DATE:

TRAINING PLANT CONCURRENCE: DATE:

OPERATIONS

  • Examination JPMs Require Operations Training Manager or Designee Approval and Plant Concurrence

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 2 OF 14 I JBPROMN BROWNS FERRY NUJCLEARt PLANT REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 3 11/29/94 1,2,3,4 REVISE TO NEW FORMAT 4 9/11/95 ALL DESIGNATED U-2 ITEMS AND FORMATTING 5 9/29/97 ALL FORMAT, ADDED PLANT WORK EXPECTATIONS TOUCH STAAR AND 3 WAY COMM., CHANGED ASOS TO US.

6 9/08/99 ALL PROCEDURE REVISION 7 10/03/00 4 EDITORIAL CHANGE

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 3 OF 14 IO EFRA BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAJAPLANT N EM ESR I OPERATOR: SS#

RO_ SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER: 18 NRC Modified.

TASK NUMBER: U-)00-EM-31 TASK TITLE: LINE UP INJECTION SYSTEMS - RCIC IN ACCORDANCE WITH EOI APPENDIX 5C K/A NUMBER: 217000A4.04 K/A RATING: RO 3.6 SRO: 3.6 TASK STANDARD: MANIPULATE CONTROLS REQUIRED TO INJECT WATER TO THE RPV USING THE REACTOR CORE ISOLATION COOLING (RCIC) SYSTEM AND MAINTAIN LEVEL AS REQUIRED.

LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR_ PLANT_ CONTROL ROOM_

REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: 2-EOI APPENDIX 5C - INJECTION SYSTEM LINEUP - RCIC. REV 3 VALIDATION TIME: COt N[TROL ROOM: 5:00 LOCAL:

MAX. TIME ALLOWED: __ (Completed for Time Critical JPMs only)

PERFORMANCE TIME: CONTROL ROOM LOCAL COMMENTS:

Additional comment sheets attached'? YES NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY UNSATISFACTORY EXAMINER: DATE:

I ~BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE IN-SIMULATOR: I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. I will provide initiating cues and reports on other actions when directed by you. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied. When your task is given, you will repeat the task and I will acknowledge "That's Correct". (OR "That's Incorrect", if applicable). When you have completed your assigned task, you will say, "my task is complete" and I will acknowledge that your task is complete.

INITIAL CONDITIONS: You are the Unit 2 Operator. The reactor has scrammed and RPV water level is decreasing slowly. EOr-1 has been entered and followed to RC/L-4.

INITIATING CUES: The US has directed you to restore RPV water level +2 to +51 inches using the Reactor Core Isolation Cooling System as directed by 2-EOI Appendix 5C, INJECTION SYSTEM LINEUP - RCIC.

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 5 OF 14 START TIME SEXAMINERS'S OPERATED AND ALL INDICATIONS ARE LOCATED ON PANEL 2-9-3.

NOTE: UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL COMPONENTS TO BE Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X WHEN REQUESTED BY EXAMINER identify/obtain copy of required EOI Appendix.

Standard:

IDENTIFIED OR OBTAINED copy of 2-EOI Appendix 5C.

SATUNSATN/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X I. IF ..... BOTH of the following exist:

  • IRx Pressure is at or below 50 psig, AND
  • Bypass of RCIC low RPV pressure isolation interlocks is necessary, THEN.. EXECUTE EOI Appendix 16A concurrently with this procedure.

Standard:

DETERMINED RPV PRESSURE >50 PSIG, as indicated by 2-PI-207A. Panel 2-9-5.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMlENTS:

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 6 OF 14 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

2. IF ....BOTH of the following exist:
  • High temperature exists in the RCIC area, AND a SRO directs bypass of RCIC High Temperature Isolation interlocks, THEN...EXECUTE EOI Appendix 16K concurrently with this procedure.

Standard:

DETERMINED high temperature does not exist in the RCIC area, as indicated by Panel 2-9-21 (2-TS-69-71 41AB.C) alarms clear or no alarm on Panel 2-9-3D window 10 (2-TA-71-41).

SAT- UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 7 OF 14 CAUTION Operating RCIC turbine below 2100 rpm may result in unstable system operation and equipment damage.

  • High Suppression Chamber pressure may trip RCIC. (Trips at 25#)
  • Operating RCIC Turbine with suction (CST Suction) temperatures above 140 0 F may result in equipment damage.

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

3. VERIFY RESET and OPEN 2-FCV-71-9, RCIC TURB TRIP/

THROT VALVE RESET.

Standard:

VERIFIED illuminated RED indicating lamp 2-ZI-71-9.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMNENTS:

JPM NO. 187 REV. NO.

PAGE 8 OF 14 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

4. VERIFY 2-FIC-71-36A, RCIC SYSTEM FLOW/CONTROL, controller in AUTO with set-point at 600 gpm.

Standard:

VERIFIED 2-FIC-71-36A in AUTO and tape set-point at 60 (XIO).

SAT_ UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical.

5. OPEN the following valves:

2-FCV-71-39, RCIC PUMP INJECTION VALVE.

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-71-39A in the OPEN position and OBSERVED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp above associated control switch.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 9 OF 14 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X 0 2-FCV-71-34, RCIC PUMP MIN FLOW VALVE.

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-71-34A in the OPEN position and OBSERVED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp above associated control switch.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical 2-FCV-71-25, RCIC LUBE OIL CLR COOLING WTR VLV.

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-71-25A in the OPEN position and OBSERVED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp above associated control switch.

SAT- UNSAT_ N/A- COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 10 OF 14 Performance Step: Critical_ Not Critical X

6. PLACE 2-HS-71-3 IA, RCIC VACUUM PUMP, handswitch in START.

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-71-3 IA in the START position and OBSERVED illuminated RED motor breaker position indicating lamp above associated handswitch.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

EXAMINER NOTE: AFTER 71-8 OPENS, THE FLOW CONTROLLER WILL FAIL TO CONTROL IN AUTOMATIC.

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

7. OPEN 2-FCV-71-8, RCIC TURBINE STEAM SUPPLY VLV, to start RCIC Turbine.

Standard:

PLACED 2-HS-71-8A in the OPEN position and OBSERVED illuminated RED valve position indicating lamp above associated control switch. (Steam flow and turbine speed increase)

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 11 OF 14 Performance Step: Critical- Not Critical X

8. CHECK proper RCIC operation by observing the following:
a. RCIC Turbine speed accelerates above 2100 rpm.

Standard:

VERIFIED RCIC turbine speed > 2100 by OBSERVING 2-SI-71-42A.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical_ Not Critical X

b. RCIC flow to RPV stabilizes and is controlled automatically at 600 gpm.

Standard:

OBSERVED 2-FIC-71-36A and VERIFIED RCIC flow to RPV stabilized at 600 GPM.

SAT- UNSAT_ N/A - COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 12 OF 14 Performance Step: Critical- Not Critical X C. 2-FCV-71.40, RCIC Testable Check Vlv, opens by observing 2-ZI-71-40A, DISC POSITION, red light illuminated.

Standard:

OBSERVED illuminated RED check valve DISC POSITION indicating lamp.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X

d. 2-FCV-71-34, RCIC PUMP MINIMvIUM FLOW VLV, closes as flow rises above 120 gpm.

Standard:

OBSERVED RCIC system flow to RPV > 120 GPM as indicated on 2-FIC-71-36A and VERIFIED illuminated GREEN valve position indicating lamp above 2-HS-71-34A.

SAT UNSAT_ N/A - COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 13 OF 14 Performance Step: Critical- Not Critical X ,

9. IF ..... BOTH of the following exist:
  • RCIC Initiation signal is NOT present, AND
  • RCIC flow is below 60 gpm, THEN ...VERIFY OPEN 2-FCV-71-34, RCIC PUMP lMIN FLOW VALVE.

Standard:

VERIFIED RCIC initiation signal not present as indicated by 2-IL-71-52, RCIC AUTO-INIT, amber lamp being extinguished.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical

10. ADJUST 2-FIC-71-36A, RCIC SYSTEM FLOW/CONTROL, controller as necessary to control injection.

Standard:

DETERMINES the automatic flow controller is failed and takes manual control of RCIC. Adjusted 2-FIC-71 36A setpoint as necessary to obtain 600 gpm flow, or a level of +2 inches.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 18 REV. NO. 7 PAGE 14 OF 14 EXAMINER'S NOTE: IT WILL NOT BE NECESSARY FOR THE PERFORMER TO OBTAIN A LEVEL > +2". AN INCREASING RPV WATER LEVEL WILL SUFFICE.

Performance Step: Critical_ Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of TOUCH STAAR during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER verified applicable components by utilizing TOUCH STAAR (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the need for additional training on TOUCH STAAR to maintain plant standards).

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

    • *** ** ** ** ** *** ** ** ** *11*11* ********* ***** ***** **** **** ***** ** *****

Performance Step: Critical_ Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of 3-WAY COMMUNICATION during is JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER utilized 3-WAY COMMUNICATION (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the need for additional training on 3-WAY COMMUNICATION to maintain plant standards).

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

END OF TASK STOP TIME

TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT EOI PROGRAM MANUAL SECTION IX 2-EOI APPENDIX-5C INJECTION SYSTEM LINEUP RCIC REVISION 3 PREPARED BY J. R. STEELE PHONE: 3708 RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION: OPERATIONS APPROVED BY: R. G. JONES DATE: 12/17/98 EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/28/98 LEVEL OF USE: REFERENCE USE VALIDATION DATE: 12/7/98 QUALITY-RELATED

HISTORY OF REVISION/REVIEW 2-EOI APPENDIX-5C REV.

NO. DATE: REVISED PAGES REASON FOR CURRENT REVISION 0 6/15/92 ALL New procedure. Necessary to support implementation of Revision 4 EPGs into BFNP EOIs.

7/10/92 ALL Incorporate Writer's Guide discrepancies, typos, and plant nomenclature discrepancies.

2 4/21/93 ALL Converted from WordPerfect 5.1 to Pagemaker 4.0 to better support desktop publishing capabilities.

References to Control Room Labels corrected.

2 Phrase "maintain RPV level" replaced with "control injection" to address cases of usage with C4 flowchart.

1 Step 7 - Changed action verb from "Verify" to "Check."

3 12/17/98 ALL Converted text to MS WORD. Added guidance to perform EOI Appendix 16K to allow RCIC operation with elevated temperatures in the area. Added procedural steps for aligning RCIC suction to either the CST or Suppression Pool.

2-EOI APPENDIX-5C Rev. 3 Page 1 of 3 I 2-EOI APPENDIX-5C I

I I i S*

INJECTION SYSTEM LINEUP RCIC LOCATION: Unit 2 Control Room ATTACHMENTS: None (V)

1. IF ...... BOTH of the following exist:

"* RPV Pressure is at or below 50 psig, AND

"* Bypass of RCIC low RPV pressure isolation interlocks is necessary, THEN .... EXECUTE EOI Appendix 16A concurrently with this procedure.

2. IF ...... BOTH of the following exist:

"* High temperature exists in the RCIC area, AND

"* SRO directs bypass of RCIC High Temperature Isolation interlocks, THEN .... EXECUTE EOI Appendix 16K concurrently with this procedure.

CAUTION

"* Operating RCIC turbine below 2100 rpm may result in unstable system operation and equipment damage.

"* High Suppression Chamber pressure may trip RCIC.

"* Operating RCIC Turbine with suction temperatures above 140'F may result in equipment damage.

3. VERIFY RESET and OPEN 2-FCV-71-9, RCIC TURB TRIP/THROT VALVE RESET.

2-EOI APPENDIX-5C Rev. 3 Page 2 of 3

4. VERIFY 2-FIC-71-36.A, RCIC SYSTEM FLOW/CONTROL, controller in AUTO with setpoint at 600 gpm.
5. OPEN the following valves:

"* 2-FCV-71-39, RCIC PUMP INJECTION VALVE

"* 2-FCV-71-34, RCIC PUMP MIN FLOW VALVE

"* 2-FCV-71-25, RCIC LUBE OIL COOLING WTR VLV.

6. PLACE 2-HS-71-31A, RCIC VACUUM PUMP, handswitch in START.
7. OPEN 2-FCV-71-8, RCIC TURBINE STEAM SUPPLY VLV, to start RCIC Turbine.
8. CHECK proper RCIC operation by observing the following:
a. RCIC Turbine speed accelerates above 2100 rpm.
b. RCIC flow to RPV stabilizes and is controlled automatically at 600 gpm.
c. 2-FCV-71-40, RCIC Testable Check Vlv, opens by observing 2-ZI-71-40A, DISC POSITION, red light illuminated.
d. 2-FCV-71-34, RCIC PUMP MIN FLOW VALVE, closes as flow rises above 120 gpm.
9. IF ...... BOTH of the following exist:

"* RCIC Initiation signal is NOT present, AND

"* RCIC flow is below 60 gpm, THEN .... VERIFY OPEN 2-FCV-71-34, RCIC PUMP MIN FLOW VALVE.

10. ADJUST 2-FIC-71-36A, RCIC SYSTEM FLOW/CONTROL, controller as necessary to control injection.

2-EOI APPENDIX-5C Rev. 3 Page 3 of 3

11. IF ...... It is desired to align RCIC suction to the Suppression Pool, THEN .... PERFORM the following:
a. OPEN 2-FCV-71-17, RCIC SUPPR POOL INBD SUCT VALVE.
b. OPEN 2-FCV-71-18, RCIC SUPPR POOL OUTBD SUCT VALVE.
c. WHEN .. 2-FCV-71-17, RCIC SUPPR POOL INBD SUCT VALVE, AND 2-FCV-71-18, RCIC SUPPR POOL OUTBD SUCT VALVE, are fully open, THEN .. VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-71-19, RCIC CST SUCTION VALVE.

NOTE: Step 12.b must be performed promptly following Step 12.a to avoid loss of suction path.

12. IF ...... It is desired to align RCIC suction to the Condensate Storage Tank, THEN .... PERFORM the following:
a. CLOSE 2-FCV-71-17, RCIC SUPPR POOL INBD SUCT VALVE.
b. WHEN .. 2-FCV-71-17, RCIC SUPPR POOL INBD SUCT VALVE starts traveling closed, THEN .. OPEN 2-FCV-71-19, RCIC CST SUCTION VALVE.
c. CLOSE 2-FCV-71-18, RCIC SUPPR POOL OUTBD SUCT VALVE.

LAST PAGE

JPM NO. 16TC REV. NO. 10 PAGE 1 OF 10 BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT I JOB PERFOR CE MEASURE I JPM NUMBER: 16TC TITLE: 2/3-SSI-2-1, ATTACHMENT 1, SECTION 1.0: U2 REACTOR BUILDING FIRE TASK NUMBER: U-000-SS-01 SUBMITTED BY: DATE:

DATE:

VALIDATED BY:

DATE:

APPROVED:

TRATING DATE:

PLANT CONCURRENCE:

OPERATIONS Examination JPMs Require Operations Training Manager or Designee Approval and Plant Concurrence

JPM NO. 16TC REV. NO. 10 PAGE 2 OF 10 BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAE PLANT I JOB P MEASUEi REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 3 11/26/94 1,2,3,4 REVISE TO NEW FORMAT 5 DELETE REFERENCE TO BKR 610 4 9/17/95 ALL NEW PROCEDURE 5 12/3/95 ALL CHANGED PROCEDURE REV,REPAGINATION & ADDED CUES, MODIFIED FORMAT 6 5/1/96 2,3,5,6. CHANGED PROCEDURE REV, MODIFIED FORMAT (MINOR WORD CHANGES) 7 11/6/96 3, 4, 9 ADDED NON-CRITICAL STEPS ON TOUCH STAAR AND SAFETY, CHANGED ASOS TO US.

8 09/17/97 ALL FORMAT, CHANGED MGT EXPECTATIONS TO PLANT WORK EXPECTATIONS, ADDED 3-WAY COMM.

9 09/08/98 2,4,5, 6 PROCEDURE CHANGE (Minor) 10 09/08/98 3,6,7,8,9 UPDATE PROCEDURE REV AND RENUMBER STEPS

JPM NO. 16TC REV. NO. 10 PAGE 3 OF 10 I

OPERATOR:

JBPROMNEMAUEI BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT SS#

RO SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER: 16TC TASK NUMBER: U-000-SS-01 TASK TITLE: 2/3-SSI-2-1, ATT. 1, SECTION 1.0: RX BLDG FIRE K/A NUMBER: 262001G9 K/A RATING: RO 3.6 SRO: 3.6 TASK STANDARD: SIMULATE OPENING OF BREAKERS 902 AND 952, AND PLACING 250V CHGR 2A PWR SW IN EMERGENCY ON BATTERY BOARD 2; SIMULATE PLACING BKR 710 TO OFF, PLACING 250V CHGR 3 PWR SW IN EMERGENCY ON BATTERY BOARD 3; AND SIMULATE PLACING 250V CHGR 1 PWR SW IN EMERGENCY. ATTACHMENT 1 SECTION 1 MUST BE COMPLETED AND THE UNIT 2 US NOTIFIED WITHIN 10 MINUTES OF ENTRY INTO 2/3-SSI-2-1.

LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR PLANT X CONTROL ROOM REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: 2/3-SSI-2-1, ATTACHMENT 1, OPERATORj 1 MANUAL ACTIONS (REV 0005)I VALIDATION TIME: CONTROL ROOM:

  • LOCAL:
  • MAX. TIME ALLOWED: (Completed for Time Critical JPMs only)

PERFORMANCE TIME:

  • CONTROL ROOM LOCAL COMMENTS: * (Each section has different times and stands alone)

Additional comment sheets attached? YES NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY UNSATISFACTORY SIGNATURE: DATE:

EXAMINER

BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT I I IN-PLANT: I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. All steps shall be simulated. I will provide initiating cues and indicate any steps to be discussed. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied. When your task is given, you will repeat the task and I will acknowledge "That's Correct".

(OR "That's Incorrect", if applicable). When you have completed your assigned task, you will say "my task is complete" and I will acknowledge that your task is complete.

NON-CRITICAL STEPS: At the end of this JPM, PERFORMER will be evaluated on PLANT WORK EXPECTATIONS:

1. PERFORPMER shall abide by all SAFETY RULES (hardhats, safety glasses, sideshields, and hearing protection shall be worn AS REQUIRED). Electrical Safety shall also be in compliance:

Exposed conductive articles such as rings, metal wristwatches, bracelets, metal necklaces, key chains, and metal belt buckles shall not be worn by employees within REACHING DISTANCE of exposed energized electrical conductors of 50 volts or greater. CAUTION IS WARRANTED when utilizing a laser pointer to perform TOUCH STAAR around electrical components during plant JPM's.

2. PERFORMER shall demonstrate the use of TOUCH STAAR during this JPM.
3. PERFORMER shall demonstrate the use of 3-WAY COMMUNICATION.

INITIAL CONDITIONS: Unit 2 was at 100% power and Unit 3 at 60 %

power. The SSIs have been entered due to a fire in the Unit 2 Reactor Building. You are an Operator and have a hand-held radio with you.

INITIATING CUES: The Unit 2 UNIT SUPERVISOR directs you to complete 2/3-SSI-2-1, Attachment 1, Section 1.0.

JPM NO. 16TC REV. NO. 10 PAGE S OF 10 START TIME CUE: WHEN THE OPERATOR REPEATS THE TASK, HAND HIM/HER A COPY OF 2/3-SSI-2-1, ATTACHMENT 1 AND RECORD THE START TIME.

Performance Step: Critical X Not Critical 1.0 RPS Trip and 250VDC Battery Charger Resetting (10 Min) 1.1 PROCEED to Battery Board 2 AND PLACE the following Breakers in OFF:

1.1.1 BKR NO. 902 RPS MG SET A TIE TO BAT BD 2.

Standard:

At Battery Board 2, SIMULATED PLACING breaker 902 in the OFF position.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

I CUE:

POSITION.

[WHEN SIMULATED] BREAKER NO. 902 IS IN THE OFF I l

JPM NO. 16TC REV. NO. 10 PAGE 6 OF 10 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical 1.1.2 BKR. NO. 952 RPS MG SET B TIE TO BAT BD U-2.

Standard:

At Battery Board 2, SIMULATED PLACING breaker 952 in the OFF position within 10 minutes of START TIME.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

CUE: [WHEN SIMUgLATED] BREAICER NO. 952 IS IN THE OFF POSITION.

INSTRUCTOR'S NOTE:

RECORD COMPLETION TIME OF STEP 1.1.2 HERE NOTE:

The following steps will place battery chargers in service with 480V load shed logic trip bypassed.

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical 1.2 PROCEED to 250VDC BATTERY CHARGER 2A AND PLACE 250V CHGR 2A PWR SW in EMERG.

Standard:

SIMULATED PLACING 250V BATTERY CHARGER 2A PWR SW in EMERG.

SAT UNSAT N/AC COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 16TC REV. NO. 10 PAGE 7 OF 10 CUE: [WHEN SIMULATED] 250 VOLT SWITCH IS IN THE EMERGENCY POSITION.,

BATTERY CHARGER 2A POWER jI Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical 1.3 PROCEED to Battery Board Room 3.

(20 Min) 1.4 PLACE BKR NO. 710 DPO ENGINEERING SHOP in OFF.

Standard:

SIMULATED PLACING BKR NO. 710 on Battery Board 3 in OFF.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

ICUE: POSITION.

[WHEN SIMULATED] BREAKER NO. 710 IS IN THE OFF I I

JPM NO. 16TC REV. NO. 10 PAGE 8 OF 10 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical 1.5 PROCEED to 2SOVDC BATTERY CHARGER 3 AND PLACE 250V CHGR 3 PWR SW in EMERG.

Standard:

SIMULATED PLACING 250 V BATTERY CHARGER 3 PWR SW in EMERG.

SAT UNSAT___N/A- COMMENTS:

I CUE:

THE EMERGENCY POSITION.

[WHEN SIMULATED] 250 VOLT CHARGER 3 POWER SWITCH IS IN I Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical 1.6 PROCEED to 25OVDC BATTERY CHARGER 1 AND PLACE 250V CHGR 1 PWR SW in EMERG.

Standard:

SIMULATED PLACING 25OVDC BATTERY CHGR 1 PWR SW in EMERG within 20 minutes of START TIME.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

CUE: [WHEN SIMULATED] 250 VOLT BATTERY CHARGER 1 POWER SWITCH IS IN THE EMERGENCY POSITION.

INSTRUCTOR' S NOTE:

RECORD COMPLETION TIME OF STEP 1.7 HERE

JPM NO. 16TC REV. NO. 10 PAGE 9 OF 10 Performance Step : Critical_, Not Critical X 1.7 NOTIFY the Unit 2 Unit Supervisor of completion of this section.

Standard:

SIMULATED contacting Unit 2 UNIT SUPERVISOR by PHONE or RADIO and informing SM that ATTACHMENT 1, SECTION 1 OF 2/3-SSI-2-1 is complete.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

CUE: [WHEN THE OPERATOR NOTIFIES THE UNIT 2 "UNIT SUPERVISOR" OF COMPLETION] REPEAT " ATTACHMENT 1, SECTION 1 OF 2/3-SSI-2-1 IS COMPLETE."

THAT WILL BE ALL FOR NOW.

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X PERFORMER complied with all safety rules and regulations.

Standard:

PERFORMER complied with all safety rules and regulations (hardhat, safety glasses, sideshields, and hearing protection was worn AS REQUIRED.) (INSTRUCTOR determines if N/A due to plant conditions)

ELECTRICAL SAFETY was also adhered to: Exposed conductive articles such as rings, metal wristwatches, bracelets, and metal necklaces shall not be worn by employees within reaching distance of exposed energized electrical conductors of 50 volts or greater.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 16TC REV. NO. 10 PAGE 10 OF 10 Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of TOUCH STAAR during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER verified applicable components by utilizing TOUCH STAAR (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the need for additional training on TOUCH STAAR to maintain plant standards).

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step:

PERFORMER demonstrated the use of 3-WAY COMMUNICATION during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER utilized 3-WAY COMMUNTICATION (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the need for additional training on 3-WAY COMMUNICATION to maintain plant standards).

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

END OF TASK STOP TIME

TITLE: UNIT 2 REACTOR BUILDING FIRE 2/3-SSI-2-1 EL. 519 THROUGH 565 WEST OF COLUMN LINE RII ATTACHMENT 1 (Page 1 of 6)

REV 0005 ATTACHMENT 1 OPERATOR 1 MANUAL ACTIONS (INFORMATION COPY) 1.0 RPS Trip and 250VDC Battery Charger Resetting CHECKED (10 Min) 1.1 PROCEED to Battery Board 2 AND PLACE the following Breakers in OFF:

1.1.1 BKR NO. 902 RPS MG SET A TIE TO BAT BD 2.

1.1.2 BKR NO. 952 RPS MG SET B TIE TO BAT BD 2 U-2.

NOTE:

The following steps will place battery chargers in service with 480V load shed logic trip bypassed.

1.2 PROCEED to 250VDC BATTERY CHARGER 2A AND PLACE 250V CHGR 2A PWR SW in EMERG.

1.3 PROCEED to Battery Board Room 3.

(20 Min) 1.4 PLACE BKR NO. 710 DPO ENGINEERING SHOP in OFF.

1.5 PROCEED to 25OVDC BATTERY CHARGER 3 AND PLACE 250V CHGR 3 PWR SW in EMERG.

1.6 PROCEED to 250VDC BATTERY CHARGER 1 AND PLACE 250V CHGR 1 PWR SW in EMERG.

1.7 NOTIFY the Unit 2 Unit Supervisor of completion of this section.

1.8 PROCEED to 480V Reactor MOV Board 2B in preparation of performing Section 2.0.

Page 17 of 72 2/3-ssi-2-i

TITLE: UNIT 2 REACTOR BUILDING FIRE 2/3-SSI-2-1 EL. 519 THROUGH 565 WEST OF COLUMN LINE RII ATTACHMENT 1 (Page 2 of 6)

REV 0005 ATTACHMENT 1 OPERATOR 1 MANUAL ACTIONS (INFORMATION COPY) 2.0 Align 480V Reactor MOV Boards 2A and 2B (60 Min) 2.1 Notification has been received from the Unit 2 Unit Supervisor to perform this section.

2.2 PROCEED to 480V Reactor MOV Board 2B AND PLACE the following breakers in OFF:

2.2.1. Compartment 4A, DRYWELL BLOWER 2B-3.

2.2.2. Compartment 15A, DRYWELL BLOWER 2B-4.

2.3 PROCEED to 480V Reactor MOV Board 2A AND PLACE the following breakers in OFF:

2.3.1 Compartment 17A, DRYWELL BLOWER 2A-3 2.3.2 Compartment 18A, DRYWELL BLOWER 2A-4.

2.4 PROCEED to 480V Shutdown Board 2A, Compartment 3A, AND VERIFY CLOSED NORMAL FEEDER 480V REACTOR MOV BOARD 2A.

2.5 PROCEED to 480V Shutdown Board 2B, Compartment 3B, AND VERIFY CLOSED NORMAL FEEDER 480V REACTOR MOV BOARD 2B.

2.6 PROCEED to 480V Reactor MOV Board 2A AND PERFORM the following:

2.6.1 PROCEED to Compartment 3D AND DEPRESS RESET/TRIP pushbutton.

2.6.2 PROCEED to Compartment 3A AND PLACE NORMAL FEEDER CONTROL SWITCH in CLOSE.

2.7 NOTIFY Unit 2 Unit Supervisor of completion of this section.

2.8 PROCEED to Control Room AHU lB located in Unit 1 Mechanical Equipment room El 617 in preparation of performing Section 3.0.

Page 18 of 72 2/3-SSI-2-1

TITLE: UNIT 2 REACTOR BUILDING FIRE 2/3-SSI-2-1 EL. 519 THROUGH 565 WEST OF COLUMN LINE RII ATTACHMENT 1 (Page 3 of 6)

REV 0005 ATTACHMENT 1 OPERATOR 1 MANUAL ACTIONS 3.0 Align and Start B Train Control Bay HVAC CHECKED (60 Min) 3.1 Notification has been received from the Unit 2 Unit Supervisor to perform this section.

3.2 PROCEED to Control Room AHU lB AND OPEN TCV-31-19 BYPASS, 1-31-526.

3.3 PLACE CONTROL RM AIR HANDLING UNIT 1A, 0-HS-031-0081, in OFF.

3.4 PLACE CONTROL RM AIR HANDLING UNIT lB, 0-HS-31-82, in ON.

3.5 PROCEED to Panel 0-LPNL-925-0165 AND PERFORM the following (3C unit 1 mech equip room) 3.5.1 PLACE BATTERY & BOARD RM EXH FAN A/B, 0-HS-031-0074A, in ON lB.(panel A)

(120 Min) 3.5.2 PLACE ELEC BD RM AHU 2A FAN CONTROL, 2-HS-031-2320B, in STOP.(panel D) 3.5.3 PLACE ELEC BD RM ANU 2B FAN REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH, 2-HS-031-2330B, in START.(panel E) 3.5.4 PLACE ELEC BD RM AHU lB FAN REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH, 1-HS-031-2310B, in STOP. (panel E) 3.5.5 PLACE ELEC BD RM AHU 1A FAN REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH, 1-HS-031-2300B, in START. (panel D) 3.6 PROCEED to Unit 1 Mechanical Equipment Room El 606.

(60 Min) 3.7 PLACE HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS A&B, 0-HS-31-141, to OFF (Located on west wall behind pumps.)

Page 19 of 72 2/3-SSI-2-I

TITLE: UNIT 2 REACTOR BUILDING FIRE 2/3-SSI-2-1 EL. 519 THROUGH 565 WEST OF COLUMN LINE RII ATTACHMENT 1 (Page 4 of 6)

REV 0005 ATTACHMENT 1 OPERATOR 1 MANUAL ACTIONS (INFORMATION COPY) 3.0 Align and Start B Train Control Bay HVAC CHECKED (60 Min) (Continued) 3.8 PROCEED to Control Bay el. 593 AHU 1B AND OPEN l-TCV-31-22 BYPASS, 1-31-530.

3.9 PROCEED to AHU 1A AND PLACE EL 593 AIR HANDLING UNIT IA, 0-HS-031-0088, in OFF.

3.10 PROCEED to AHU lB AND PLACE EL 593 AIR HANDLING UNIT lB, 0-HS-31-89, in ON.

3.11 VERIFY the following at the local 4KV Shutdown Boards:

3.11.1 PROCEED to 4KV Shutdown Board D, Compartment 12, 4KV SUPPLY FOR l&2 CONTROL BAY CHILLER B, 0-BKR-031-2200, AND PERFORM the following:

3.11.1.1 PLACE CB CHILLER B TRANSFER SWITCH, O-XS-031-2200A, in EMERG.

3.11.1.2 PLACE CONTROL BAY CHILLER B control switch, 0-HS-031-2200B, in CLOSE.

3.11.2 PROCEED to 4KV Shutdown Board B, Compartment 18, 4KV SUPPLY FOR 1&2 CONTROL BAY CHILLER A, O-BKR-031-2100, AND PERFORM the following:

3.11.2.1 PLACE CB CHILLER A TRANSFER SWITCH, O-XS-031-2100A, in EMERG.

3.11.2.2 PLACE CONTROL BAY CHILLER A control switch, 0-HS-031-2100B, in TRIP.

Page 20 of 72 2/3-SSI-2-i

TITLE: UNIT 2 REACTOR BUILDING FIRE 2/3-SSI-2-1 EL. 519 THROUGH 565 WEST OF COLUMN LINE RII ATTACHMENT 1 (Page 5 of 6)

REV 0005 ATTACHMENT 1 OPERATOR 1 MANUAL ACTIONS (INFORMATION COPY) 3.0 Align and Start B Train Control Bay HVAC CHECKED (Continued) 3.12 PROCEED to the Control Bay Chiller enclosure above the Unit 1 & 2 DG Building.

3.13 VERIFY 1&2 CONT BAY CHW PUMP B TRANSFER SWITCH, 0-XS-31-2201, in LOCAL.

3.14 VERIFY l&2 CONT BAY CHW PUMP B EMERG STOP SWITCH, 0-HS-31-2201D, in RESET.

3.15 PLACE l&2 CONT BAY CHW PUMP B LOCAL SWITCH, 0-HS-31-2201C, in START.

3.16 VERIFY the following switch positions:

3.16.1 CONTROL PANEL MODE SELECT, 0-HS-31-2210BA(HS1), in DIGITAL CONTROL.

3.16.2 ANALOG CONTROL MODE SELECT, 0-HS-31-2210BB(HS2), in ANALOG STOP.

3.16.3 Unit l&2 CB CHILLER B REMOTE HS APPENDIX R DISC SW, 0-HS-31-2210, in LOCAL.

3.16.4 CONTROL BAY CHILLER B, 0-BKR-31-2210, in ON.

NOTE:

There is approximately a 2 minute time delay between when the switch is placed in AUTO LOCAL and when the chiller actually starts.

3.17 START Control Bay Chiller B at Local Display Panel 0-PMC-31-2200A, by placing switch in AUTO LOCAL.

3.18 NOTIFY the Unit 2 Unit Supervisor of completion of this section.

3.19 PROCEED to 480V DSL Aux Bd B in preparation of performing Section 4.0.

Page 21 of 72 2/3-SSI-12-i

TITLE: UNIT 2 REACTOR BUILDING FIRE 2/3-SSI-2-1 EL. 519 THROUGH 565 WEST OF COLUMN LINE RII ATTACHMENT 1 (Page 6 of 6)

REV 0005 ATTACHMENT 1 OPERATOR 1 MANUAL ACTIONS (INFORMATION COPY) 4.0 Deenergize 0-FCV-67-48 (EECW SOUTH HDR SUPPLY VALVE)

CHECKED 4.1 Notification has been received from the Unit 2 Unit Supervisor to perform this section.

(120 Min) 4.2 PROCEED to Compartment 12C AND OPEN RHRSW PUMP Dl SPLY TO EECW FCV-67-48, Breaker.

4.3 PROCEED to 480V RMOV Bd IB, Compartment 14C2 AND PERFORM one of the following:

4.3.1 VERIFY CLOSED RHR HEAT EXCHANGER B SW OUTLET VALVE I-FCV-23-46, AND THEN OPEN the breaker, or 4.3.2 OPEN the breaker AND THEN locally VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-23-46. (RB EL 565 SE) 4.4 PROCEED to 480V RMOV Bd 1B, Compartment 15C AND PERFORM one of the following:

4.4.1 VERIFY CLOSED RHR HEAT EXCHANGER D SW OUTLET VALVE 1-FCV-23-52, AND THEN OPEN the breaker, or 4.4.2 OPEN the breaker AND THEN locally VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-23-52. (RB EL 565 SE) 4.5 NOTIFY the Unit 2 Unit Supervisor of completion of this attachment.

NAME (print) INITIALS Performed by:

Reviewed by:

US DATE Page 22 of 72 2/3-SSI-2-1

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 1 OF 15 BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT I JB PERFOAE MEASURE JPM NUMBER: 27F TITLE: 2-EOI APPENDIX 7K - ALTERNATE RPV INJECTION SYSTEM LINEUP - FIRE SYSTEM (THROUGH RHR SYSTEM II)

TASK NUMBER: U-000-EM-14 SUBMITTED BY: DATE:

VALIDATED BY: DATE:

APPROVED: DATE:

TRAINING PLANT CONCURRENCE: DATE:

OPERATIONS Examination JPMs Require Operations Training Manager or Designee Approval and Plant Concurrence

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 2 OF 15 BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR( PLANT I I REVISION LOG Revision Effective Pages Description Number Date Affected of Revision 2 12/6/94 1,2,3,4 REVISE TO NEW FORMAT 3 11/8/95 ALL UPDATE TO MATCH BASE PROCEDURE REVS 8/1/96 ALL ADDED CRITICAL STEP FOR 4

MGT EXPECTATIONS.

CHANGED FORMAT FOR ACKNOWLEDGING TASK, AND UNIT 2 SPECIFIC JPM.

9/6/96 2, 4 ADD TO INITIATING CUE TO 5

VERIFY CLOSED RSW STRG TNK ISOL VLVS LOCALLY 9/13/99 ALL CHANGED MGT. EXPECT TO 6

PLANT WORK EXPECT. WITH CRIT STEPS TO NON-CRIT.

STEPS, FORMAT DOCUMENT, AND ADDED 3-WAY COMM.

10/03/00 4 Deleted non-critical 7

steps.

8 09/01/01 ALL General Revision.

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 3 OF 15 IJOS BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT PERFORMANCE MEASURE I

OPERATOR: SS#

RO SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER: 27F TASK NUMBER: U-000-EM-44 TASK TITLE: LINE UP ALTERNATE RPV INJECTION SYSTEM - FIRE SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2-EOI APPENDIX 7K K/A NUMBER: 295031EA1.01 K/A RATING: RO 4.4 SRO: 4.4 TASK STANDARD: SIMULATE PERFORMING VALVE MANIPULATIONS REQUIRED TO ALIGN THE FIRE SYSTEM TO INJECT INTO THE RPV VIA THE RHR SYSTEM AS DIRECTED BY 2-EOI APPENDIX 7K LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR PLANT X CONTROL ROOM REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: 2-EOI APPENDIX 7K, REV 6 VALIDATION TIME: CONTROL ROOM: 25:00 LOCAL: 20:00 MAX. TIME ALLOWED: (Completed for Time Critical JPMs only)

PERFORMANCE TIME: CONTROL ROOM LOCAL COMMENTS:

Additional comment sheets attached? YES NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY UNSATISFACTORY SIGNATURE: DATE:

EXAMINER

I I BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE IN-PLANT: I will explain the initial conditions and state the task to be performed. All steps shall be simulated. I will provide initiating cues and indicate any steps to be discussed. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this job performance measure will be satisfied. When your task is given, you will repeat the task and I will acknowledge "That's Correct".

(OR "That's Incorrect", if applicable). When you have completed your assigned task, you will say, "my task is complete" and I will acknowledge that your task is complete.

INITIAL CONDITIONS: You are an extra operator. A tornado has caused Unit 2 reactor to scram and no AC power is available, all Diesel Genrators failed. Due to an un-isolable leak and several equipment failures the RPV inventory cannot be maintained above TAF. The diesel fire pump is running. The fire system injection into RHR System II is to be used as a source of makeup to the REV.

(RHR System I is tagged)

INITIATING CUES: The Unit 2 Operator directs you to perform manual valve alignments per Attachment 1 of 2-EOI Appendix 7K, verifying RSW STORAGE TANK ISOL. VALVES closed and align RHR System II for injection to the RPV. You have a radio.

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 5 OF 15 Evaluator Note: Actual field performance steps start on page 10.

Cues are provided at critical points to simulate the control room operator directing manipulations of plant valves due to loss of AC power.

Performance Step: Critical- Not Critical X WHEN REQUESTED BY EXAMINER identify/obtain copy of required procedure.

Standard:

IDENTIFIED OR OBTAINED copy of 2-EOI APPENDIX 7K.

SAT UNSAT N/A_ COMMENTS:

NOTE:With AC power NOT available, valve manipulations are manual and performed locally.

1. IF ..... ALL AC Power is NOT available, THEN ... REFER TO Attachment 1 and DISPATCH personnel to manually operate the listed valves while performing the following steps.
  • CAUTION *
  • Automatic initiation of fire system will divert water *
  • from the RPV during performance of this procedure. *
2. NOTIFY Unit 1 Operator to perform the following:
a. VERIFY at least one electric or diesel driven fire pump running (Unit 1, Panel 9-20).
b. IF ...... Diesel Driven fire pump is running, THEN .... DISPATCH personnel to diesel fire pump as soon as possible to check proper operation.

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 6 OF 15

c. VERIFY CLOSED the following valves (Unit 1, Panel 9-20):

0-FCV-25-32, RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION VALVE.

  • 0-FCV-25-70, RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION VALVE.
d. OPEN FCV-23-57, STANDBY COOLANT VALVE FROM RHRSW (Unit 1, Panel 9-3).
3. VERIFY RHR pumps 2A and 2C shutdown (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).
4. OPEN 2-FCV-74-100, RHR SYS I U-I DISCH XTIE, (Unit 2, Panel 9 3).
5. VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-23-52, RHR HX 2D RHRSW OUTLET VLV (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).
6. VERIFY OPEN the following valves (Unit 2, Panel 9-3):

2-FCV-74-52, RHR SYS I LPCI OUTBD INJECT VALVE 2-FCV-74-53, RHR SYS I LPCI INBD INJECT VALVE.

7. IF ...... Additional injection flow is required, THEN .... INJECT using RHR System II as follows:
a. VERIFY RHR pumps 2B and 2D shut down (Unit 2, Panel 9 3).
b. OPEN 2-FCV-23-57, STANDBY COOLANT VLV FROM RHRSW, (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).

NOTE: Breaker compartment for 2-FCV-74-101, RHR SYS II U-3 DISCH XTIE, valve is maintained in the open position as an Appendix R requirement.

c. DISPATCH personnel to close 480V ACB to 2-FCV-74-101, RHR SYS II U-3 DISCH XTIE, (480V RMOV BD 3B, Compartment 19E.
d. OPEN 2-FCV-74-101, RHR SYS II U-3 DISCH XTIE (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 7 OF 15

e. VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-23-46, RHR HX 2B RHRSW OUTLET VLV, (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).
f. VERIFY OPEN the following valves (Unit 2, Panel 9-3):

2-FCV-74-67, RHR SYS II LPCI INBD INJECT VALVE

END OF TEXT

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 8 OF 15 (ATTACHMENT 1)

VALVE LOCATIONS AND POSITIONS NOTE: The valves listed below are operated ONLY when directed by the Unit Operator.

VALVE POSITION LOCATION 0-FCV-25-32, RSW STRG CLOSED UNIT 1 RB NW, El 639 ft, SLC TNK ISOLATION VALVE Area, West wall by Gland Seal Water tank 0-FCV-25-70, RSW STRG CLOSED TNK ISOLATION VALVE SYSTEM I l-FCV-023-0057, STANDBY OPEN Unit 1 RB SE, El 565 COOLANT VLV ft, overhead above equipment air lock 2-FCV-74-100, RHR HTX A-C OPEN Unit 2 RB SW, El 565 DISCH XTIE (TO U-I) VLV ft, overhead at west wall above door to elevator and stairs 2-FCV-23-52, RHR HEAT CLOSED UNIT 2 RB SE, El 565 EXCHANGER D SW OUTLET VALVE ft, by SW Stairwell 2-FCV-74-53, RHR SYSTEM I OPEN Unit 2 RB, El 580 ft INBD INJECTION VLV above drywell personnel access 2-FCV-74-52, RHR SYSTEM I OUTBD INJECTION VLV OPEN

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 9 OF 15 SYSTEM II 2-FCV-074-0101, RHR HTX B-D OPEN Unit 2 RB SE, El 565 DISCH XTIE (TO U-3) VLV ft, overhead on platform 2-FCV-23-57, STANDBY OPEN Unit 2 RB SE, El 565 COOLANT VALVE ft overhead on platform 2-FCV-23-46, RHR HX B RHRSW CLOSED UNIT 2 RB SE, El 565 OUTLET VLV ft, by SE Stairwell 2-FCV-074-0067, RHR SYSTEM OPEN Unit 2 RB, El 580 ft, II INBD INJECTION VLV above drywell personnel access 2-FCV-074-0066, RHR SYSTEM II OUTBD INJECTION VLV OPEN

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 10 OF 15 CUE: U2 Operator directs you to verify CLOSED the valves in Step 2.C locally per Attachment 1, 0-FCV-25-32 and 0-FCV-25-70.

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical CLOSE 0-FCV-25-32, RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION VALVE.

Standard:

SIMULATED CLOSING 0-FCV-25-32.

SAT UNSAT ___N/A_ COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical CLOSE 0-FCV-25-70, RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION VALVE.

Standard:

SIMULATED CLOSING 0-FCV-25-70.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 11 OF 15 CUE: OPEN 2-FCV-23-57 locally.

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical OPEN 2-FCV-23-57, STANDBY COOLANT VALVE.

Standard:

SIMULATED ENGAGING handwheel and ROTATING 2-FCV-23-57 handwheel in the COUNTERCLOCKWISE direction.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

CUE: OPEN 2-FCV-74-101 locally.

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical OPEN 2-FCV-074-0101, RHR HTX B-D DISCH XTIE (TO U-3) VLV.

Standard:

SIMULATED ENGAGING handwheel and ROTATING 2-FCV-074-0101 handwheel in the COUNTERCLOCKWISE direction.

SAT UNSAT ___N/A- COMMENTS:

CUE: [WHEN SIMULATED] THE HANDWHEEL IS TURNING AND THE VALVE STEM IS MOVING OUTWARD. [PAUSE] THE HANDWHEEL IS NOW SNUG.

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 12 OF 15 CUE: VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-23-46 locally.

  • 4** ** * ** ** * *** ** *4* ** *4*4*4* * * ** ** * * ** * * ** * * * *
  • 4*4*4* *
  • 4*4*

Performance Step : Critical Not Critical X VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-23-46, RHR HEAT EXCHANGER B SW OUTLET VALVE.

Standard:

VERIFIED 2-FCV-23-46 valve position indicator indicating CLOSED or SIMULATED engaging handwheel and rotating handwheel in the CLOCKWISE direction.

SAT UNSAT ___N/A_ COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 13 OF 15 CUE: OPEN 2-FCV-74-67 and 2-FCV-74-66

    • ** *W* ** * *** ** * * * **
  • 4 ** * * **4WWW
  • 4*4*4W*4W* ** * * **

Performance Step  : Critical X Not Critical OPEN 2-FCV-074-0067, RHR SYSTEM II INBD INJECTION VLV.

Standard:

SIMULATED ENGAGING handwheel and ROTATING 2-FCV-074-0067 handwheel in the COUNTERCLOCKWISE direction.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

CUE: [WHEN SIMULATED] THE HANDWHEEL IS TURNING AND THE VALVE STEM IS MOVING OUTWARD. [PAUSE] THE HANDWHEEL IS NOW SNUG.

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical OPEN 2-FCV-074-0066, RHR SYSTEM II OUTBD INJECTION VLV.

Standard:

SIMULATED ENGAGING handwheel and ROTATING 2-FCV-074-0066 handwheel in the COUNTERCLOCKWISE direction.

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

CUE: [WHEN SIMULATED] THE HANDWHEEL IS TURNING AND THE VALVE STEM IS MOVING OUTWARD. [PAUSE] THE HANDWHEEL IS NOW SNUG.

S.--

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 14 OF 15 Performance Step Critical X Not Critical PERFORMER demonstrated the use of TOUCH STAAR during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER verified applicable components by utilizing TOUCH STAAR (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the need for additional training on TOUCH STAAR to maintain plant standards).

SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

JPM NO. 27F REV. NO. 8 PAGE 15 OF 15 Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical PERFORMER complied with all safety rules and regulations.

Standard:

PERFORMER complied with all safety rules and regulations (hardhat, safety glasses, sideshields, and hearing protection was worn AS REQUIRED.) (INSTRUCTOR determines if N/A due to plant conditions)

ELECTRICAL SAFETY was also adhered to: Exposed conductive articles such as rings, metal wristwatches, bracelets, metal necklaces, key chains, and metal belt buckles shall not be worn by employees within reaching distance of exposed energized electrical conductors of 50 volts or greater.

SAT UNSAT N/A- COMMENTS:

Performance Step: Critical Not Critical X PERFORMER demonstrated the use of 3-WAY COMMUNICATION during this JPM.

Standard:

PERFORMER utilized 3-WAY COMMUNICATION (Standard is subjective and instructor must evaluate the need for additional training on 3-WAY COMMUNICATION to maintain plant standards).

SAT- UNSAT_ N,,/A COMMENTS:

END OF TASK STOP TIME:

TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT EOI PROGRAM MANUAL SECTION IX 2-EOI APPENDIX-7K ALTERNATE RPV INJECTION SYSTEM LINEUP FIRE SYSTEM REVISION 6 PREPARED BY: M. Morrow PHONE: 3708 RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION: Operations APPROVED BY: A. S. Bhatnagar EFFECTIVE DATE: 10/26/00 LEVEL OF USE: REFERENCE USE VALIDATION DATE: 04/03/93 QUALITY-RELATED

HISTORY OF REVISION/REVIEW 2-EOI APPENDIX-7K REV.

NO. DATE: REVISED PAGES REASON FOR CURRENT REVISION 0 6/15/92 ALL New procedure. Necessary to support implementation of Revision 4 EPGs into BFNP EOIs.

1 7/10/92 ALL Incorporate Writer's Guide discrepancies, typos, and plant nomenclature discrepancies.

2 11/13/92 ALL Revised notes concerning loss of all AC power and App R breaker position.

3 4/21/93 ALL Converted from WordPerfect 5.1 to Pagemaker 4.0 to better support desktop publishing capabilities.

References to Control Room Labels corrected.

Added use of the Electric Driven Fire Pumps to the procedure.

Changed the procedure to provide instruction for control room operations and added an attachment for valve locations if manual operation is required during loss of power conditions.

Changed procedure methodology to have System I as preferred and System II to be used if required.

Provided control panel information regarding location of operations.

4 12/28/93 3 Corrected location information associated with RSW tank isolation valves.

1,2 Added steps to ensure RHR HTX outlet valves are closed and RHR pumps shutdown to prevent diversion of flow.

5 11/1/94 2,3 Corrected typos, Corrected Attachment 1 to match plant valve labeling and locations.

6 10/26/00 All Converted to MS-Word.

2-EOI APPENDIX-7K Rev. 6 Page I of 3 i ~ALTERNATE RPV INJECTION SYSTEM LINEUP FIRE SYSTEM LOCATION: Unit 2 Control Room ATTACHMENTS: 1. Valve Locations and Positions NOTE: With AC power NOT available, valve manipulations are manual and performed locally.

1. IF ...... ALL AC Power is NOT available, THEN .... .REFER TO Attachment 1 and DISPATCH personnel to manually operate the listed valves while performing the following steps.

CAUTION Automatic initiation of fire system will divert water from the RPV during performance of this procedure.

2. NOTIFY Unit 1 Operator to perform the following:
a. VERIFY at least one electric or the diesel driven fire pump running (Unit 1, Panel 9-20).
b. IF ...... The diesel fire pump is running, THEN .... DISPATCH personnel to diesel fire pump as soon as possible to check proper operation.
c. VERIFY CLOSED the following valves (Unit 1, Panel 9-20):

"* 0-FCV-25-32, RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION VALVE

"* 0-FCV-25-70, RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION VALVE.

d. OPEN l-FCV-23-57, STANDBY COOLANT VALVE FROM RHRSW (Unit 1, Panel 9-3).
3. VERIFY RHR pumps 2A and 2C shut down (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).

2-EOI APPENDIX-7K Rev. 6 Paqe 2 of 3

4. OPEN 2-FCV-74-100, RHR SYS I U-i DISCH XTIE, (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).
5. VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-23-52, RHR HX 2D RHRSW OUTLET VLV (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).
6. VERIFY OPEN the following valves (Unit 2, Panel 9-3):

"* 2-FCV-74-52, RHR SYS I LPCI OUTBD INJECT VALVE

"* 2-FCV-74-53, RHR SYS I LPCI INBD INJECT VALVE.

7. IF ...... Additional injection flow is required, THEN .... INJECT using RHR System II as follows:
a. VERIFY RHR pumps 2B and 2D shut down (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).
b. OPEN 2-FCV-23-57, STANDBY COOLANT VLV FROM RHRSW, (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).

NOTE: Breaker compartment for 2-FCV-74-101, RHR SYS II U-3 DISCH XTIE, is maintained in the OPEN position as an Appendix R requirement.

c. DISPATCH personnel to CLOSE 480V ACB to 2-FCV-74-101, RHR SYS II U-3 DISCH XTIE (480V RMOV Board 3B Compartment 19E).
d. OPEN 2-FCV-74-101, RHR SYS II U-3 DISCH XTIE (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).
e. VERIFY CLOSED 2-FCV-23-46, RHR HX 2B RHRSW OUTLET VLV (Unit 2, Panel 9-3).
f. VERIFY OPEN the following valves (Unit 2, Panel 9-3):

"* 2-FCV-74-67, RHR SYS II LPCI INBD INJECT VALVE

"* 2-FCV-74-66, RHR SYS II LPCI OUTBD INJECT VALVE.

END OF TEXT

2-EOI APPENDIX-7K Rev. 6 Page 3 of 3 ATTACHMENT 1 VALVE LOCATIONS AND POSITIONS NOTE: The valves listed below are operated ONLY when directed by the Unit Operator.

VALVE POSITION LOCATION 0-FCV-025-0032, Unit 1 RB NW, el 639 ft, RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION CLOSED SLC area, west wall by gland VALVE seal water tank 0-FCV-025-0070, Unit 1 RB NW, el 639 ft, RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION CLOSED SLC area, west wall by gland VALVE seal water tank SYSTEM I I-FCV-023-0057, Unit 1 RB SE, el 565 ft, STANDBY COOLANT VLV OPEN overhead above equipment air lock 2-FCV-074-0100, Unit 2 RB SW, el 565 ft, RHR HTX A-C DISCH XTIE OPEN overhead at west wall above (TO U-i) VLV door to Unit 1 elevator/stairs 2-FCV-023-0052, Unit 2 RB SE, el 565 ft, RHR HEAT EXCHANGER D SW CLOSED by SE stairwell OUTLET VALVE 2-FCV-074-0053, Unit 2 RB, el 580 ft, RHR SYSTEM I INBD OPEN above drywell personnel access INJECTION VLV 2-FCV-074-0052, Unit 2 RB, el 580 ft, RHR SYSTEM I OUTBD OPEN above drywell personnel access INJECTION VLV.

SYSTEM II 2-FCV-074-0101, Unit 2 RB SE, el 565 ft, RHR HTX B-D DISCH XTIE OPEN overhead on platform (TO U-3) VLV 2-FCV-023-0057, Unit 2 RB SE, el 565 ft, STANDBY COOLANT VALVE OPEN overhead on platform 2-FCV-023-0046, Unit 2 RB SE, el 565 ft, RHR HEAT EXCHANGER B SW CLOSED by SE stairwell OUTLET VALVE 2-FCV-074-0067, Unit 2 RB, el 580 ft, RHR SYSTEM II INBD OPEN above drywell personnel access INJECTION VLV 2-FCV-074-0066, Unit 2 RB, el 580 ft, RRHR SYSTEM II OUTBD OPEN above drywell personnel access INJECTION VLV LAST PAGE

JPM NUMBER: NRC -2 TITLE: Fill and Vent the Stator Cooling System KA 245000 K6.05 (2.9/2.9)

OPERATOR:

RO SRO DATE:

JPM NUMBER: NRC 2 K/A NUMBER: KA 245000 K6.05 K/A RATING: RO 2.9 SRO: 2.9 TASK STANDARD: SUCCESSFULLY FILL AND VENT THE STATOR COOLING SYSTEM LOCATION OF PERFORMANCE: SIMULATOR PLANT X CONTROL ROOM REFERENCES/PROCEDURES NEEDED: 2-OI-35A, REV 26 VALIDATION TIME: CONTROL ROOM:- LOCAL: 30 MAX. TIME ALLOWED:_ (Completed for Time Critical JPMs only)

PERFORMANCE TIME: CONTROL ROOM LOCAL COMMENTS:

Additional comment sheets attached? YES- NO RESULTS: SATISFACTORY UNSATISFACTORY EXAMINER: DATE:

INITIAL CONDITIONS: You are an Operator. The stator cooling water system is shutdown, the system has been partially drained and you have been tasked with filling and venting the system.

The following conditions exist at the beginning of this task:

Recovery from Refueling Outage is m progress.

Stator Cooling Water Pumps are locked out.

Nothing is tagged on the system.

Appropriate tools and hoses are available at the job site.

INITIATING CUES: Fill and vent the stator cooling water system on Unit 2 and call the control room when the task is complete.

CAUTION: This JPM will be conducted in the plant, PLANT EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE OPERATED, all actions will be simulated. Caution must be exercised when near plant equipment, do not do anything that would jeopardize your personal safety or plant operation.

Performance Step : N Critical X Critical- Not 8.1.1 REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.0.

Standard:

VERIFIED all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.0.

3.1 Generator stator inlet water conductivity should be maintained less than 0.5 m siemen.

3.2 The stator coolant pumps trp if a generator differential current condition is detected.

3.3 Operation of only one stator cooling pump is required to provide normal system flow. The standby pump will automatically start on low system discharge pressure.

3.4 A main turbine trip will occur after 70 seconds if 2 out of 3 signals are received from either of the following conditions:

Generator stator current greater than 7726 ampsad stator inlet cooling water flow less 542 gpm.

Stator cooling water temperature greater than 8 10 C.

If the above trips are inoperable, the turbine should be removed from service within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />.

3.5 The following pressure differential limits are placed on the filters and deionizer in the stator cooling system:

3.5.1 Stator Water Deionizer- 15 psid.

3.5.2 Stator Filter- 8 psid.

3.5.3 Rectifier Filter- 8 psid.

3.6 Filter cartridges should be replaced at the first scheduled shutdown after the pressure drop across the filter has risen to 8 psid or after 18 to 20 months of service.

3.7 If conductivity of the statorcooling water cannot be maintained below 0.5 m siemen, the deionizer resin bed should be replaced.

3.8 The generator should not be operated above its "No Liquid Flow Capability" (7726 amps stator current at 75 psig ft pressure) when any part of the Stator Cooling System is subjected to freezing ambient conditions.

3.9 If adjustments are to be made to the Stator Cooling System while the generator is in operation, the generator load shouldnot be above the "No Liquid Flow Capability" (7726 amps stator current at 75 psig H2 pressure).

3.10 On a loss of stator cooling flow, the turbine shall be manually tripped within the following time limits:

3.10.1 Three minutes with conductivity greater than 0.5 m siemens prior to the loss of stator cooling water flow.

3.10.2 Forty minutes with conductivity less than 0.5 m siemens prior to the loss of stator cooling water flow.

NOTE:

Without flow, conductivity readings are inaccurate and should be disregarded.

3.11 Normal cooling water flow to rectifiers is 30 gpm at 45°C (1 13'F) inlet temperature: rectifier high temperature alarm occurs at 93.3 0 C (2000 F).

3.12 Main generator rating is 1,280,000 kVA at 0.93PF; 75 psig ft pressure. With one stator cooler out of service, maximum main generator rating is 896,000 kVA at 0.93FF: 75 psig t2 pressure.

3.13 If rectifier cooling water flow is lost, 4964 amps of field current can be carried for 5 minutes, followed by a reduction to 2482 amps at 77°F ambient, or 122°F ambient continuous.

3.16 [PER/C] Frequent attention to the stator cooling surge tank level should be exercised during maintenance, filling, and venting. [SQ941193PER]

SAT UNSAT N/A___

COMMENTS:

Performance Step: 2 Critical_ Not CriticalX 8.1.2 ROUTE outlet of DEMIN WATER MAKEUP DRAIN valve, 2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62) to floor drain.

Standard Simulate routing outlet to floor drain SAT UNSAT N/A_

COMMENTS:

Performance Step: 3 Critical X Not Critical 8.1.3 OPEN DEMIN WATER MAKEUP DRAIN valve, 2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62).

Standard Simulate opening 2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62)

SAT - UNSAT - N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step : 4 Critical X Not Critical 8.1.4 OPEN STATOR COOLING DEMIN WTR SPLY valve, 2-SHI-1595 Standard Simulate opening 2-SHV-2-1595 SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: 5 Critical X Not Critical 8.1.5 OPEN the DEMIN WATER MAKEUP valve, 2-SHV-035-0839(X61).

Standard Simulate opening 2-SHV-035-0839 SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: 6 Critical_ Not CriticalX 8.1.6 AFTER a 2-minute flush CLOSE the following valves:

8.1.6.1 DEMIN WATER MAKEUP, 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-61).

8.1.6.2 DEMIN WATER MAKEUP DRAIN, 2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62).

Standard:

Simulate closing 2-SH-V-035-0839(Y-61) and2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62) after 2 minute flush.

SAT - UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step : 7 Critical-- Not Critical X 8.1.7 CLOSE the DEIONIZER INLET valve, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-I 9).

Standard Simulate closing 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19)

SAT UNSAT N/A-COMMENTS:

Performance Step : 8 Critical X Not Critical-8.1.8 OPEN the DEMIN WATER MAKEUP valve, 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-61).

Standard Simulate opening 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-61)

SAT-_ UNSAT N/A-COMMENTS

Performance Step: 9 Critical X Not Critical__

8.1.9 THROTTLE OPEN the MAKEUP WATER FILTER OULET valve, 2-CKV-035-085 l(Y-2 I) until deionizer flow is -55%, as indicated on 2FI-035-0079.

Standard Adjust throttle valve to get -55 % indicated flow on FI 35-79 SAT - UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: 10 Critical- Not Critical 8.1.10 WHEN Stator Cooling Wate Storage Tank Level is at the top of the sightglass, THEN CLOSE DEMIN WATER MAKEUP valve, 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-6 1).

Standard Close valve (Y-61) when the sightglass is full SAT UNSAT - N/A_

COMMENTS:

Performance Ste : I1I Critical Not Critical X 8.1.11 CLOSE MAKEUP WATER FILTER OUTLET, 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21)

Standard Simulate closing 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21 )

SAT - UNSAT N/A-COMMENTS:

Performance Ste : 12 Critical Not Critical X 8.1.12 CLOSE STATOR COOLIMh DEMIN WTR SPLY valve, 2-SH-1V2-1595 Standard Simulate closing 2-SHV-2-1595 SAT UNSAT N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step: 13 Critical X Not Critical 8.1.13 LOOSEN the following vent plugs, one at a time, and WHEN wateis seen flowing through/around the plug threads, THEN RETIGHTEN the vent plug:

Cooler A Vent Plug Cooler B Vent Plug Deionizer Vent Plug Secondary Filter Vent Plug Primary Filter Vent Plug

Standard Loosen plugs individually, verify water flowing from them, then retighten.

SAT - UNSAT_ N/A COMMENTS:

Performance Step : Critical X Not Critical_

8.1.14 THROTTLE OPEN DEIONIZER INLET, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19) to maintain -55% flow as indicated on 2-FI-035-0079.

Standard Adjust flow to reach - 55%

SAT - UNSAT- N/A-COMMENTS:

TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY BROWNS FERRY NUCLEAR PLANT OPERATING INSTRUCTION 2-OI-35A STATOR COOLING SYSTEM REVISION 28 PREPARED BY: REGGIE KEMP PHONE: 2431 RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION: OPERATIONS APPROVED BY:. PHILLIP CHADWELL DATE: 05/17/2001 EFFECTIVE DATE: 05/17/2001 LEVEL OF USE: INFORMATION USE - SECTIONS 6.1 AND 6.3 REFERENCE USE - REMAINDER OF INSTRUCTION QUALITY-RELATED

REVISION LOG Procedure Number: 2-OI-35A Revision Number: 28 Pages Affected: 7,10,11,12,16,17,21, Att 4 page 2 Description of Change: IC-032 DCNs 50579A, PIC 50820A Changed the operating parameters for stator cooling flow and pressure..

THIS REVISION MAKES A CHANGE TO SYSTEM STATUS Att 4 page 2, Changed tag legend for 2-PI-035-0052

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 1.0 PURPOSE ..................... 2

2.0 REFERENCES

................... .. . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.0 PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS .................................... 4 4.0 PRESTARTUP/STANDBY READINESS ................................... 6 5.0 STARTUP ..................... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.0 SYSTEM OPERATIONS .............................................. 10 6.1 Daily System Checks . .... ............ . ................ 10 6.2 System Checks ....... ..................... ....... ..... 10 6.3 Pump Alternating .... .................................................... 12 7.0 SHUTDOWN .................... 13 8.0 INFREQUENT OPERATIONS .......................................... 14 8.1 Fill and Vent of Stator Cooling System ...... 14 8.2 Adding Water to Stator Cooling Water Storage Tank ..... 15 8.3 Isolating One Stator Cooler While Maintaining Generator Operation ................................... 16 8.4 Return of Isolated Stator Cooler to Operation ......... 21 8.5 Draining water from Stator Cooling Water Storage tank 25 8.6 Isolating Stator Cooling Demineralizer ............... 26 ATTACHMENTS Attachment 1 Stator Cooling System Valve Lineup Checklist Unit 2 Attachment 2 Stator Cooling System Panel Lineup Checklist Unit 2 Attachment 3 Stator Cooling System Electrical Lineup Checklist Unit 2 Attachment 4 Stator Cooling System Instrument Inspection Checklist Unit 2 Page 1 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 1.0 PURPOSE This operating instruction provides Precautions and Limitations, Prestartup/Standby Readiness Requirements and procedural steps for operation of the Stator Cooling System.

2.0 REFERENCES

2.1 Plant Instructions 2-GOI-100-1A, Unit Startup from Cold Shutdown to Power Operation and Return to Full Power from Power Reductions.

0-OI-2C, Demineralized Water System.

2-01-24, Raw Cooling Water System.

0-01-32, Control Air System.

0-OI-57B, 480V/240V AC Electrical System.

0-OI-57C, 208V/120V AC Electrical System.

0-OI-57D, DC Electrical System.

SSP-12.6, Verification Program.

2.2 Plant Drawings 45N606-1 & 2, Wiring Diagrams Stator Cooling Water System Schematic Diagram.

2-45N2605, Wiring Diagrams Stator Cooling Water System Connection Diagram.

2-45E2646-2, Wiring Diagrams Unit Control Boards Panel 9-8.

2-45E2658-2, Wiring.Diagrams Unit Control Boards Panel 9-47.

2-45E747-1,2, Wiring Diagrams 480V Unit Board 2A(2B) Single Line.

2-47E610-35-1, Mechanical Control Diagram Generator Cooling Systems.

2-47E610-43-2, Mechanical Control Diagram Sampling and Water Quality Sys.

2-47E844-1, Flow Diagram Raw Cooling Water.

Page 2 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 2.3 Vendor Manuals Stator Winding Cooling Water System, 234R277 Sheet 1.

GEK-5584, Vol. II, Steam Turbine-Generator Instruction, Generator Section. General Electric Co., Contract No. GE-75789. Generator Section Tab 17-24 and Stator Cooling System Tab 30-33 (BFN-CVM-0787).

2.4 Other References GE TIL 1098-3, Inspection of Generators with Water Cooled Stator Windings.

GE TIL 1098-3R2, Inspection of Generators with Water Cooled Stator Windings.

SQ941193PER REV 0, Clogged Stator Cooling Water Filter.

SEOPR 96-0-024-004, RCW Header Discharge Pressure.

SEOPR 96-0-024-006, Generator Stator Cooling Water Heat Exchangers.

NEDC-32751P, Power Uprate Safety Analysis for the Browns Ferry Nuclear Plant (RIMS R08-980316-888)

TVA-BFN-TS-384, Technical Specification(TS) Change TS-384 - Request For License Amendment For Power Uprate Operation (RIMS R08-980316-888)

GE-NE-BI3-01866-39, Summary of System Evaluations and Proposed Changes to Design Criteria Documents (RIMS W79-980827-003)

Page 3 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 3.0 PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS 3.1 Generator stator inlet water conductivity should be maintained less than 0.5 p siemen.

3.2 The stator coolant pumps trip if a generator differential current condition is detected.

3.3 Operation of only one stator cooling pump is required to provide normal system flow. The standby pump will automatically start on low system discharge pressure.

3.4 A main turbine trip will occur after 60 seconds if 2 out of 3 signals are received from either of the following conditions:

  • Generator stator current greater than 7726 amps and stator inlet cooling water flow less 468 gpm.

If the above trips are inoperable, the turbine should be removed from service within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />.

3.5 The following pressure differential limits are placed on the filters and deionizer in the stator cooling system:

Stator Water Deionizer - 15 psid, Stator Filter - 8 psid.

Rectifier Filter - 8 psid.

3.6 Filter cartridges should be replaced at the first scheduled shutdown after the pressure drop across the filter has risen to 8 psid or after 18 to 20 months of service.

3.7 If conductivity of the stator cooling water cannot be maintained below 0.5 p siemen, the deionizer resin bed should be replaced.

3.8 The generator should not be operated above its "No Liquid Flow Capability" (7726 amps stator current at 75 psig H2 pressure) when any part of the Stator Cooling System is subjected to freezing ambient conditions.

3.9 If adjustments are to be made to the Stator Cooling System while the generator is in operation, the generator load should not be above the "No Liquid Flow Capability" (7726 amps stator current at 75 psig H2 pressure).

3.10 On a loss of stator cooling flow, the turbine shall be manually tripped within the following time limits (Without flow, conductivity readings are inaccurate and should be disregarded).

3.10.1 2.5 minutes with conductivity greater than 0.5 ý.

siemens prior to the loss of stator cooling water flow.

3.10.2 60 minutes with conductivity less than 0.5 ý.

siemens prior to the loss of stator cooling water flow.

Page 4 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-0I-35A 3.0 PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (Continued) 3.11 Normal cooling water flow to rectifiers is 30 gpm at 450 C (113 0 F) inlet temperature; rectifier high temperature alarm occurs at 93.3 0 C (200 0 F).

3.12 Main generator rating is 1,280,000 kVA at 0.93 PF; 75 psig H2 pressure.

With one stator cooler out of service, maximum main generator rating is 896,000 kVA at 0.93 PF; 75 psig H 2 pressure.

3.13 If rectifier cooling water flow is lost, 4964 amps of field current can be carried for 5 minutes, followed by a reduction to 2482 amps at 77 0 F ambient, or 122 0 F ambient continuous.

3.14 [NER/C] To preclude potential insulation damage, the stator cooling system should not be operated without gas pressure except when absolutely necessary. Exceptions include stator cooling water flow testing and winding electrical tests that require water flow in the winding. [GE TIL 1098-3]

3.15 [NER/C] Optimum resin performance and reduction of clip to strand braze joint leaks can be facilitated by placing the stator cooling system in one of the following alignments during outages with a duration of two or more days.

"* Maintain stator cooling water flow with main generator hydrogen gas pressure higher than stator water pressure.

"* Short-cycle stator cooling inlet and outlet for main generator stator with temporary pipe to remove stator winding from system. Stator cooling water system flow may now be maintained with hydrogen gas pressure at 0 psig. Notify Tech Support and mechanical maintenance to write a WR to support this evolution. REFER TO TI-273.

"* Shut down stator cooling water system and replace the resin bed at the end of the outage. (GE TIL 1098-3R2]

3.16 (PER/C] Frequent attention to the stator cooling surge tank level should be exercised during maintenance, filling, and venting. [SQ941193PER]

3.17 If stator cooling is operated with the demineralizer isolated conductivity readings are inaccurate and should be disregarded.

3.18 The time stator cooling is operated with the demineralizer isolated should be minimized.

3.19 Anytime machine gas pressure is raised above 50 psig the stator cooling pressure control 2-PCV-035-0055 should be verified at its high limit stop.

Page 5 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 4.0 PRESTARTUP/STANDBY READINESS REQUIREMENTS 4.1 VERIFY the following related system requirements are satisfied:

4.1.1 The following panels are energized. REFER to 0-OI-57B,C,D:

4.1.1.1 480V Unit Board 2A 4.1.1.2 480V Unit Board 2B 4.1.1.3 Panel 2-9-9, Unit Preferred 120V Distribution Cabinet 6 4.1.1.4 Panel 2-9-9, Plant Preferred 120V Distribution Cabinet 4 4.1.1.5 Panel 2-9-9, 250V and 48V DC Distribution Cabinet 1 4.1.1.6 250V DC Turbine Building Distribution Board 2 4.1.2 The following system lineup checklists are current:

4.1.2.1 Attachment 1, Stator Cooling System Valve Lineup Checklist, Unit 2 4.1.2.2 Attachment 2, Stator Cooling System Panel Lineup Checklist, Unit 2 4.1.2.3 Attachment 3, Stator Cooling System Electrical Lineup Checklist, Unit 2 4.1.2.4 Attachment 4, Stator Cooling System Instrument Inspection Checklist, Unit 2 4.1.3 The Stator Cooling Water System has been filled and vented.

REFER TO Section 8.1.

4.2 VERIFY the following support system requirements are satisfied:

4.2.1 The Raw Cooling Water System is in operation to provide cooling water to the stator cooling heat exchangers. REFER TO 2-01-24.

4.2.2 The Control Air System is available to provide control air to controllers and air operated valves in the Stator Cooling System. REFER TO 0-01-32.

4.2.3 Generator Machine Gas pressure is Ž 42 psig.

Page 6 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 5.0 STARTUP 5.1 VERIFY the Stator Cooling System is in Prestartup/Standby Readiness Alignment. REFER TO Section 4.0.

5.2 REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.0.

NOTE:

Normal stator cooling water storage tank level is at the center of the tank sightglass but for system startup, level should be raised to the top of the sightglass to allow for system fill.

5.3 CHECK the stator cooling water storage tank level is at the top of the sightglass.

5.4 CHECK stator coolant pump A and B oilers greater than one-half full.

NOTE:

When the pumps are started, the system will vent to the storage tank. During this time, it may be necessary to add makeup water to the storage tank to maintain level.

5.5 START the preferred Stator Cooling Pump A(B) by placing GEN STATOR CLG WATER PUMP 2A(B), 2-HS-35-35A(36A) from Control Room Panel 2-9-8, to START.

5.6 Locally MONITOR storage tank level and PERFORM Section 8.2 if makeup water is to be added to the storage tank to maintain normal level.

5.7 PLACE the STATOR COOLING WATER PUMPS SEL, 2-HS-35-40, on Panel 25-114, in B(A) - RES.

5.8 IF previously locked out, THEN PLACE GEN STATOR CLG WATER PUMP 2B(A), 2-HS-35-36A(35A) in Control Room Panel 2-9-8, to AUTO.

5.9 THROTTLE the DEIONIZER INLET, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19), to establish on STATOR COOLING WATER DEIONIZER FLOW, 2-FI-035-0079.

5.10 CHECK the following conditions:

NOTE:

If conductivity is greater than or equal to 0.5

  • siemens, then Step 5.11 can be performed to aid in lowering conductivity.

5.10.1 Generator stator inlet and outlet conductivity less than 0.5 siemen.

5.10.2 STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET FLOW, 2-FIS-035-0065, on Panel 25-114 is between 552 and 620 gpm (normally 590-620 gpm at rated load).

5.10.3 STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET TEMP, 2-TI-035-0063, on Panel 25-114 indicates less than 45*C (Min. 40 C - Max. 45 C).

5.10.4 STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET PRESS, 2-PI-035-0090, on Panel 25-114 indicates between 36 and 46 psig.

Page 7 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 5.0 STARTUP (Continued) 5.11 To aid in quickly reducing stator cooling water conductivity to within limits, the following may be performed:

5.11.1 CHECK CLOSED the MAKEUP WATER FILTER OUTLET, 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21).

5.11.2 OPEN the DEMIN WATER MAKEUP DRAIN, 2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62).

5.11.3 FLUSH makeup water line for two minutes by throttling open DEMIN WATER MAKEUP, 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-61).

5.11.4 After a two-minute flush, CLOSE DEMIN WATER MAKEUP DRAIN, 2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62).

5.11.5 CLOSE the DEIONIZER INLET, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19).

5.11.6 ESTABLISH system feed and bleed using STATOR WATER TANK DRAIN, 2-DRV-035-0892(Y-44), and MAKEUP WATER FILTER OUTLET, 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21), as follows:

5.11.6.1 NOTIFY Chem Lab to DISCONNECT the 02 injection line from the Stator Water Tank Drain, Y-44 (2-DRV-035-0892) REFER TO CI-410.

5.11.6.2 THROTTLE OPEN the MAKEUP WATER FILTER OUTLET, 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21).

5.11.6.3 THROTTLE OPEN the STATOR WATER TANK DRAIN, 2-DRV-035-0892(Y-44).

5.11.6.4 THROTTLE 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21) and 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19) until STATOR COOLING WATER DEIONIZER FLOW, 2-FI-35-79, indicates between 75 and 100 gpm and storage tank level is maintained in the normal range.

5.11.7 WHEN stator cooling water conductivity is less than 0.5 a siemen, THEN PERFORM the following:

NOTE: Simultaneous closure of MAKEUP WATER FILTER OUTLET, 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21), and STATOR WATER TANK DRAIN, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19), will ensure normal level is maintained in the storage tank.

5.11.7.1 Simultaneously CLOSE the STATOR WATER TANK DRAIN, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19) and MAKEUP WATER FILTER OUTLET, 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21).

5.11.7.2 THROTTLE OPEN the DEIONIZER INLET, 2-CKV-035-0352(Y-19),

to establish STATOR COOLING WATER DEIONIZER FLOW, 2-FI-035-0079.

5.11.7.3 CLOSE the DEMIN WATER MAKEUP, 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-61).

Page 8 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 5.0 STARTUP (Continued) 5.11.7.4 NOTIFY Chem Lab to CONNECT the injection equipment to the Stator Water Tank Drain, Y-44 (2-DRV-035-0892) REFER TO CI-410.

5.12 IF it is desired to begin 02 injection, THEN NOTIFY Chem Lab that the Stator Cooling System is in service and ready for 02 injection.

REFER TO CI-410.

5.13 OPERATE Stator Cooling System. REFER to Section 6.0.

Page 9 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 6.0 SYSTEM OPERATION 6.1 Daily System Checks NOTE:

This section should be performed daily when the Stator Cooling System is in operation and after placing the system in service.

6.1.1 REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.0.

6.1.2 VERIFY stator coolant pumps A and B oilers greater than one-half full.

6.1.3 VERIFY stator coolant storage tank level is at the center of the tank sightglass.

6.1.4 VERIFY the temperatures indicate as follows on Panel 25-114:

6.1.4.1 STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET TEMP, 2-TI-035-0063, or Computer Point D071 reads 40 0 C (104°F) to 45°C (113 0 F).

6.1.4.2 STATOR COOLING WATER GEN OUTLET TEMP, 2-TIS-035-0072, or Computer Point D072 reads 55 0 C (131 0 F) to 68°C (154°F).

6.1.5 VERIFY the STATOR COOLING WATER DEIONIZER FLOW, 2-FI-035-0079, is -55%

6.1.6 VERIFY the STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET FLOW, 2-FIS-035-0065, indicates 552 to 620 gpm(normally 590-620 gpm at rated load) on Panel 25-114.

6.1.7 OPEN the STATOR WATER TANK VENT LINE DRAIN, 2-DRV-035-0885(Y-80),

until all condensate is drained, then CLOSE 2-DRV-035-0885(Y-80) 6.2 System Checks NOTE:

This section should be performed Weekly when the Stator Cooling System is in operation and after placing the system in service.

6.2.1 VERIFY stator filter differential pressure is less than 8 psid (2-PI-035-0056 minus 2-PI-035-0057).

6.2.2 VERIFY rectifier filter differential pressure is less than 8 psid (2-PI-035-0068 minus 2-PI-035-0069).

Page 10 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 6.2 System Checks (Continued)

NOTE: The stator cooling water pumps should be alternated monthly during system operation.

6.2.3 VERIFY deionizer differential pressure is less than 15 psid (2-PI-035-0077 minus 2-PI-035-0078).

6.2.4 VERIFY the following initial conditions are present prior to attempting a stator cooling water pump automatic start test.

6.2.4.1 EITHER stator cooling water pump A or B is operating.

6.2.4.2 GEN STATOR CLG WATER PUMP 2A(B) handswitch, 2-HS-35-35A(36A), in the AUTO position on Panel 2-9-8 for the operating pump.

6.2.4.3 GEN STATOR COOLING WATER PUMP A(B) handswitch, 2-HS-035-0035B(0036B), in the NOR position on Panel 25-114 for the operating pump.

6.2.4.4 STATOR COOLING WATER PUMPS SEL, 2-HS-035-0040, on Panel 25-114 A-RES - CO - B-RES) is selected to the Non-Operating Pump.

6.2.4.5 The standby stator cooling water pump is available for service.

NOTE: Once each month of operation, pressure switches 2-PS-035-0052A and 2-PS-035-0052B, operation should be verified by cycling the STATOR COOLING WATER RESERVE PUMP TEST SV, 2-PSV-035-0053, which automatically starts the reserve pump on low header pressure.

6.2.5 To start the reserve stator cooling pump, operate solenoid valve 2-PSV-035-0053, by momentarily DEPRESSING the STATOR COOLING WATER RESERVE PUMP TEST pushbutton, 2-HS-035-0053, (located on side of junction box on Stator Coolant Skid).

6.2.6 VERIFY both stator cooling water pumps A and B operating (reserve pump started).

6.2.7 For the stator cooling water pump A(B) that has operated for one month, on Panel 2-9-8, PLACE the GEN STATOR CLG WATER PUMP 2A(B), 2-HS-35-35A(36A) to STOP.

6.2.8 SELECT STATOR COOLING WATER PUMPS SEL, 2-HS-035-0040 (A-RES-CO-B-RES) on Panel 25-114 to the non-operating pump.

6.2.9 VERIFY the pump control switch for the stator cooling water pump stopped in Step 6.2.7 is returned to AUTO on Panel 2-9-8.

6.2.10 VERIFY the STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET FLOW, 2-FIS-035-0065, indicates 552 to 620 gpm(normally 590-620 gpm at rated load) on Panel 25-114.

6.2.11 VERIFY the STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET PRESS, 2-PI-035-0090, indicates 36 to 46 psig on Panel 25-114.

Page 11 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 6.3 Pump Alternating NOTE:

This section need only be performed when pump is being alternated other than during Section 6.2.

6.3.1 START the Standby Stator Cooling Water Pump A(B) by placing GEN STATOR CLG WATER PUMP 2A(B), 2-HS-35-35A(36A) on Panel 2-9-8 to START.

6.3.2 STOP the Stator Cooling Water Pump B(A) by placing GEN STATOR CLG WATER PUMP 2B(A), 2-HS-35-36A(35A) on Panel 2-9-8 to STOP.

6.3.3 VERIFY the STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET FLOW, 2-FIS-035-0065, indicates 552 to 620 gpm(normally 590-620 gpm at rated load) on Panel 25-114.

6.3.4 VERIFY the STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET PRESS, 2-PI-035-0090, indicates 36 to 46 psig on Panel 25-114.

6.3.5 VERIFY the pump control switch for the stator cooling water pump stopped in Step 6.3.2 is returned to AUTO on Panel 2-9-8.

6.3.6 SELECT STATOR COOLING WATER PUMPS SEL, 2 HS-035-0040 (A-RES-CO-B-RES) on Panel 25-114 to the non-operating pump.

Page 12 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 7.0 SHUTDOWN 7.1 REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.0.

7.2 NOTIFY Chem Lab to REMOVE 02 injection system from service.

REFER TO CI-410 7.3 CHECK the following initial conditions are satisfied:

7.3.1 Generator stator current is less than 7726 amps at 75 psig H2 pressure (maximum generator capability without stator cooling liquid flow).

7.3.2 The UNIT SUPERVISOR. has been informed that the Stator Cooling System is to be shut down.

7.4 PLACE STANDBY GEN STATOR CLG WATER PUMP switch, 2-HS-35-35A or 2-HS-35-36A, on Panel 2-9-8, in PULL TO LOCK.

7.5 PLACE RUNNING GEN STATOR CLG WATER PUMP switch, 2-HS-35-36A or 2-HS-35-35A, on Panel 2-9-8, in PULL TO LOCK.

Page 13 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.0 INFREQUENT OPERATIONS 8.1 Fill and Vent of Stator Cooling System 8.1.1 REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.0.

8.1.2 ROUTE outlet of DEMIN WATER MAKEUP DRAIN valve, 2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62) to floor drain.

8.1.3 OPEN DEMIN WATER MAKEUP DRAIN valve, 2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62).

8.1.4 OPEN STATOR COOLING DEMIN WTR SPLY valve, 2-SHV-2-1595 8.1.5 OPEN the DEMIN WATER MAKEUP valve, 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-61).

8.1.6 AFTER a 2-minute flush CLOSE the following valves:

8.1.6.1 DEMIN WATER MAKEUP, 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-61).

8.1.6.2 DEMIN WATER MAKEUP DRAIN, 2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62).

8.1.7 CLOSE the DEIONIZER INLET valve, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19).

8.1.8 OPEN the DEMIN WATER MAKEUP valve, 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-61).

8.1.9 THROTTLE OPEN the MAKEUP WATER FILTER OUTLET valve, 2-CKV 035-0851(Y-21) until deionizer flow is -55%, as indicated on 2-FI-035-0079.

8.1.10 WHEN Stator Cooling Water Storage Tank Level is at the top of the sightglass, THEN CLOSE DEMIN WATER MAKEUP valve, 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-61).

8.1.11 CLOSE MAKEUP WATER FILTER OUTLET, 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21) 8.1.12 CLOSE STATOR COOLING DEMIN WTR SPLY valve, 2-SHV-2-1595 8.1.13 LOOSEN the following vent plugs, one at a time, and WHEN water is seen flowing through/around the plug threads, THEN RETIGHTEN the vent plug:

Cooler A Vent Plug Cooler B Vent Plug Deionizer Vent Plug Secondary Filter Vent Plug Primary Filter Vent Plug 8.1.14 THROTTLE OPEN DEIONIZER INLET, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19) to maintain -55% flow as indicated on 2-FI-035-0079.

Page 14 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.2 Adding Water to Stator Cooling Water Storage Tank 8.2.1 REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.0.

8.2.2 CHECK CLOSED MAKEUP WATER FILTER OUTLET, 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21).

8.2.3 OPEN DEMIN WATER MAKEUP DRAIN, 2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62).

8.2.4 OPEN STATOR COOLING DEMIN WTR SPLY valve, 2-SHV-002-1595 8.2.5 FLUSH makeup water line for two minutes by throttling open DEMIN WATER MAKEUP, 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-61).

8.2.6 AFTER a two-minute flush, CLOSE DEMIN WATER MAKEUP DRAIN, 2-DRV-035-0840(Y-62).

8.2.7 CLOSE DEIONIZER INLET, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19).

8.2.8 To add makeup water to the storage tank, THROTTLE OPEN the MAKEUP WATER FILTER OUTLET, 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21) and MAINTAIN DEIONIZER FLOW, 2-FI-035-0079, less than -5%.

8.2.9 WHEN storage tank is at the desired level, THEN CLOSE MAKEUP WATER FILTER OUTLET, 2-CKV-035-0851(Y-21).

8.2.10 THROTTLE OPEN DEIONIZER INLET, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19), to maintain -55% flow as indicated on 2-FI-035-0079.

8.2.11 CLOSE DEMIN WATER MAKEUP, 2-SHV-035-0839(Y-61).

8.2.12 CLOSE STATOR COOLING DEMIN WTR SPLY valve, 2-SHV-002-1595.

Page 15 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.3 Isolating One Stator Cooler While Maintaining Generator Operation 8.3.1 REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.0.

8.3.2 CHECK the following initial conditions are satisfied:

8.3.2.1 Generator load is less than 70% of rated load, or 21 kilo amperes, as indicated on GEN PHASE A (B or C),

EI-057-0047 (0048 or 0049) (896,000 kVA at 0.93 PF; 75 psig H2 pressure).

8.3.2.2 With generator voltage normal, reactive load (MVARs) has been reduced to the minimum achievable (zero MVARs are desirable).

8.3.2.3 Both stator coolers are in service.

NOTE:

If stator inlet temperature exceeds 50 0 C (122 0 F), deionizer resin damage can occur resulting in dramatic rise in stator coolant conductivity.

8.3.3 MONITOR the following parameters before, during and after the isolation of the stator cooler.

8.3.3.1 GEN STATOR COOLANT CONDUCTIVITY, 2-CI-43-16A, on Panel 2-9-8 indicates less than 0.3 i siemen.

8.3.3.2 CHECK the following temperatures on Panel 25-114:

8.3.3.2.1 STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET TEMP, 2-TIS-035-0063, 400 to 45 0 C.

8.3.3.2.2 STATOR COOLING WATER GEN OUTLET TEMP, 2-TIS-035-0072, 550 to 68'C.

8.3.3.3 STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET PRESS, 2-PI-035-0090, on Panel 25-114 indicates 36 to 46 psig.

8.3.3.4 STATOR COOLING WATER HEADER PRESS, 2-PI-035-0052, on Panel 25-114 indicates 132 to 143 psig.

Page 16 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.3 Isolating One Stator Cooler While Maintaining Generator Operation (Continued) 8.3.3.5 STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET FLOW, 2-FIS-035-0065, on Panel 25-114 indicates 552 to 620 gpm(normally 590 620 gpm at rated load).

8.3.3.6 The following stator cooling winding temperatures are between Min. 55 0 C (1310F) and Max. 68 0 C (154*F):

Computer Point D065 GEN STAT WIND 1.

Computer Point D066 GEN STAT WIND 2.

Computer Point D067 GEN STAT WIND 3.

Computer Point D068 GEN STAT WIND 4.

Computer Point D069 GEN STAT WIND 5.

Computer Point D070 GEN STAT WIND 6.

8.3.3.7 The following hydrogen cooling temperatures are less than 450C (1130F) at 75 psig H2 pressure:

Computer Point D074 GEN H2 FROM CLR 1.

Computer Point D076 GEN H2 FROM CLR 2.

Computer Point D078 GEN H2 FROM CLR 3.

Computer Point D080 GEN H2 FROM CLR 4.

Page 17 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.3 Isolating One Stator Cooler While Maintaining Generator Operation (Continued)

CAUTION To prevent a loss of stator cooling water, the stator water valves should be operated in the order indicated in Steps 8.3.4.1 or 8.3.4.2.

NOTE:

For isolation of Stator Cooler A, Step 8.3.4.1 shall be performed. For isolation of Stator Cooler B, Step 8.3.4.2 shall be performed.

8.3.4 For the stator cooler to be isolated, PLACE the following stator cooling water valves to the positions indicated:

8.3.4.1 Stator Cooler A stator water isolation:

8.3.4.1.1 CHECK CLOSED the COOLER B BYPASS, 2-BYV-035-0835(Y-II).

8.3.4. 1.2 SLOWLY OPEN the COOLER A BYPASS, 2-BYV-035-0900(Y-09).

8. 3. 4. 1. 3 CLOSE the COOLER A INLET, 2-SHV-035-0865(Y-08).

8.3.4.1.4 CLOSE the COOLER A OUTLET, 2-SHV-035-0864(Y-12).

8.3.4.2 Stator cooler B stator water isolation:

8.3.4.2.1 CHECK CLOSED the COOLER A BYPASS, 2-DRV-035-0900(Y-09).

8.3.4.2.2 SLOWLY OPEN the COOLER B BYPASS, 2-BYV-035-0835(Y-II).

8.3.4.2.3 CLOSE the COOLER A OUTLET, 2-SHV-035-0864(Y-12).

8.3.4.2.4 CLOSE the COOLER B OUTLET, 2-SHV-035-0834(Y-10).

Page 18 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.3 Isolating One Stator Cooler While Maintaining Generator Operation (Continued)

NOTE: RCW pumps should be started as required to maintain RCW header pressure

>48 psig.

[SEOPR] RCW pumps should be secured when the following conditions are reached to prevent RCW pump degradation due to impeller wear:

"* RCW header pressure >61 psig with only 3 pumps operating in parallel.

"* RCW header pressure >59 psig with only 4 pumps operating in parallel.

"* RCW header pressure >58 psig with only 5 pumps operating in parallel.

"* RCW header pressure >57 psig with 6 or more pumps operating in parallel.

Securing RCW pumps as directed above should ensure adequate supply header pressure remains to prevent auto start of standby pump when normally securing RCW pumps. [SEOPR 95-024-004) 8.3.5 ISOLATE the desired cooler raw cooling water valves as follows:

8.3.5.1 [SEOPR] Establish communications with Unit 2 control room, and Monitor RCW Header Pressure using 2-PI-024-0018 at Panel 2-9-20, THEN 8.3.5.2 SLOWLY OPEN Stator CLR OUTLET A(B) VALVE 2-HCV-024-0620 A(B) to the cooler to remain in service.

[SEOPR 96-0-024-006]

8.3.5.3 [SEOPRI IF RCW Header Pressure drops to 48 psig, THEN START additional RCW pumps as necessary to restore RCW Header Pressure > 48 psig [SEOPR 96-0-024-004]

8.3.5.4 Stator Cooler A Raw Cooling Water Isolation:

8.3.5.4.1 CLOSE STATOR CLR INLET A VALVE, 2-SHV-024-0619A.

8.3.5.4.2 CLOSE STATOR CLR OUTLET A VALVE, 2-THV-024-0620A.

8.3.5.5 Stator Cooler B Raw Cooling Water Isolation:

8.3.5.5.1 CLOSE STATOR CLR INLET B VALVE, 2-SHV-024-0619B.

8.3.5.5.2 CLOSE STATOR CLR OUTLET B VALVE, 2-THV-024-0620B.

Page 19 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.3 Isolating One Stator Cooler While Maintaining Generator Operation (Continued)

CAUTION Since maximum water temperature in the windings is always greater than the average outlet temperature of the stator water; it should be understood that average stator water outlet temperature can only detect widespread overheating of the windings. Overheating of individual armature bars must be detected by winding temperatures.

8.3.6 IF a stator water high outlet temperature (76°C) or high winding temperature (68 0 C) is indicated, THEN Immediately REDUCE generator load until stator current is less than 7726 amps.

8.3.7 MONITOR the System Parameters listed in Step 8.3.3 until stable readings are indicated.

8.3.8 IF A(B) cooler is to remain out of service, THEN REMOVE tube side and shell drain plugs.

8.3.9 IF stator winding and cooling water temperatures are normal, THEN SLOWLY RAISE generator load until one of the following conditions are reached (whichever comes first):

0 Generator load matches demand by the Load Dispatcher.

  • Any generator stator winding temperature reaches 68°C (154°F).
  • Generator stator cooling water temperature reaches 45°C (113 0 F).
  • Generator load reaches 21 kilo amperes as indicated on GEN PHASE A (B or C), EI-057-0047 (48 or 49)

(896,000 kva at 0.93 PF; 75 psig H2 pressure).

Page 20 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.4 Return of Isolated Stator Cooler to Operation 8.4.1 REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.0.

8.4.2 MONITOR the following parameters before, during and after the process of returning the stator cooler to service:

8.4.2.1 GEN STATOR COOLANT CONDUCTIVITY, 2-CI-43-16A, on Panel 2-9-8, indicates less than 0.5 p siemen.

8.4.2.2 VERIFY the following temperatures on Panel 25-114:

" STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET TEMP, 2-TI-035-063, (400 to 450 C)

" STATOR COOLING WATER GEN OUTLET TEMP, 2-TIS-035-0072, (550 to 680C) 8.4.2.3 STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET PRESS, 2-PI-035-0090, on Panel 25-114 (Normal 36 to 46 psig).

8.4.2.4 STATOR COOLING WATER HEADER PRESS, PI-035-0052, on Panel 25-114 (Normal 132 to 143 psig).

8.4.2.5 STATOR COOLING WATER GEN INLET FLOW, 2-FIS-035-0065, on Panel 25-114 indicates 552 to 620 gpm (normally 590-620 gpm at rated load).

8.4.2.6 Stator cooling winding temperatures, Computer Points D065 through D070, (Normal 55°C (131'F) to 68 0 C (1540F)).

8.4.2.7 Stator cooling storage tank level (Normal center of sightglass).

8.4.3 CHECK that generator load is at or below 21 kilo amperes as indicated on GEN PHASE A (B or C), EI-057-0047 (48 or 49)

(896,000 kva at 0.93 PF).

8.4.4 CHECK that the isolated stator cooler is ready to be returned to service and drain plugs are installed.

Page 21 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.4 Return of Isolated Stator Cooler to Operation (Continued)

(1) RCW pumps should be started as required to maintain RCW header pressure

>48 psig.

(2) [SEOPR] RCW pumps should be secured when the following conditions are reached to prevent RCW pump degradation due to impeller wear:

"* RCW header pressure >61 psig with only 3 pumps operating in parallel.

"* RCW header pressure >59 psig with only 4 pumps operating in parallel.

"* RCW header pressure >58 psig with only 5 pumps operating in parallel.

"* RCW header pressure >57 psig with 6 or more pumps operating in parallel.

Securing RCW pumps as directed above should ensure adequate supply header pressure remains to prevent auto start of standby pump when normally securing RCW pumps. [SEOPR 95-024-004) 8.4.5 Return to service the desired cooler as follows:

8.4.5.1 [SEOPR] Establish communications with Unit 2 Control Room, AND MONITOR Raw Cooling Water Header Pressure using 2-PI-024-0018 at Panel 2-90-20.

8.4.5.2 IF RCW Header Pressure drops to 48 psig, THEN START an additional RCW pump as necessary to restore RCW Header pressure >48 psig.

[SEOPR 96-0-024-0041 8.4.5.3 OPEN the following stator Cooler A Raw Cooling Water Isolation valves:

8.4.5.3.1 STATOR CLR INLET A VALVE, 2-SHV-024-0619A.

8.4.5.3.2 [SEOPR] STATOR CLR OUTLET A VALVE, 2-THV-024-0620A to 13 turns throttled from the Full Open Position.

[SEOPR 96-0-024-006) 8.4.5.4 OPEN the following stator Cooler B Raw Cooling Water Isolation valves:

8.4.5.4.1 STATOR CLR INLET B VALVE, 2-SHV-024-0619B.

8.4. 5. 4.2 [SEOPRI STATOR CLR OUTLET B VALVE, 2-THV-024-0620B to 13 turns throttled from the Full Open position. [SEOPR 96-0-024-0061 Page 22 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.4 Return of Isolated Stator Cooler to Operation (Continued) 8.4.5.5 [SEOPR] THROTTLE the RCW from STATOR COOLER A(B) 2-THV-24-620 A(B) 13 TURNS FROM THE Full OPEN position. [SEOPR 96-0-024-006]

CAUTION To prevent a loss of stator cooling water, the stator valves should be operated in the order indicated in Steps 8.4.6.1 or 8.4.6.2.

NOTE: Section 8.4.6. is for returning a cooler to service, after Stator Cooler A(B) was isolated per section 8.3.4.1(8.3.4.2).

8.4.6 For the Stator Cooler to be returned to service, PLACE the following stator cooling water valves in the positions indicated:

8.4.6.1 Stator Cooler A:

8.4.6.1.1 CHECK CLOSED COOLER B BYPASS 2-BYV-035-0835(Y-ll).

8.4.6.1.2 Slowly OPEN COOLER A INLET, 2-SHV-035-0865(Y-08).

8.4.6.1.3 IF the shell side(stator cooling water side) of the cooler was drained, THEN LOOSEN the cooler vent plugs one at a time and WHEN the cooler is vented and full, THEN TIGHTEN the plugs.

8.4.6.1.4 OPEN COOLER A OUTLET, 2-SHV-035-0864(Y-12).

8.4.6.1.5 CLOSE COOLER A BYPASS, 2-BYV-035-0900(Y-09).

8.4.6.2 Stator Cooler B:

8.4.6.2.1 CHECK CLOSED COOLER A BYPASS 2-BYV-035-0900(Y-09).

8.4.6.2.2 Slowly OPEN COOLER A OUTLET, 2-SHV-035-0864(Y-12).

Page 23 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.4 Return of Isolated Stator Cooler to Operation (Continued) 8.4.6.2.3 IF the shell side(stator cooling water side) of the cooler was drained, THEN LOOSEN the 'cooler vent plugs one at a time and WHEN the cooler is vented and full, THEN TIGHTEN the plugs.

8.4.6.2.4 OPEN COOLER B OUTLET, 2-SHV-035-0834(Y-10).

8.4.6.2.5 CLOSE COOLER B BYPASS, 2-BYV-035-0835(Y-ll).

8.4.7 If stator winding and cooling water temperatures are normal, slowly RAISE generator load to match load demand or maximum (1,280,000 kva at 0.93 PF; 75 psig H 2 pressure) REFER TO 2-GOI-100-1A.

Page 24 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.5 Draining water from Stator Cooling Water Storage Tank 8.5.1 REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in section 3.0.

8.5.2 NOTIFY Unit Operator water is about to be drained from Stator Cooling Water Storage Tank.

8.5.3 NOTIFY Chem Lab to DISCONNECT the 02 injection line from the Stator Water Tank Drain, Y-44 (2-DRV-035-0892) REFER TO CI-410.

8.5.4 OBTAIN a hose with a Chicago fitting on at least one end. (Long enough to reach the floor drain from the bottom of tank) 8.5.5 ATTACH the hose to the fitting at STATOR WATER TANK DRAIN, 2-DRV-035-0892(Y-44), (located on the bottom of the Stator Cooling Water Storage Tank) and ROUTE to a floor drain.

8.5.6 SLOWLY OPEN STATOR WATER TANK DRAIN, 2-DRV-035-0892(Y-44) using caution to not exceed the capacity of the floor drain.

8.5.7 NOTIFY Rad Waste that water is being sent to the floor drain.

8.5.8 When storage tank level is at the desired level THEN, CLOSE STATOR WATER STORAGE TANK 2-DRV-035-0892(Y-44).

8.5.9 REMOVE hose from drain and return hose to proper storage location.

8.5.10 NOTIFY Chem Lab to CONNECT the injection equipment to the Stator Water Tank Drain, Y-44 (2-DRV-035-0892)

REFER TO CI-410.

Page 25 of 26

REV 0028 TITLE: STATOR COOLING SYSTEM UNIT 2 2-OI-35A 8.6 Isolating Stator Cooling Demineralizer CAUTION With Stator Cooling Demineralizer isolated, conductivity monitors 2-02AN-043-0012 & 13 will be without flow and conductivity readings should be considered inaccurate and should be disregarded.

NOTE: The time stator cooling is operated with the demineralizer isolated should be minimized.

8.6.1 SLOWLY CLOSE STATOR WATER TANK DRAIN, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19).

8.6.2 CLOSE DEIONIZER OUTLET VLV, 2-SHV-035-0884(Y31).

8.6.3 IF Stator Cooling Demineralizer will be isolated longer than one hour THEN, CONTACT Chem Lab to perform stator cooling water conductivity checks.

8.6.4 WHEN it is desired to return Stator Cooling Demineralizer to service THEN, 8.6.4.1 OPEN DEIONIZER OUTLET VLV, 2-SHV-035-0884(Y31).

8.6.4.2 SLOWLY OPEN STATOR WATER TANK DRAIN, 2-CKV-035-0852(Y-19).

8.6.5 IF Chem Lab was sampling stator cooling water THEN, NOTIFY Chem Lab stator cooling water conductivity checks are no longer required.

Page 26 of 26